Apple 8550 Service manual

Apple 8550 Service manual
Manual Part No.
C7096-90967
*C7096-90967*
*C7096-90967*
Printed on Recycled Paper
C7096-90967
HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family Service Manual
Copyright© 2000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Printed in the USA
8500/8550 Printer Family
Service Manual
English
HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550
Printer Family
Service Manual
Copyright Information
Warranty
Trademark Credits
© 2000 Hewlett-Packard
Company
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
CompuServe™ is a U.S.
trademark of CompuServe, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptations, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited except
as allowed under copyright
laws.
Part number C7096-90967
First edition, April 2000
Printed in USA
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
NOTICE TO U.S.
GOVERNMENT USERS:
RESTRICTED RIGHTS
COMMERCIAL COMPUTER
SOFTWARE: “Use, duplication,
or disclosure by the
Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c) (1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data Clause
at DFARS 52.227-7013.”
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 USA
MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Photoshop™ and PostScript®
are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark
of Apple Computer, Inc.
UNIX® is a registered trademark
in the United States and other
countries, licensed exclusively
through X/Open Company
Limited.
Safety Information
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
To avoid electrical shock, use
only supplied power cords and
connect only to properly
grounded (3-hole) wall outlets.
Table of Contents
1 Product information
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Printer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Media requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Identification (model and serial numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Printer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
2 Service approach
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Parts and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
3 Operational overview
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Verifying package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Verifying the cables are installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Connecting the printer to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Changing the printer control panel overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Printer control panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Menu maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Selecting the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Installing the consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Configuring input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Verifying the printer is installed correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Verifying DIMM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Booklet printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
EN
3
4 Printer maintenance
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Printer consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5 Theory of operation
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Color theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Consumable detection mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Electrical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Mechanical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Paper path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Printer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
EPH controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Multi-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
6 Removal and replacement
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Maintenance units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Top assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Front assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Left assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Right assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Rear assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Multi-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker . . . . . . . . .338
4 Contents
EN
7 Troubleshooting
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Printer message troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Aids to troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Paper path troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Image formation troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Image defects troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Color balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Repetitive defects troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Repetitive defects troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Communications troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
8 Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Illustrations and parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Index
EN
Contents 5
6 Contents
EN
List of Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
Figure 36.
EN
Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Example of printer model number and serial
number label (110 V and 220 V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Formatter assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Media-handling accessories and options . . . . . . . . . 44
Contents of printer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Power cord connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C-link and power cables connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Parallel cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing the printer control panel overlay . . . . . . . . 79
Location of printer control panel features . . . . . . . . . 80
Consumables installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DIMM slot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Duplex registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing the toner catch tray cover . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning the toner catch tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Location of consumables in printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Contents of transfer kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Contents of drum kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Contents of fuser kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Cross-section view of internal components . . . . . . 136
Image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electrostatic latent image formation block . . . . . . . 142
Preconditioning exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Primary charging of imaging drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Black toner cartridge (left) and color toner
cartridge (right) development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Primary transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Post charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Secondary transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cleaning roller charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Transfer drum cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Imaging drum cleaning block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fusing the toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7
Figure 37.
Figure 38.
Figure 39.
Figure 40.
Figure 41.
Figure 42.
Figure 43.
Figure 44.
Figure 45.
Figure 46.
Figure 47.
Figure 48.
Figure 49.
Figure 50.
Figure 51.
Figure 52.
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Figure 55.
Figure 56.
Figure 57.
Figure 58.
Figure 59.
Figure 60.
Figure 61.
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74.
8 List of Figures
Waste toner level detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Color toner level detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Color toner lever detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Density sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Transfer belt control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning roller control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Carousel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Power distribution circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Power Save circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
High-voltage power supply circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Laser/scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Printer motors and heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Carousel motor (M1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Drum motor (M2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cartridge motor (M3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Main motor (M4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Pick-up motor (M5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tray 2 and 3 pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tray 1 pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Printer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Printer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Printer clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fusing and delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Timing chart for WAIT period (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Timing chart for WAIT period (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized
page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized
page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-17-inch
page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-17 inch
page (2 of 2)
198
2,000-sheet input unit sensors, switches,
clutches, and motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2,000-sheet input unit paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Multi-bin mailbox cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Multi-bin mailbox sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Multi-bin mailbox paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
C-link cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Stapler/stacker paper path and sensors . . . . . . . . . 215
Stacker paper path and sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
EN
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
Figure 77.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95.
Figure 96.
Figure 97.
Figure 98.
Figure 99.
Figure 100.
Figure 101.
Figure 102.
Figure 103.
Figure 104.
Figure 105.
Figure 106.
Figure 107.
Figure 108.
Figure 109.
Figure 110.
Figure 111.
Figure 112.
Figure 113.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
EN
Orientation of printer and accessories:
top, front, and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Orientation of printer and accessories:
rear and left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Attachment bracket, HP Color LaserJet 8550
MFP printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Locking pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Removing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Front right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Inside left panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Filler panel for tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Screws behind left door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Screws behind right door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Connector on top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Left door and strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Screws on left rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Screws on upper left door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Stopper hinges on lower left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Connectors on the right upper door . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
E-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Spring on right cover subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Right rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Screws on the right lower cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Plate, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer . . . . . . 243
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Bottom of the control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Laser/scanner shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Upper airflow vent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Face-down exit sensor rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Face-down output assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor . . . . 251
Subrelay PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Formatter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Connector on formatter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Back side of formatter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Feeder assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Face-up solenoid (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Face-up solenoid (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Screws on the face-up exit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Pick-up roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Registration roller assembly (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Registration roller assembly (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
List of Figures 9
Figure 116.
Figure 117.
Figure 118.
Figure 119.
Figure 120.
Figure 121.
Figure 122.
Figure 123.
Figure 124.
Figure 125.
Figure 126.
Figure 127.
Figure 128.
Figure 129.
Figure 130.
Figure 131.
Figure 132.
Figure 133.
Figure 134.
Figure 135.
Figure 136.
Figure 137.
Figure 138.
Figure 139.
Figure 140.
Figure 141.
Figure 142.
Figure 143.
Figure 144.
Figure 145.
Figure 146.
Figure 147.
Figure 148.
Figure 149.
Figure 150.
Figure 151.
Figure 152.
Figure 153.
Figure 154.
Figure 155.
Figure 156.
Figure 157.
10 List of Figures
Connectors on registration roller assembly . . . . . . 265
Density sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Paper pick-up assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tray 1 pick-up assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Tray 1 pick-up assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Rear of printer with cover removed . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Rear of printer with formatter pan removed . . . . . . 271
Formatter pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Formatter pan (left side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fan 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8550
MFP printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer . 278
ECO board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Cartridge motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Main motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Carousel motor PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Carousel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Lower air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Screws on the delivery drive assembly . . . . . . . . . 286
Access to main gear assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Developer/imaging drum bias supply,
HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Developer/imaging drum bias supply . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Post charger HV module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
High-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Cleaning roller HV module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Main relay PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Drum/cartridge drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Separation discharge high-voltage converter . . . . . 295
Plate over media size sensing PCAs . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Media size sensing PCAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Front cover of the 2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . 299
Back cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Left cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Vertical transfer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Right cover with VTU removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Tray 4 removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Paper pick-up assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Screw on front LED PCA assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
EN
Figure 158.
Figure 159.
Figure 160.
Figure 161.
Figure 162.
Figure 163.
Figure 164.
Figure 165.
Figure 166.
Figure 167.
Figure 168.
Figure 169.
Figure 170.
Figure 171.
Figure 172.
Figure 173.
Figure 174.
Figure 175.
Figure 176.
Figure 177.
Figure 178.
Figure 179.
Figure 180.
Figure 181.
Figure 182.
Figure 183.
Figure 184.
Figure 185.
Figure 186.
Figure 187.
Figure 188.
Figure 189.
Figure 190.
Figure 191.
Figure 192.
Figure 193.
Figure 194.
Figure 195.
Figure 196.
Figure 197.
Figure 198.
Figure 199.
EN
Front LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Main drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Paper quantity switch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Paper size switch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tension springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Front and back covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Paper bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Flipper assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Flipper assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Flipper assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Delivery head motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Transport belt motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Input paper guide (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Input paper guide (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Metallic tape and housing assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . 325
Metallic tape and housing assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . 326
Controller PCA (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Controller PCA (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Anti-curl strings (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Anti-curl strings (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Delivery head assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Delivery head assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Delivery head assembly (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Delivery head assembly (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Interlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Diagnostic LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
User status LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Attachment assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Bins removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Front and back covers removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Foot cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Stapler door assembly and controller PCA
cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Flipper assembly removal (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Flipper assembly removal (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Carriage assembly removal (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Carriage assembly removal (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Accumulator assembly removal (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . 347
Accumulator assembly removal (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . 348
Offset module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
List of Figures 11
Figure 200.
Figure 201.
Figure 202.
Figure 203.
Figure 204.
Figure 205.
Figure 206.
Figure 207.
Figure 208.
Figure 209.
Figure 210.
Figure 211.
Figure 212.
Figure 213.
Figure 214.
Figure 215.
Figure 216.
Figure 217.
Figure 218.
Figure 219.
Figure 220.
Figure 221.
Figure 222.
Figure 223.
Figure 224.
Figure 225.
Figure 226.
Figure 227.
Figure 228.
Figure 229.
Figure 230.
Figure 231.
Figure 232.
Figure 233.
Figure 234.
Figure 235.
Figure 236.
Figure 237.
Figure 238.
Figure 239.
Figure 240.
12 List of Figures
Stapler removal (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Stapler removal (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Stapler removal (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Stapler/stacker controller PCA or
stacker controller PCA removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
LED PCA removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Power supply removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Interlock switch removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Safety switch assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Attachment assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Flipper ribbon cable removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Stationary caster removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Adjustable caster removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer
configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer
configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Right upper cover detection interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Drum cartridge detection interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Black toner cartridge detection interlock. . . . . . . . . 426
Toner carousel door detection interlock . . . . . . . . . 426
Front cover/delivery cover detection interlocks . . . 427
Laser shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Left upper cover detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Right lower cover detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Printer paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Image orientation and direction of travel . . . . . . . . 442
Color-plane registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Developer streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Toner bubbles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Charge roller set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Waves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Missing toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Hot offset (glossy paper or transparency) . . . . . . . 450
Fading resulting from broken transfer guide . . . . . . 451
Color adjust page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Repetitive defect ruler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Cleaning the transfer drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Rear view of 2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Location of sensors in the 2,000-sheet input unit . . 475
Multi-bin mailbox power supply test mode switch. . 477
Staple position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Device timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
EN
Figure 241.
Figure 242.
Figure 243.
Figure 244.
Figure 245.
Figure 246.
Figure 247.
Figure 248.
Figure 249.
Figure 250.
Figure 251.
Figure 252.
Figure 253.
Figure 254.
Figure 255.
Figure 256.
Figure 257.
Figure 258.
Figure 259.
Figure 260.
Figure 261.
Figure 262.
Figure 263.
Figure 264.
Figure 265.
Figure 266.
Figure 267.
Figure 268.
Figure 269.
Figure 270.
Figure 271.
Figure 272.
Figure 273.
Figure 274.
Figure 275.
Figure 276.
Figure 277.
Figure 278.
Figure 279.
Figure 280.
Figure 281.
Figure 282.
EN
Error format for paper handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Connectors on the controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
General printer circuit diagram (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . 504
General printer circuit diagram (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . 505
General printer circuit diagram (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . 506
General printer circuit diagram (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . 507
Major assembly locations (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Major assembly locations (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Printer covers and doors (1 of 4)—Filler panel for
tray 2 (HP Color LaserJet 8550 base model only) . 519
Printer covers and doors (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Printer covers and doors (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Printer covers and doors (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Internal cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Internal components (1 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Internal components (2 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Internal components (3 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Internal components (4 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Internal components (5 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Internal components (6 of 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Drum/cartridge drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Delivery drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Tray 3 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Tray 2 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Paper pick-up assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Registration frame assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Registration roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Feeder assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Tray 1 pick-up assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Tray 1 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Delivery cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Transfer belt assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Fuser assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Fuser assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
PCA assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
2,000-sheet input unit covers and doors . . . . . . . . 560
2,000-sheet input unit internal components . . . . . . 562
Multi-bin mailbox components (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . 564
Multi-bin mailbox components (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . 566
Multi-bin mailbox components (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . 568
List of Figures 13
Figure 283. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) . . 570
Figure 284. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) . . 572
14 List of Figures
EN
List of Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Table 16.
Table 17.
Table 18.
Table 19.
Table 20.
Table 21.
Table 22.
Table 23.
Table 24.
Table 25.
Table 26.
Table 27.
Table 28.
Table 29.
Table 30.
Table 31.
Table 32.
Table 33.
Table 34.
Table 35.
Table 36.
Table 37.
Table 38.
EN
Features and accessories by printer model . . . . . . . . 22
Printer performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating environment specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Acoustic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Consumable storage specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Media capacity and sizes for input trays . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox . . . 33
Printable area specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Paper handling accessory status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Technical support websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers . . . . . . . . 68
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Proof and Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Proof and Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Color Adjust Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Service Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Replacement frequencies for printer consumables . . 119
Subtractive color absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Subtractive color mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Additive color mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fusing temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Printer motor and heater names and descriptions . . 171
Fan operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Feed speeds based on media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Printer sensor names and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Printer switch names and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tray 2 and Tray 3 paper-size detection . . . . . . . . . . 188
Paper-quantity detection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15
Table 39. Paper-size detection switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Table 40. Multi-bin mailbox sensors, switches, motors,
and controller board PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 41. Numbered printer messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table 43. Sensor monitor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Table 44. Media jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Table 45. Neutral axis adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Table 46. Status LED on the 2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . 470
Table 47. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause
between each pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Table 48. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Table 50. Service LED flashing patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Table 51. User LED status interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Table 52. Operating errors in the stapler/stacker . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Table 53. Open doors in the stapler/stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker . . . . . . 499
Table 56. Accessories and consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Table 57. Miscellaneous parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Table 58. Printer covers and doors (1 of 4)—Filler panel
for tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Table 59. Printer doors and covers (2 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Table 60. Printer doors and covers (3 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Table 61. Printer covers and doors (4 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Table 62. Internal cover assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Table 63. Internal components parts (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Table 64. Internal components parts (2 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Table 65. Internal components parts (3 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Table 66. Internal components parts (4 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Table 67. Internal components parts (5 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Table 68. Internal components parts (6 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Table 69. Drum/cartridge drive assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Table 70. Delivery drive assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Table 71. Tray 3 assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Table 72. Tray 2 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Table 73. Paper pick-up assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Table 74. Registration frame assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Table 75. Registration roller assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Table 76. Feeder assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Table 77. Tray 1 pick-up assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Table 78. Tray 1 assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
16 List of Tables
EN
Table 79.
Table 80.
Table 81.
Table 82.
Table 83.
Table 84.
Table 85.
Table 86.
Table 87.
Table 88.
Table 89.
Table 90.
Table 91.
Table 92.
EN
Delivery assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Delivery cover assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Transfer belt assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Fuser assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
PCA assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
2,000-sheet input unit cover and door parts . . . . . . . 561
2,000-sheet input unit internal component parts . . . . 563
Multi-bin mailbox component parts (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . 565
Multi-bin mailbox component parts (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . 567
Multi-bin mailbox component parts (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . 569
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2) . . . 571
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2) . . . 573
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
List of Tables 17
18 List of Tables
EN
1
Product information
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Printer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating environment specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Acoustic emission specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Consumable storage specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
General guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Media requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Selecting media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Storing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Media capacity and sizes for input trays . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox . . . 33
Printable area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Media considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Media to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Identification (model and serial numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
EN
Chapter contents 19
Printer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
External views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Formatter assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Media-handling accessories and options . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
FCC regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Canadian DOC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
VCCI statement (Japan)—8500 models . . . . . . . . . . . 54
VCCI statement (Japan)—8550 models . . . . . . . . . . . 54
EMI statement (Korea)—8500 models . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
EMI statement (Korea)—8550 models . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Laser safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Laser statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Product information sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Toner safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Ozone safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
20 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Introduction
This manual covers service topics for the following printers and their
paper-handling optional accessories:
Note
EN
HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer (base model)
HP Color LaserJet 8500 N printer
HP Color LaserJet 8500 DN printer
HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer (base model)
HP Color LaserJet 8550 N printer
HP Color LaserJet 8550 DN printer
HP Color LaserJet 8550 GN printer
HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP—print engine only
Service topics for the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer’s copy
module, automatic document feeder, and 1,000-sheet input paper deck
are not included in this manual. See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP
printer service manual for all service information related to these
devices.
Introduction 21
Printer features
Table 1. Features and accessories by printer model
Model
8500
8500
N
8500
DN
8550
8550
N
8550
DN
8550
GN
8550
MFP
Standard DIMM
memory (in MB)
32
32
64
32
64
64
128
64
Maximum DIMM
memory1 (in MB)
256
256
256
512
512
512
512
512
Internal hard disk
X
X
X
X
X
X
HP JetDirect EIO card
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Feature/accessory
Features
Accessories
500-sheet tray 2
X
2,000-sheet input unit
X
X
X
Duplexer
X
X
X
Copy module
X
X
External (EIOcompatible) printer
hard disk
X
DRAM DIMMs
(synchronous)
X
X
Duplexer2
X
X
HP JetDirect EIO card
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
500-sheet input tray
X
1,000-sheet paper
deck (input)
X
Automatic document
feeder
X
Multi-bin mailbox
(output)
3,000-sheet stapler/
stacker or 3,000sheet stacker (output)
X
X
X
X
X
1
To expand the dual inline memory module (DIMM) memory to 512 MB, install 64-MB DIMMs in all
eight DIMM slots. Optimized memory for all models is 128 MB.
2
Minimum 64 MB memory recommended for automatic duplex printing.
22 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Table 2. Printer performance
Print speeds
24 pages per minute (ppm) black and white (b/w)
6 ppm color
Text and graphics
resolution
600 dots per inch (dpi) resolution
Letter and A4-size
24 ppm b/w; 6 ppm color
Legal, Executive,
and 11-by-17 inch size
12 ppm b/w; 3 ppm color
Approximate print
speeds
Heavy paper
Transparencies
Fonts
Printer personality
support
User interface and EIO
3.2 ppm b/w; 2.2 ppm color
2.6 ppm b/w; 2.0 ppm color
TrueType™ rasterizer in both HP PCL and Adobe
PostScript®
45 scalable HP typefaces
136 scalable Adobe PostScript fonts
Automatic personality switching
PCL and PostScript support
Standard ECP or bidirectional parallel cable interface
(IEEE-1284 compliant)
2 enhanced input/output (EIO) slots
Automatic input/output (I/O) switching
The approximate print speeds offered by this printer might vary from
those listed above because the following factors affect processing
time:
EN
complexity and size of graphics
I/O configuration
computer configuration
amount of printer memory
network operating system
network configuration
printer color calibration
Printer features 23
Specifications
Electrical specifications
Table 3. Electrical specifications
Item
110-volt models
220-volt models
Power requirements
100 to 127 V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
220 to 240 V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
750 W (average)
375 W (average)
190 W (average)
less than 45 W
less than 2 W
750 W (average)
375 W (average)
190 W (average)
less than 45 W
less than 2 W
12.0 A at 120 V
6.0 A at 220 V
Power consumption (typical):
During printing (b/w)
During printing (color)
During standby
During Power Save mode
During Off mode
Minimum recommended circuit
capacity for typical product
Operating environment specifications
Table 4. Operating environment specifications
Item
Operating
Storage
Temperature
Recommended
Allowed
20 to 26° C (68 to 79° F)
15 to 30° C (59 to 86° F)
0 to 35° C (32 to 95° F)
-20 to 60° C (-4 to 140° F)
Humidity
Recommended
Allowed
20 to 50% relative humidity (RH)
10 to 80% RH
35 to 85% RH
10 to 95% RH
Altitude
Allowed
0 to 3,048 meters (0 to 10,000 feet) 0 to 3,048 meters (0 to 10,000 feet)
Note
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual for
dimensions that include copy module, automatic document feeder, and
1,000-sheet input paper deck.
24 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Acoustic emission specifications
Table 5. Acoustic emissions
Category
8500
8550
Operation position (per ISO 9296,
DIN 45635, T.19)
Printing: LpA 54 dB(A)
Standby: LpA 49 dB(A)
LpA 57 dB(A)
LpA 52 dB(A)
Bystander 1 meter (per ISO 7779,
DIN 45635, T.19)
Printing: LpA 50 dB(A)
Standby: LpA 45 dB(A)
LpA 54 dB(A)
LpA 47 dB(A)
Sound power (per ISO 9296)
Printing: 6.8 B (A)
Standby: 6.3 B (A)
7.0 B (A)
6.4 B (A)
Printer dimensions
Table 6. Printer dimensions
Category
Printer
Height
750 millimeters (mm) (30 1111 mm (44 inches)
inches)
1230 mm (48 inches)
Width
566 mm (22 inches)
566 mm (22 inches)
1056 mm (42 inches)
Depth
625 mm (25 inches)
625 mm (25 inches)
625 mm (25 inches)
Weight (with
consumables)
87 kilograms (kg)
(192 pounds)
100 kg (220 pounds)
118 kg (260 pounds)
EN
Printer with stand
Printer with 2,000sheet input unit and
multi-bin mailbox or
stapler/stacker
Specifications 25
Consumable storage specifications
The life of consumables is greatly affected by their storage
environment. Use the following table to determine the shelf life of
stored consumables.
For consumable replacement specifications, see page 119.
Table 7. Consumable storage specifications
Temperature
Normal (maximum of 2.5 years)
Severe (maximum of 18 days)
0 to 35° C (32 to 95° F)
High: 35 to 40° C (95 to 104° F)
Low: 0 to -20° C (32 to -4° F)
Maximum temperature change rate
40 to 15° C (104 to 59° F) within 3 minutes
-20 to 25° C (-4 to 77° F) within 3 minutes
Humidity
Normal (maximum of 2.5 years)
Severe (maximum of 18 days)
35 to 85% RH
High: 85 to 95% RH
Low: 10 to 35% RH
Atmospheric pressure
460 to 760 mm mercury (Hg)
26 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Site requirements
General guidelines
Locating and placing the printer correctly are important in maintaining
the performance level set at the factory. In particular, be sure to
adhere to the environmental specifications listed in this chapter. The
following are recommendations for locating and placing the printer:
EN
Install in a well-ventilated, dust-free area.
Do not expose the printer to direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or
ammonia fumes.
Install the printer away from walls or other objects. There must be
enough space around the printer for proper access and
ventilation (see figure 1 on page 28).
Install the printer away from the direct flow of exhaust from air
ventilation systems.
Install on a hard, level surface.
Install where the temperature and humidity do not change
abruptly. Do not install near water sources, humidifiers, air
conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances.
Site requirements 27
Space requirements
Note
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual for space
requirements for the copy module, automatic document feeder, and
1,000-sheet input paper deck.
1404 mm
55 in
290 mm
11 in
1
1085 mm
43 in
460 mm
18 in
363 mm
14 in
495 mm
20 in
1230 mm
48 in
2
838 mm
33 in
495 mm
20 in
1230 mm
48 in
3
838 mm
33 in
Figure 1.
Space requirements
1
Top view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an optional
multi-bin mailbox, 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, or 3,000-sheet
stacker)
2
Front view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an
optional multi-bin mailbox)
3
Front view (with an optional 2,000-sheet input tray and an
optional 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker)
28 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Media requirements
Selecting media
Many types of paper and other print media can be used with the
printer, within certain specifications.
CAUTION
Using media that do not meet the specifications outlined in this chapter
can increase the incidence of media jams, contribute to repair and
maintenance costs, and cause premature wear, print quality problems,
and problems requiring service. This service might not be covered by
the HP warranty or service agreements.
Before purchasing media or specialized forms, test a small quantity in
the printer. Make sure your media supplier obtains and understands
the media specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper
Specification Guide. For ordering information, see page 514.
Note
EN
It is possible that media could meet all of the specifications in this
chapter and still not print satisfactorily. This might be caused by
abnormal characteristics of the printing environment, such as extremes
in temperature and humidity.
For complete media specifications, see the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Paper Specification Guide.
Use only print media that meet the specifications outlined in this
chapter.
Do not try to print unsupported sizes or weights of media or other
unsupported media.
Always handle transparencies and glossy media by their edges to
avoid fingerprints in the image area.
Adhesives on any media must be compatible with the printer’s
fusing temperatures (approximately 190° C, or 374° F).
Do not use media that have already passed through the printer or
through a copy machine (even if there is no printing on the page),
unless you use the “manual print second side” feature.
Recycled media can be used with this printer. Recycled media
must meet the specifications described in this chapter.
Media requirements 29
Storing media
Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing media:
Leave media in the wrapper until you are ready to use it.
Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity
extremes.
Do not store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will
absorb humidity. Instead, place cartons on a pallet or on shelves.
Do not store individual reams in any manner that causes them to
curl or warp along the edges.
Do not stack more than six cartons on top of each other.
Rewrap partially used packages of media before storing.
Stack cartons upright and squarely on top of each other.
Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the
envelope edges.
Do not place anything on top of media (except for stacking
cartons of media), regardless of whether the media is packaged
or unpackaged.
When storing printed documents:
Do not store printed documents in vinyl folders.
Do not expose printed documents to petroleum-based solvents.
30 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Media capacity and sizes for input trays
The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by
each input tray. For best results, use HP LaserJet paper or
conventional white copier paper. The media should be of good quality
and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,
voids, perforations, and curled or bent edges. For a complete list of
media specifications, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper
Specification Guide.
Table 8. Media capacity and sizes for input trays
Tray 1
Tray Media type
Media size and
orientation
Maximum
capacity
Media weight
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
Card stock
Heavy (more than
28 lb, 105 g/m2)
Glossy
11 by 17 inch (portrait) 16 to 58 lb
JIS B4 (portrait)
(60 to 216 grams per
A3 (portrait)*
square meter [g/m2])
bond
A4 (portrait)
A5 (portrait)
Custom minimum (99 by
190 mm, 3.90 by 7.49
in) (portrait)
Custom maximum (304
by 469 mm, 12 by
18.5 inch) (portrait)
Executive (portrait)
ISO B5 (portrait)
JIS B4 (portrait)
JIS B5 (portrait)
Letter (landscape)
Legal (landscape)
100 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) bond
Envelopes
B5 (portrait)
C5 (portrait)
Commercial #10
(Com10) (portrait)
DL (portrait)
Double Post Card
(JPOSTD)
Monarch (portrait)
Maximum 24 lb
(90 g/m2) bond
Approximately 10
Labels
A4 (landscape)
Letter (landscape)
—
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Transparencies
A4 (landscape)
Letter (landscape)
5 mils (0.13 mm) thick
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
*A3 full-bleed is not supported by any of the HP CLJ 8500 or 8550 models.
EN
Media requirements 31
Table 8. Media capacity and sizes for input trays (continued)
2,000-sheet input tray
Tray 3
Tray 2
Tray Media type
Media size and
orientation
Media weight
Maximum
capacity
500 sheets of
20 lb (75 g/m2) bond
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
Glossy
A4 (landscape)
JIS B4 (portrait)
Letter (landscape)
Legal (portrait)
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2) bond
Transparency
A4 (portrait)
Letter (portrait)
5 mils (0.13 mm) thick
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
Glossy
11 by 17 in (portrait)
A3 (portrait)*
A4 (landscape)
JIS B4 (portrait)
Legal (portrait)
Letter (landscape)
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2) bond
500 sheets of
20 lb (75 g/m2) bond
Transparency
A4 (portrait)
Letter (portrait)
5 mils (0.13 mm) thick
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
Glossy
11 by 17 in (portrait)
A4 (landscape)
JIS B4 (portrait)
Legal (portrait)
Letter (landscape)
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2) bond
2,000 sheets of
20 lb (75 g/m2) bond
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
Limit to media-fill mark
on the media width
guides.
*A3 full-bleed is not supported by any of the HP CLJ 8500 or 8550 models.
32 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin
mailbox
The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by
multi-bin mailbox output bins.
Table 9. Media capacity and sizes for the multi-bin mailbox
Left (face-up) output bin
Mailboxes
Bins Media type
Maximum
capacity
Media size
Media weight
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
11 by 17 in
A3*
A4
JIS B4
Legal
Letter
250 sheets of 20 lb
16 to 28 lb
(75 g/m2) bond
(60 to 105 g/m2) bond
Paper
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Prepunched
Bond
Recycled
Color
Card Stock
Heavy (more
than 28 lb,
105 g/m2)
Glossy
11 by 17 in
125 sheets of 20 lb
16 to 58 lb
A3*
(75 g/m2) bond
(60 to 216 g/m2) bond
A4
A5
Custom minimum (99 by
190 mm, 3.90 by 7.49
inch)
Custom maximum (304
by 469 mm, 11.98 by
18.48 inch)
Executive
JIS B4
JIS B5
Legal
Letter
Labels
A4
Letter
—
—
Transparency
A4
Letter
5 mils (0.13 mm) thick
—
Envelopes
B5
C5
Commercial #10
(Com10)
DL
Double Post Card
(JPOSTD)
Monarch
Maximum 24 lb (90 g/
m2) bond
30 Monarch-sized
envelopes
*A3 full-bleed is not supported by any of the HP CLJ 8500 or 8550 models.
EN
Media requirements 33
Printable area
Print areas shown in the table below are defined as follows:
Non-masked area—the maximum area in which image signals
are not masked by the compulsory formation of blank image area
(this is the maximum area that can be addressed by the laser
beam).
Recommended print area—the maximum area in which image
signals can be printed on media without any loss of image
signals, excluding manual feed.
Image assurance area—the maximum area in which print quality
can be assured, including manual feed.
Table 10. Printable area specification
Margin
Media type
Non-masked print
area
Cut sheet
Envelope
Recommended
print area
Cut sheet
Envelope
Image assurance
area
Cut sheet
Envelope
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
2.1 mm
(0.083 inch)
2.1 mm
(0.083 inch)
2.9 mm
(0.114 inch)
2.6 mm
(0.102 inch)
3.2 mm
(0.126 inch)
3.3 mm
(0.130 inch)
3.7 mm
(0.146 inch)
3.5 mm
(0.138 inch)
3.0 mm
(0.118 inch)
8.0 mm
(0.315 inch)
6.0 mm
(0.236 inch)
10.5 mm
(0.413 inch)
4.0 mm
(0.157 inch)
8.5 mm
(0.335 inch)
4.5 mm
(0.177 inch)
9.5 mm
(0.374 inch)
6.0 mm
(0.236 inch)
15.0 mm
(0.591 inch)
6.0 mm
(0.236 inch)
15.0 mm
(0.591 inch)
5.0 mm
(0.197 inch)
15.0 mm
(0.591 inch)
5.0 mm
(0.197 inch)
15.0 mm
(0.591 inch)
34 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Media considerations
Note
Not all media types are supported in all modes.
Media for duplexer
The duplexer accepts standard-sized media as large as A3 media.
The duplexer accepts up to 28 lb (105 g/m2) bond.
Envelopes
CAUTION
The Envelope media-type setting in the printer driver has been
optimized for the best print adhesion for most envelopes.
The Heavy Paper mode might also work well for some
envelopes, especially if the printing environment humidity is low.
Use the left (face-up) output bin to reduce curl.
Envelopes with more than one flap can wrinkle, crease, and
cause jams.
To prevent severe printer damage, envelopes with peel-off adhesive
strips must use adhesives compatible with the printer’s fusing
temperatures (approximately 190° C or 374° F).
Transparencies
WARNING!
EN
The default output for all transparencies is the top output bin for
all HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models.
The printer’s internal color settings are optimized for the best
color quality if Transparency is selected as the media type in the
printer driver. Using other media type settings will result in less
accurate colors.
The printer only supports transparencies of 5 mils (0.13 mm) in
thickness.
To prevent damage to the printer, transparencies must be able to
withstand the printer’s fusing temperature (approximately 190° C
or 374° F).
Handle transparencies by the edges. Oil from your fingers can be
deposited on the transparencies, causing print quality problems.
Allow printed transparencies to cool before handling to prevent
curling.
Allow transparencies to cool before handling to prevent burns.
Media requirements 35
Glossy media
If you want the effect of glossy media, use only HP LaserJet soft gloss
media in this printer. HP soft gloss is the only glossy media
supported by the printer. For ordering information, see page 513.
Heavy paper stock
Heavy paper stock is any paper from 28 lb to 58 lb (105 to 216 g/m2).
Always print heavy paper stock from tray 1. In the printer driver, select
Heavy Paper or Cardstock as the paper type on the paper tab to
ensure the correct finish on the media. Also, use the left (face-up)
output bin to prevent media jams. For more information about
changing the printer driver settings, see the online help.
Do not use extremely heavy paper stock (greater than 58 lb, or
216 g/m2 bond). Misfeeds, mis-stacking, media jams, poor toner
fusing, poor print quality, and excessive mechanical wear can result.
Colored media
Colored media should be of the same high quality as white
xerographic paper. Pigments used must be able to withstand the
printer’s fusing temperature (approximately 190° C, or 374° F). Do not
use media on which a colored coating was added after production.
The printer cannot detect the color of media you are using. Varying
the shade or color of the media can change the shades of the printed
colors.
36 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Media to avoid
To avoid poor print quality or damage to the printer, do not use any of
the following:
EN
coated or embossed media
media with cutouts or perforations (except prepunched paper)
media that produce hazardous emissions, melt, offset, or discolor
when heated to the printer’s fusing temperature (approximately
190° C, or 374° F)
media that have already been through a photocopier or laser
printer (even if there is no printing on the page) unless you use
the “manual print second side” feature.
media with watermarks, if solid fill areas are to be printed
prepunched paper in which the holes were punched 8 mm from
the edge of the pages
multi-part forms
media with irregularities, such as tabs or staples
preprinted media with thermography or inks that melt, vaporize,
or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing
temperature (approximately 190° C, or 374° F)
transparencies designed for ink jet printers
any glossy media other than HP soft gloss media
media with texture or finish different from one side to the other
creased or folded media (except for supported envelopes)
Media requirements 37
Identification (model and serial numbers)
To identify the model number and serial number, find the label located
on the rear of the printer, similar to the one shown in figure 2 (the
example shown is from an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer).
(serial #)
(model #)
Figure 2.
Example of printer model number and serial number label
(110 V and 220 V)
38 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Printer Information
Configurations
Available configurations for the HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer
appear below; available configurations for the HP Color LaserJet
8550 printer are shown on the following page.
The HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer is available in the following
configurations:
HP Color LaserJet 8500
The HP Color LaserJet 8500 comes standard with a 100-sheet tray 1,
a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, and 32 MB
random-access memory (RAM).
HP Color LaserJet 8500 N
The HP Color LaserJet 8500N comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, 32 MB
RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), and an internal
hard disk.
HP Color LaserJet 8500 DN
The HP Color LaserJet 8500DN comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet
input tray, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, and five stabilizing legs.
EN
Printer Information 39
The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer is available in the following
configurations:
HP Color LaserJet 8550
The HP Color LaserJet 8550 comes standard with a 100-sheet tray 1,
a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, and 32 MB RAM.
HP Color LaserJet 8550 N
The HP Color LaserJet 8550N comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a printer stand, 64 MB
RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), and an internal
hard disk.
HP Color LaserJet 8550 DN
The HP Color LaserJet 8550DN comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet
input tray, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, and five stabilizing legs.
HP Color LaserJet 8550 GN
The HP Color LaserJet 8550GN comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a (tray 4) 2000-sheet
input tray, a duplexer, 128 MB RAM, an HP JetDirect print server (10/
100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk, five stabilizing legs, and a highperformance processor.
HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP
The HP Color LaserJet 8550MFP comes standard with a 100-sheet
tray 1, a 500-sheet tray 2, a 500-sheet tray 3, a duplexer, 64 MB RAM,
an HP JetDirect print server (10/100 Base-TX), an internal hard disk,
a printer/copy module stand, and a copy module.
40 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
External views
7
1
8
2
9
10
3
4
11
5
6
12
Figure 3.
Note
EN
Front view
7
Top (face-down) output bin
8
Flip-up media stop (HP Color
LaserJet 8500 models only)
9
Right upper cover
1
Printer control panel (see
page 80)
2
Left (face-up) output bin
3
Front door handle
4
5
Input tray 2 (not included on 10 Input tray 1
the HP Color LaserJet 8550
11 Right lower cover
base model, but available as
12 Printer stand (base unit and
an option)
N models only)
Power/standby button
6
Input tray 3
The power/standby button shown above is immobilized in HP Color
LaserJet 8550 MFP printers. Use the power button at the top, right of
the copy module after plugging the printer power cable into the right
side of the copy module. See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer
user guide for more information.
Printer Information 41
3
1
4
2
5
Figure 4.
Rear view
1
Air filter door
2
Formatter tray
3
Left upper cover
4
Left lower cover
5
Power connector
42 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Formatter assemblies
2
3
4
5
1
6
7
Figure 5.
Note
EN
Formatter assemblies
1
Formatter board
2
DIMM slots
3
Printer hard disk location (factory-installed on HP Color LaserJet
8500 N, 8500 DN, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, and 8550 MFP
models)
4
EIO slot 2 (shown with HP JetDirect internal print server)
5
Parallel IEEE-1284 interface port (C-size)
6
EIO slot 1
7
C-link connector
Either EIO slot can have a hard disk installed if there is not a factoryinstalled internal hard drive mounted on the formatter board. However,
the printer does not support two hard disks; the printer can support one
hard disk at a time—either internal or external.
Printer Information 43
Media-handling accessories and options
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 6.
Media-handling accessories and options
1
Multi-bin mailbox
2
Multi-bin mailbox status light
3
Duplexer (internal)
4
Tray 2
5
2,000-sheet input tray (tray 4) (only available on 8500 DN,
8550 DN, and 8550 GN models)
6
Tray 4 status light
7
Media transfer door (attached to tray 4)
8
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker (only
compatible with 8550 DN and 8550 GN models)
9
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker status light
44 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Table 11. Paper handling accessory status LEDs
LED
Flashing amber
2,000-sheet input
unit
Multi-bin mailbox
Stapler/stacker
The accessory has a
media jam or a page
needs to be removed
from the 2,000-sheet
input unit, even if the
page is not jammed.
The accessory has a
media jam or a page
needs to be removed
from the multi-bin
mailbox, even if the
page is not jammed.
The accessory has a
media jam or a staple
jam, or one or more
bins are full.
The vertical transfer
unit (VTU) might be
open.
The accessory is not
correctly attached to
the printer.
The accessory is not
correctly attached to
the printer.
Solid amber
The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction.
Solid green
The accessory is on and ready.
Off
The printer might be in Power Save mode. Press GO.
The accessory is not receiving power. Check both the power supply and
the power cables.
EN
Printer Information 45
Safety information
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the U.S. Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
Note
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician.
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that on
which the receiver is located.
Any changes or modifications to the printer not expressly approved by
HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the FCC
rules.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
«Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité
électromagnétiques. «CEM».»
46 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Declarations of conformity
DOC—HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN
C3983A, C3984A, C3985A
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B1
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class A*
EN 5081-1:1992
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2/ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-21
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class1
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
* This printer contains Local Area Network (LAN) options. When the interface cable is attached to either of
the IEEE 802.3 connectors, the printer meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A.
February 12, 1997
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034
Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop
160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
EN
Safety information 47
DOC—HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550
GN, 8550 MFP
C7096A, C7097A, C7098A, C7099A, C7835A,
C7836A
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN
60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994+A11 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
EMC:
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class A1
EN 61000-3-2:1995
EN 61000-3-3:1995
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2/ ICES-0021
AS / NZS 3548:19951
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
WARNING!
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Boise, Idaho USA
May 1999
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034
Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop
160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
48 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
DOC—Duplexer
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Montemorelos 299
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060
México
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
Duplexer
C4782A
N/A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B1
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994
EN 50081-1:1992
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2/ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-21
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B1
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
July 16, 1997
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph
Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034
Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, P.O. Box 15 Mail
Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
EN
Safety information 49
DOC—2,000-sheet input tray
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Montemorelos 299
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060
México
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
2,000-Sheet Input Tray
C4781A
N/A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN
60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B1
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994
EN 50081-1:1992
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2/ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-21
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B1
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
- the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
- the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
July 16, 1997
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,
31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130,
D-71034 Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,
P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
50 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
DOC—Multi-bin mailbox
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Montemorelos 299
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060
México
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
Multi-bin Mailbox
C4785A, C4240A
N/A
is in conformity with:
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B1
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B1
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B1
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
Telecom
N/A
Additional Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
EMC
the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
Safety
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Quality System
This product was manufactured under a formal quality system.
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
April 29, 2998
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,
31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130,
D-71034 Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,
P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
EN
Safety information 51
DOC—3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Montemorelos 299
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060
México
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
3,000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
C4788A
N/A
is in conformity with:
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1+A2 / EN 55022:1994+A1+A23 Class B1
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B1
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B1
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
UL1950, Third Edition
Additional Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
EMC
the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
Safety
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
Quality System
This product was manufactured under a formal quality system.
February 10, 1999
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,
31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130,
D-71034 Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,
P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
52 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
DOC—3,000-sheet stacker
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Montemorelos 299
Guadalajara Jalisco, 45060
México
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Product Options:
3,000-Sheet Stacker
C4788A
N/A
is in conformity with:
EMC:
CISPR 22:1993+A1+A2 / EN 55022:1994+A1+A23 Class B1
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -4 Kv CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2 / ICES-003, Issue 2/VCCI-B1
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B1
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
UL1950, Third Edition
Additional Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CEmarking accordingly:
EMC
the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
Safety
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
Quality System
This product was manufactured under a formal quality system.
February 10, 1999
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,
31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
Europe Contact:
A Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH,
Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130,
D-71034 Böblingen (Fax: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,
P.O. Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
Note
EN
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for
Declarations of Conformity for the copy module, automatic document
feeder, and 1,000-sheet input paper deck.
Safety information 53
VCCI statement (Japan)—8500 models
VCCI statement (Japan)—8550 models
EMI statement (Korea)—8500 models
EMI statement (Korea)—8550 models
54 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser
products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This printer is
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act
of 1968. Because radiation emitted inside this printer is completely
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser
beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
EN
Safety information 55
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen
luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen
pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
Varoitus!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa
käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Varning!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan
användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass
1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa
olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu
henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista,
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi
tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
Varo!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle
laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
Varning!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren
för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
56 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
Product information sheet
The Toner Product Information Sheet can be viewed on the World
Wide Web at the following URL:
http://www.hp.com
Click “Search” and enter “Toner Product Information Sheet” where
appropriate.
International customers should see page 66 for appropriate phone
numbers and information.
Toner safety
Toner is composed of plastic and a small amount of pigment. Avoid
breathing toner particles; toner might be harmful to your health. Toner
can also stain clothing. Skin and clothing are best cleaned by
removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue, then washing
with cold water. Hot water causes toner to melt and permanently fuse
into clothing.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be viewed on the World Wide
Web at the following URL:
http://www.hp.com
Click “Search” and enter “MSDS” where appropriate.
International customers should see page 66 for appropriate phone
numbers and information.
EN
Safety information 57
Ozone safety
Ozone emission
The corona assemblies found in laser printers and photocopiers
generate ozone gas (O3) as a by-product of the electrophotographic
process. Ozone is generated only while the printer is printing (while
the coronas are energized).
This HP LaserJet printer contains an charcoal filter to protect office
air quality. See page 119 for suggested replacement intervals.
Ozone standards
Standards for exposure to ozone have been established by the
Department of Labor—Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (DOL-OSHA) and the American Conference of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). These standards are
0.1 parts per million as a time-weighted average and a ceiling limit
respectively. All HP LaserJet family printers meet these standards
when shipped from the factory.
Recommendations for minimizing ozone exposure
Some people are extremely sensitive to ozone. In such cases, it is
advisable to position the printer away from the sensitive user. Also, a
more frequent filter replacement might be necessary.
Almost all ozone concerns arise from abnormal site or operating
conditions. The following conditions might generate an ozone
complaint:
installation of multiple laser printers in a confined area
poor conditions of the existing ozone filter
extremely low relative humidity
poor room ventilation
directing the exhaust port of the printer towards the face of
personnel
long, continuous printing combined with any of the above
Inspect your work environment for the operating conditions listed
above if you believe ozone emissions are a problem in your area.
(Your employer is responsible for providing a work environment that is
free of these conditions.)
58 Chapter 1 - Product information
EN
2
Service approach
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parts and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Obtaining related documentation and software . . . . . . 62
Ordering consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ordering field-replaceable units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Parts exchange program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
List Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HP ASAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Dealer Response Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HP Software Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HP Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Parts identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Customer Information Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HP Customer Care Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EN
Chapter contents 59
60 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
Introduction
Repair normally begins with the use of printer internal diagnostics in
conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures in chapter 7.
When repairing an HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer, first isolate
the location of the problem. Usually, simply sending a print job to the
printer from a computer is sufficient to determine whether or not the
print engine is involved. If it is not, see the service manual specific to
the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer.
Once a faulty part is located, repair is generally accomplished by
assembly-level replacement of the field-replaceable units. Some
mechanical assemblies can be repaired at the subassembly level.
Parts and supplies
Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8
of this manual. Use only accessories specifically designed for this
printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or
support provider. For a list of available accessories and their part
numbers, see page 511. Replacement parts can be ordered from
HP’s Service Materials Organization or Support Materials Europe.
The following table lists information for ordering from SME, SMO, and
HP Distribution Center (HPD).
Table 12. Ordering
Organization
Address
Phone
SMO (Service Materials
Organization)
Hewlett-Packard Company
Support Materials Organization
8050 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, CA 95678
(1) (800) 227-8164
(U.S. only)
SME (Support Materials Europe)
Hewlett-Packard Company
Support Materials Europe
Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33
D-7030 Böblingen, Germany
(49 7031) 14-2253
HPD (HP Distribution Center)
EN
(805) 257-5565
(805) 257-6995 Fax
Introduction 61
Ordering
Obtaining related documentation and
software
To order related documentation and software, contact SMO or SME at
the numbers listed on the previous page. Part numbers for related
documentation are listed beginning on page 514.
For information through the World Wide Web, visit the following
websites:
Table 13. Technical support websites
HP Customer Care Online
http://www.hp.com/go/support
Software drivers, support documentation, and
answers to frequently asked questions
HP Technical Training
(North America)
Classes and schedules
http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Parts
Parts information
http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcom.htm
Ordering consumables
Consumable parts and accessories are available directly from
Hewlett-Packard at the following numbers:
U.S.: (1) (800) 538-8787
United Kingdom: 0734-441212
Canada: (1) (800) 387-3154
(in Toronto: (416) 671-8383)
Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone
numbers.
To find a dealer near you, call the HP Customer Information Center at
(1) (800) 752-0900.
If the local dealer is temporarily out of stock, use one of the numbers
above or call (1) (800) 752-0900 to find another dealer near you.
62 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
Ordering field-replaceable units
This printer is designed to be repaired by replacing field-replaceable
units. Part numbers are located in chapter 8 of this manual and can
be ordered from SMO or SME (see page 62).
Parts exchange program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some selected parts. These
are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered through SMO or SME
(see page 62).
EN
Ordering 63
Technical assistance
List Server
A list server is an e-mail program that allows users to subscribe to
certain mail lists by sending e-mail to the server. The list server allows
HP LaserJet Technical Marketing to make the support community
aware of new or urgent information by sending information to
subscribers.
To subscribe to hardware-related information, send e-mail to:
subscribe-CLJ8500/[email protected]
To subscribe to software-related information, send e-mail to:
subscribe-CLJ8500/[email protected]
Once you subscribe, you will receive more information about the
benefits of the list server as well as additional instruction about how to
use the list server.
HP ASAP
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free
technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The
ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP
service at (1) (800) 333-1917 (U.S.) requires a touchtone phone.
HP FIRST
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a
phone-in fax service providing technical information for HP LaserJet
end-users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a
type 3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service-related information
includes:
service notes (HP Authorized Dealers)
Product Data Sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)
typeface and accessory information
printer support software information
toner information
driver request form and Software Matrix
64 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
HP FIRST, U.S.
Call the HP ASAP system at (1) (800) 333-1917 and follow the voice
prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe
Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers:
U.K: 0800-96-02-71
Belgium: 078-111906 (Dutch)
Switzerland: 155-1527 (German)
Netherlands: 06-0222420
Germany: 0130-810061
Austria: 0660-8128
For English-language service outside the countries listed above,
call (31) 20-681-8192.
Dealer Response Line
For further technical assistance on pre/post-sales and service
support, HP dealer service-authorized personnel can contact the
Dealer Response Line:
(1) (800) 544-9976, U.S. only
(1) (800) 363-6584, Canada
EN
Technical assistance 65
HP Software Distribution Center
For printer drivers and application note orders:
(1) (805) 257-5565
HP Direct
For supplies and accessories orders:
(1) (800) 538-8787, U.S. only
Customer Support Sales Center
For existing hardware and software service agreements:
(1) (800) 386-1115, U.S. only
For price quotes on or purchase of new hardware or software
agreements:
(1) (800) 743-8305, U.S. only
Parts identification
For service part number identification:
(1) (916) 783-0804
Customer Information Centers
For further technical assistance, service-authorized HP and dealer
service personnel can contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Customer
Information Center at (1) (800) 752-0900 in North America.
66 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
HP Customer Care Centers
HP representatives are available to answer technical questions at no
charge for a period equivalent to the original HP hardware warranty
period.
Questions regarding operating systems such as MS-DOS®, UNIX®,
or network configuration operating systems cannot be answered by
the Customer Care Center, and should be referred to your dealer.
Note
Each time you call the HP Customer Care Centers, you will be asked
to provide the printer serial number and the original date of purchase.
U.S. Customer Care Center (CCC)
The CCC can be reached at (208) 323-2551 and is available
weekdays from 6:00 am to 6:00 pm mountain time.
European Customer Care Center (ECCC)
The ECCC can be reached at 31-0-20-605-0505 and is available
weekdays from 8:30 am until 6:00 pm central European time.
Multilingual customer support representatives are available to answer
questions.
Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC)
The CCCC at (905) 206-4663 is available weekdays from 8:00 am
until 8:00 pm Eastern time. French- and English-speaking customer
support representatives are available to answer questions.
EN
Technical assistance 67
Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers
Table 14. Asia Pacific region Customer Care Centers
Country
Phone
Hours of operation
Australia
+ 61 3 8877 8000
9:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday
China
+ 86 (0)10 6564 5959 8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Hong Kong
800 96 7729
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
India
+ 91 11 682 6035
9:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Indonesia
+62 (21) 350 3408
8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday
Japan
+ 81 3 3335 8333
9:00 am to noon and 1:00 pm to 5:00 pm,
Monday through Friday
Korea, Republic of
+82 (2) 3270 0700
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
(outside Seoul only)
080 999 0700
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Malaysia
+60 (3) 295 2566
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Penang
1 300 88 00 28
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
New Zealand
+64 (9) 356 6640
9:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday
Philippines
+ 63 (2) 867 3551
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Singapore
+65 272 5300
8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Taiwan
+ 886 (2) 2717 0055 8:30 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday
Thailand
+66 (2) 661 4000
8:30 pm to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday
Vietnam
+84 (0) 8 823 4530
8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday, and
8:00 am to noon pm on Saturday
68 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
Warranty
The warranty outlines specific legal rights. There might also be other
rights that vary from area to area. Refer to the user’s guide for further
warranty information.
Installation
Installation by service personnel is included with the HP Color
LaserJet 8500 DN printer and is required with the HP Color LaserJet
8550 MFP. Installation is optional with all other models of HP Color
LaserJet 8500 and 8550 models. Installation can be arranged through
the Customer Care Center.
Toner cartridge information
The toner cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major
“consumable” parts. The toner cartridge contains part of the printing
mechanism and a supply of toner.
Note
For best results, always use a toner cartridge before the expiration date
stamped on the toner cartridge box.
Refilled toner cartridges
While HP does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during
the warranty period or while the printer is under a maintenance
contract, it is not recommended for the following reasons:
EN
Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges are not
covered under HP warranty or maintenance contracts.
HP has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner
cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new
HP LaserJet toner cartridge. HP also cannot predict what the
long-term reliability effect on the printer is from using different
toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the
customer’s perception of the printer. HP has no control over the
actual print quality produced by a refilled toner cartridge.
Warranty 69
Recycling toner cartridges
To reduce waste, HP offers a recycling program for used toner
cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled.
Plastics and other materials are recycled. HP pays the shipping costs
from the user to the recycling facility.
70 Chapter 2 - Service approach
EN
3
Operational overview
Chapter contents
Verifying package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Verifying the cables are installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printer with stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printer with a 2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connecting the printer to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TX network . . 77
Connecting to a 10Base2 network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connecting to a LocalTalk network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connecting a parallel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing the printer control panel overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Printer control panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Menu maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Proof and Print Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8500) . . . . . 84
Quick Copy Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . . . 84
Private/Stored Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . 85
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Duplex Registration Menu (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . 91
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Color Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Service Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EN
Chapter contents 71
Selecting the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Installing the consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Selecting the mode for tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuring media type and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Verifying the printer is installed correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
EIO page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Verifying DIMM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550). . . . . . . . . . . 107
Booklet printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Resetting the HP TonerGauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
72 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Verifying package contents
Verify that the following items were included from the factory:
4
5
1
6
9
7
2
8
3
Figure 7.
EN
Contents of printer box
1
Four toner cartridges: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow
2
Power cord
3
One software CD-ROM and one documentation CD-ROM
4
Manuals: getting started guide and quick reference guide
5
Imaging drum
6
Printer control panel overlay (if applicable)
7
Media size labels
8
Left (face-up) output bin
9
An HP Color LaserJet 8500 (shown above), 8500 N, 8500 DN,
8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, or 8550 MFP printer. See
Chapter 1 for descriptions of the various printer configurations.
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for
package contents of HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printers.
Verifying package contents 73
Verifying the cables are installed
Verify that the cables are connected to the printer correctly.
Printer with stand
Figure 8.
Power cord connection
WARNING!
An unstable printer can tip over and cause injury; verify that the printer
is secured properly and the printer wheels are locked.
o The power cord plugs into the connector on the back left corner of
the printer and into a surge protector or other grounded power
source.
74 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Printer with a 2,000-sheet input unit
Power pack
Interface cable
Power cords
Figure 9.
C-link and power cables connections
o The interface cable attaches to the printer above the parallel
connector and to the connector on the 2,000-sheet input unit.
o The power pack attaches to the back of the printer.
o The shorter of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the
connector on the back left corner of the printer.
o The longer of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the
connector on the back left corner of the 2,000-sheet input unit.
o The power cord plugs into the bottom of the power pack and into a
surge protector or other grounded power source.
EN
Verifying the cables are installed 75
Connecting the printer to the network
If the printer was shipped with an optional HP JetDirect internal print
server, one of two types is installed:
l
HP JetDirect Ethernet print server supports up to three different
network interface cables—RJ-45 (unshielded twisted pair) for
10Base-T networks, BNC (coaxial) for 10Base2 networks, and
DIN-8 for LocalTalk networks. This print server supports only one
Ethernet connection at a time—RJ-45 or BNC.
l
HP JetDirect 10/100TX print server supports RJ-45 (unshielded
twisted pair) cables for 10Base-T or 100Base-TX networks.
B
A
Figure 10.
C
Network connections
The locations of ports on the HP JetDirect internal printer server are:
A
RJ-45 port (this is the only connector available with the
HP JetDirect 10/100TX card)
B
BNC port
C
LocalTalk (DIN-8) port
76 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TX
network
o The connector of the unshielded twisted pair network cable plugs
into the RJ-45 port.
Connecting to a 10Base2 network
o Attach one section of the ThinLAN (coaxial) cable to a BNC “T”
connector.
o Attach another ThinLAN cable section, or (if it is at the end of the
network) a 50-ohm terminator, on the other side of the BNC “T”
connector.
o Plug the BNC “T” connector into the BNC port.
Connecting to a LocalTalk network
o Plug the end of the DIN-8 cable into the LocalTalk port.
Note
The printer can be connected to a LocalTalk network in addition to an
Ethernet or 10Base2 network.
If you use only the LocalTalk port, EIO 1 INITIALIZING appears every
time you turn the printer on if you have an HP JetDirect internal print
server installed in EIO port 1. The message should not interfere with
normal printing through LocalTalk. If it does not clear within
approximately five minutes, there is a problem with the print server or
the network. To prevent the message from appearing during normal
operation, connect a BNC “T” connector with two 50-ohm terminators
to the BNC port.
EN
Connecting the printer to the network 77
Connecting a parallel cable
Figure 11.
Parallel cable connection
o To print through the parallel port, the printer requires a 25-pin
male/micro 36-pin male (“C-size”) parallel cable that is IEEE-1284
compliant. The cable is included with the base model of this printer
only. It must be purchased separately for other printer models.
78 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Changing the printer control panel overlay
Replace the printer control panel overlay with the one included for
your language, if applicable. Then configure the printer control panel
to show printer messages in your language (see page 97).
Figure 12.
EN
Changing the printer control panel overlay
1
Insert a thin, rigid object under the two edges of the overlay on
the printer control panel and pull up evenly on both sides of the
overlay until it comes off.
2
Place the new overlay over the printer control panel and snap it
into place.
Changing the printer control panel overlay 79
Printer control panel layout
LCD display
Go
Menu
Item
Cancel Job
– Value +
Data
Ready
Select
Attention
Figure 13.
Location of printer control panel features
Go
Brings the printer online or offline and exits menus; will override load
tray messages to print on the default media size and type.
Menu
Allows access to the printer control panel menus to set the printer
defaults. This key permits both forward and backward movement
through the list of available menus.
LCD display
Presents data about the printer (such as printer status, required
actions, or data and print errors) in one or two lines of characters.
– Value +
Steps through the value choices for a particular menu item using – or
+. This key permits both forward and backward movement through
the values.
Cancel Job
Stops the current job from printing. If no job is printing and the display
indicates that a job is processing, CANCEL JOB cancels the job
currently processing and the next job begins to print. While the job is
being canceled, CANCELING JOB is displayed.
80 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Item
Steps through the items in a particular menu. This key permits both
forward and backward movement through the available items. Use
the right side of the key to activate online help in all HP Color
LaserJet 8550 printer models.
Ready
Indicator
(green)
l
On—The printer is online and able to accept and process data.
l
Off—The printer is offline and unable to accept or process data.
l
Flashing—The printer is going from online to offline, or from
offline to online.
Data Indicator l
(green)
l
On—Data is in the printer buffer, or the printer is processing data.
Off—The printer buffer is empty.
l
Flashing—The printer is receiving or processing data.
Attention
Indicator
(amber)
l
On—An error has occurred in the printer.
l
Off—The printer does not require attention.
l
Flashing—The printer requires attention.
Select
Selects the item or value currently shown on the printer control panel
display. An asterisk (*) is displayed when an item has been selected.
EN
Printer control panel layout 81
Menu maps
Press MENU to cycle through the printer control panel menus. Each
menu is described in a separate table in this section. Menu items are
displayed only if their associated option or function is installed or
activated.
All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer
is online. In a menu mode, if no keys are pressed for approximately
30 seconds, the system automatically returns to the top level and
displays one of the following:
l
READY if the printer was online
l
OFFLINE if the printer was offline
l
an existing error or service message
Making selections in the printer control panel menus
Note
1
Press MENU until the menu you want appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until the item you want appears on the display.
3
Press – VALUE + until the value you want appears on the display.
4
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the
right of the selection.
5
Repeat steps 1 through 4 until all of your changes are complete.
6
Press GO to bring the printer online.
Changes in the printer control panel will not take effect until all current
data in the print buffer prints or until the next print job.
82 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Information Menu
Press SELECT to print.
The printer displays READY when finished.
Table 15. Information Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
PRINT MENU MAP
None
Shows current settings of all menu items.
PRINT CONFIG PAGE
None
Shows the configuration of the printer
including installed options and serial
numbers.
PRINT PCL FONT
LIST
None
Shows installed PCL fonts including soft
fonts.
PRINT PS FONT
LIST
None
Shows installed PostScript fonts.
PRINT LASERJET
DEMONSTRATION
None
Prints a demonstration page for sales
purposes.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
None
Appears only if the printer has a hard disk
installed.
PRINT EIO PAGE
None
Appears only if an EIO device is installed
that supports EIO page printing.
PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG None
PAGES
Used for testing printer operation.
PRINT EVENT LOG
Shows printer events.
EN
None
Menu maps 83
Proof and Print Menu (HP Color LaserJet
8500)
This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed.
Table 16. Proof and Print Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<nn> = Number of copies
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<job name>
<job owner>
To cancel a proof and print job:
1
Press ITEM to display the job name and
job owner.
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
2
Press – VALUE + to change the number
of copies to be printed.
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
3
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
Press SELECT to print the remaining
copies.
- Or Press CANCEL JOB or set the number of
copies to zero to delete the remaining
copies.
Quick Copy Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet
8550)
This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed.
Table 17. Quick Copy Jobs Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<nn> = Number of copies
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<job name>
<job owner>
To cancel quick copy jobs:
1
Press ITEM to display the job name and
job owner.
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
2
Press – VALUE + to change the number
of copies to be printed.
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
3
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
Press SELECT to print the remaining
copies.
- Or Press CANCEL JOB or set the number of
copies to zero to delete the remaining
copies.
84 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Private/Stored Jobs Menu (HP Color LaserJet
8550)
This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed.
Table 18. Proof and Print Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<nn> = Number of copies
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
<job name>
<job owner>
To cancel private and stored jobs:
1
Press ITEM to display the job name and
job owner.
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
2
Press – VALUE + to change the number
of copies to be printed.
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
3
<job name>
<job owner>
<nn> SELECTED
<nn> PRINTED
Press SELECT to print the remaining
copies.
- Or Press CANCEL JOB or set the number of
copies to zero to delete the remaining
copies.
Paper Handling Menu
Table 19. Paper Handling Menu
Item
Value
TRAY 1 MODE=
(HP Color LaserJet 8500 only)
FIRST*
CASSETTE
TRAY 1 TYPE=
AUTO (8550 only)
PLAIN*
PREPRINTD
LTRHEAD
TRNSPRNCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
CARDSTOCK
HEAVY
GLOSSY
28# TYPE 1
28# TYPE 2
ENVELOPE
Description/action
Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE.
* Default setting.
EN
Menu maps 85
Table 19. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item
Value
Description/action
TRAY 1 SIZE=
AUTO (8550 only)
LETTER*
LEGAL
A4
A5
11X17
A3
EXEC
JIS B4
JIS B5
JPOSTD
COM10
MONARCH
C5
DL
B5
CUSTOM
Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE.
TRAY 2 TYPE=
TRAY 3 TYPE=
TRAY 4 TYPE=
PLAIN*
PREPRINTD (plain and
preprinted are
combined to one menu
item on the 8550)
LTRHEAD
TRNSPRNCY (trays 2
and 3 only)
PREPUNCHED
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
GLOSSY
28# TYPE 1
28# TYPE 2
The TRAY 4 TYPE= option appears only if
the 2,000-sheet input unit is properly
installed.
PAPER DEST=
TOP OUTPUT BIN*
LEFT OUTPUT BIN
STACKER OUTBIN
SEPARATOR BIN
MAILBOX 1
MAILBOX 2
MAILBOX 3
MAILBOX 4
MAILBOX 5
MAILBOX 6
MAILBOX 7
MAILBOX 8
The STACKER OUTBIN, SEPARATOR BIN,
and MAILBOX options appear only if the
multi-bin mailbox is installed and configured
for the appropriate mode.
DUPLEX=
OFF*
ON
Appears only if a duplexer is properly
installed.
BINDING=
LONG EDGE*
SHORT EDGE
Appears only if DUPLEX= is set to ON.
* Default setting.
86 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Table 19. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item
Value
Description/action
MANUAL FEED=
OFF*
ON
Allows the user to feed media into the printer
by hand rather than automatically from an
input tray. The user can select manual feed
instead of automatic input tray as the default
for the paper source. If MANUAL FEED = ON
and an input tray is not selected, then
manual feed is selected.
OVERRIDE A4 WITH LETTER= NO*
YES
Enabling this option prints A4-sized
documents on letter-sized media (if letter is
the default size), or it prints letter-sized
documents on A4-sized media (if A4 is the
default size). However, if an input tray is
configured for the size you want to override,
then the printer prints on the correct size of
media regardless of the override setting.
AUTO PAPER OVERRIDE=
Selects the media the job prints on if the
requested media is not found.
OFF*
ON
If ON is selected, the printer displays TRAY
<x> LOAD <type> <size>. After a delay the
printer automatically prints on the default
media. The delay time can be changed
through HP JetAdmin software.
If OFF is selected, the printer displays TRAY
<x> LOAD <type> <size> until it detects the
requested media type and size or GO is
pressed.
* Default setting.
EN
Menu maps 87
Configuration Menu
Table 20. Configuration Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
POWERSAVE=
30 MIN
1 HOUR*
2 HOURS (8500 only)
3 HOURS
8 HOURS (8550 and
some 8500 models)
10 SEC
Sets the length of time after use before the
printer switches to powersave mode.
PERSONALITY=
AUTO*
PCL
PS
Allows the user to determine which
personality will be the default for the printer.
When AUTO is selected, the printer will
determine which personality to use for each
print job.
Note: PCL support is not available at initial
product introduction.
CLEARABLE WARNINGS=
ON*
JOB
Determines the amount of time that a
clearable warning is displayed on the printer
control panel. If set to ON, then clearable
warnings are displayed until GO is pressed. If
set to JOB, then clearable warnings are
displayed until the end of the print job.
TONER LOW=
CONTINUE*
STOP
Determines the printer response to
consumable low and out messages
(including TONER LOW, TRANSFER KIT
OUT, FUSER LIFE OUT, and DRUM LIFE
LOW).
Note that the 10-second setting is for service
personnel use.
If set to CONTINUE, clear the message by
pressing GO. If set to STOP, clear the
message by replacing the consumable.
NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=
(8550 only)
NO
YES
QUICK COPY JOBS =
(8550 only)
0 to 50
The default is 32.
PRINT PS ERRORS=
OFF*
ON
If the PostScript interpreter detects illegal
commands, the job is canceled. If ON, an
error page prints. If OFF, there is no
indication that an error occurred.
INITIALIZE DISK
None
Appears only if the appropriate printer hard
disk is installed.
Press SELECT to initialize.
* Default setting.
88 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Printing Menu
Table 21. Printing Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
COPIES=
1* to 999
Sets the number of uncollated copies to be
sent if the number of copies is not defined by
the print job.
PAPER=
LETTER*
LEGAL
A4
EXEC
A5
11X17
A3
JIS B4
JIS B5
JPOSTD
Sets the default media size. The default
media size is used for jobs that do not
include media size commands, or when the
requested media size is not installed in the
printer.
ENVELOPE=
COM10
MONARCH
C5
DL
B5
ENVELOPE is not a separate item. The
printer control panel display switches when
- VALUE + gets to envelope sizes.
CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO
(8550 only)
YES
UNIT OF MEASURE (8550 only) INCHES
MILLIMETERS
X DIMENSION (8550 only)
3.87 . . . 11.7*
Y DIMENSION (8550 only)
7.5 . . . 17.7*
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT*
LANDSCAPE
FORM LENGTH=
5 . . . 60* . . . 128 LINES
PCL FONT SOURCE=
SOFT
INTERNAL*
SLOT n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
PCL FONT NUMBER=
0 (Courier)* to 999
PCL PITCH=
0.44 . . . 10* . . . 99.99
Appears only if the selected font is a fixedspaced contour font.
PCL POINT SIZE=
4.00 . . . 12* . . . 999.75
Appears only if the selected font is a
proportional-spaced contour font.
Sets the default font source to search first for
the requested fonts. Soft fonts are selected
first, DIMM fonts second, and internal fonts
third, if all are installed.
*Default setting.
EN
Menu maps 89
Table 21. Printing Menu (continued)
Item
Value
Description/action
PCL SYMBOL SET=
PC-8*
ROMAN-8
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO L6
PC-775
PC-8 DN
PC-850
PC-852
PC-8TK
PC-1004
WIN L1
WIN L2
WIN L5
WINBALT
DESKTOP
PS TEXT
LEGAL
ISO-4
ISO-6
ISO-11
ISO-15
ISO-16
ISO-17
ISO-21
ISO-60
ISO-69
WIN 3.0
MC TEXT
Default symbol-set mapping. Used only for
jobs that do not include symbol-set selection
commands.
COURIER=
REGULAR*
DARK
DARK emulates the heavier Courier font of
the HP LaserJet III printer. REGULAR is the
lighter and more accurate Courier font used
since the HP LaserJet 4 printer and in books
and magazines.
WIDE A4=
NO*
YES
Allows the user to change the printable area
of A4-sized media so that eighty 10-pitch
characters can be printed on one line. The
printer will print past the normal 5-mm
boundaries on the sides of the page. This
setting is useful if printing files formatted for
letter-sized media on A4-sized media.
APPEND CR TO LF=
NO*
YES
These are control characters identified in
ASCII to control the cursor (which is the
current printing position). LF (line feed)
moves the cursor down one row without
changing the column position. CR (carriage
return) moves the cursor back to column 1
without moving it down a row.
*Default setting.
90 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Duplex Registration Menu (HP Color LaserJet
8550)
Table 22. I/O Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
TRAY 1 PRINT TEST PAGE
TRAY 1 X=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 1 Y=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 2 PRINT TEST PAGE
TRAY 2 X=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 2 Y=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 3 PRINT TEST PAGE
TRAY 3 X=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 3 Y=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 4 PRINT TEST PAGE
TRAY 4 X=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
TRAY 4 Y=
-5 . . . 0* . . . 5
* Default setting.
I/O Menu
If an EIO card is installed, an additional EIO menu will appear.
Table 23. I/O Menu
Item
Value
I/O TIMEOUT=
5 . . . 151 . . . 302 . . . 300 Period of time, in seconds, that the printer
will wait without seeing data before
considering the job complete and printing it.
Does not have an effect for jobs with end-ofjob markers.
PARALLEL ADV
FUNCTIONS=
ON*
OFF
1
2
Description/action
Forces parallel port to compatibility mode,
which can be more reliable in some cases,
but will not allow the printer status to be sent
to the host computer.
Default setting for HP Color LaserJet 8550.
Default setting for HP Color LaserJet 8500.
EN
Menu maps 91
Resets Menu
Table 24. Resets Menu
Item
Value
Description/action
FACTORY DEFAULT RESET
None
Resets menus to the factory settings. I/O
Menu and Color Adjust Menu values do not
change.
RESET ACTIVE I/O
None
Resets I/O to known state.
RESET ALL I/O
None
Used to clear I/O problems.
RESET TRANSFER LIFE
COUNT
None
Used to indicate that a new transfer kit has
been installed.
RESET FUSER LIFE COUNT
None
Used to indicate that a new fuser kit has
been installed.
Color Adjust Menu
Table 25. Color Adjust Menu
Item
Value
PRINT TEST PAGE
None
BLACK SMOOTH VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
CYAN SMOOTH VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
BLACK DETAIL VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
CYAN DETAIL VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
YELLOW DETAIL VALUE=
-6 ... 0 ... +6
92 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
Description/action
See page 457 for information
about using this menu.
EN
Service Mode Menu
The Service Mode Menu can be entered only by pressing the left side
of the ITEM and the VALUE keys at the same time. For more
information about using the Service Mode Menu, see page 420.
l
NVRAM SETTING (nonvolatile random-access memory setting)
menu is provided to replace values that might be lost when a
formatter board or control board is replaced in the field.
l
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS menu is provided for
manufacturing and field service personnel to perform specific
diagnostic tests on the formatter board and its related
components.
• Service personnel can pinpoint problem areas on the formatter
board for replacement or for tracking defects.
• The operator can choose which tests are enabled and disabled
during execution, whether the tests run once or continuously,
and whether the test sequence stops upon failure or continues
despite failure.
• A fault log is implemented within formatter diagnostics to
record errors for review.
• Because many of the formatter diagnostic tests are destructive
memory tests, a special key sequence is used to enter the
mode. A message warns service personnel that the printer is
about to perform destructive memory tests.
Table 26. Service Mode Menu
Service Mode Menu Item
Value
Description/action
NVRAM SETTING
<xxxxxxxxxx>
This number is the serial
number of the printer.
SERIAL NUMBER
Press – VALUE + to change the
value of the current character.
Press SELECT to save the value
and move to the next character.
FORMATTER NUMBER
<xxxxxxxxxx>
This number is the serial
number of the formatter board.
Enter the number in the same
manner as the serial number of
the printer.
TOTAL PAGE COUNT
<xxxxxxxxxx>
Total number of pages
processed.
COLOR PAGE COUNT
<xxxxxxxxxx>
Number of color pages
processed.
* Default setting.
EN
Menu maps 93
Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued)
Service Mode Menu Item
Value
Description/action
NVRAM SETTING
(continued)
DUPLEX COUNT
<xxxxxxxxxxxx>
Number of duplex pages
processed.
TRANSFER LIFE LEFT
<xxxx>
Remaining life, from 0 to 100
percent.
FUSER LIFE LEFT
<xxxx>
Remaining life, from 0 to 100
percent.
ENGINE SETTING 1
<xxxxxxxxxxxx>
The registration values of the
engine used to align the various
color planes. The values are
listed on a sticker inside the
front of the printer (to the left of
the printer control panel and to
the right of the front door). Enter
these values only when
replacing the control board.
Enter only 12 characters for
each engine setting (0 [zero] to
F). The last two digits of the
engine setting might change
after setting because of varying
checksum values. This
difference is acceptable.
ENGINE SETTING 2
<xxxxxxxxxxxx>
See ENGINE SETTING 1.
CR PAPER SIZE
LETTER*
A4
The cold reset (CR) paper size
is the default media size in the
country for which the printer is
localized. If the NVRAM
SETTING menu is used to
change the CR PAPER SIZE,
the PAPER= setting in the
Printing Menu also changes to
make the new CR PAPER SIZE
the default media size.
CLEAR EVENT LOG
NO*
YES
Clears the printer event log.
FORMATTER
DIAGNOSTICS
EXECUTE TESTS
Press SELECT to enter the
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS
menu. ITEM and – VALUE + do
not function until SELECT is
pressed. Once the
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS
menu has been entered, MENU
moves only between the
FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS
and FAULT LOG.
* Default setting.
94 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued)
Service Mode Menu Item
Value
REPEAT=
NO*
YES
ON FAULT=
BREAK*
CONT
PAUSE
Description/action
BREAK stops at error and only
the printer control panel
displays a message.
CONTINUE does not stop at
error, and error is posted only to
the fault log.
PAUSE stops at error and the
printer control panel displays a
message. Press SELECT to
continue. Then, error is also
posted to the fault log.
PAPER PATH
ROM CRC=
YES*
NO
Firmware read-only memory
(ROM) is tested.
DRAM DIMM=
YES*
NO
Installed DIMMs are tested to
verify that they are supported
by the formatter board and
functioning properly.
IDE ASIC=
YES*
NO
This test verifies the read and
write integrity of the formatter
IDE ASIC.
DISK=
YES*
NO
Used to verify the integrity of
the printer hard disk and the
interface between the printer
hard disk and the printer. This
test also ensures that the
printer hard disk buffering and
caching are working properly.
VX ASIC=
YES*
NO
This test verifies the read and
write integrity of the formatter
VX ASIC.
FAULT LOG
first fault message
...
last fault msg
Records all errors that occurred
while formatter diagnostics
tests were executing. FAULT
LOG does not appear until the
formatter diagnostics have been
run and a failure exists. The
fault log is cleared when the
printer is turned off.
POWER OFF TO EXIT
Turn the printer off and on to
exit the formatter diagnostics
and reset the printer.
EXECUTE TEST
Press SELECT to execute tests.
* Default setting.
EN
Menu maps 95
Table 26. Service Mode Menu (continued)
Service Mode Menu Item
Value
REPETITIONS
1* . . . 10
TRAY 1=
ON*
OFF
TRAY 2=
ON*
OFF
TRAY 3=
ON*
OFF
OUTPUT =
TOP OUTPUT BIN*
Description/action
LEFT OUTPUT BIN
DEVELOPER MOTOR
REPETITIONS
1* . . . 10
EXECUTE TEST
DRUM MOTOR
REPETITIONS
1* . . . 10
EXECUTE TEST
SENSOR MONITOR
EXECUTE TEST
0123456789AB
000000000000
Once EXECUTE TEST is
selected, the current value (0 or
1) of each of the 10 sensors is
shown on the display, on the
lower line. The upper line of the
display shows digits to be used
as identifiers.
For information about
performing this test and an
explanation of the digits in the
upper line of the display, see
page 423.
EXIT SERVICE MODE
* Default setting.
96 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Selecting the display language
The printer supports printer messages and prints configuration pages
in a variety of languages. Use the printer control panel to set the
display language.
1
Note
To enter configure language mode, hold down SELECT while
turning the printer on. When CONFIG LANGUAGE (in English)
appears on the printer control panel display for approximately one
second, release SELECT. Once the printer has restarted,
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH appears on the display.
Only – VALUE +, SELECT, and GO are active while the display language
is being configured. All other keys are ignored.
If you press GO without selecting a language, the printer brings itself
online and all subsequent messages are in English. However, because
no display language was selected, the LANGUAGE = ENGLISH
message reappears (after the power-on self test) when the printer is
turned on again. This message appears every time the printer is turned
on until you select a language through the configure language mode.
Note
EN
2
Press – VALUE + until the language you want appears on the
display.
3
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the
right of the selection. The language selected is the default
language until another selection is made by restarting the printer
in the configure language mode.
4
Press GO.
5
Turn the printer off and back on.
See the HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer Service Manual for
information about how to change the display language on the copy
module.
Selecting the display language 97
Installing the consumables
When installing a new printer, install the consumables in the printer in
this order:
1
Imaging drum
2
Black toner cartridge
3
Color toner cartridges
1
2
3
Figure 14.
Consumables installation
98 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
To install the imaging drum
1
A
B
C
2
1 Open the front door of the printer
(A). Swing the upper (blue) lever to
the right (B). Press the white button
on the lower (green) lever and swing
the lever to the right (C).
CAUTION
There is a cover protecting the drum
cylinder. Do not remove this cover or the
drum might be damaged; it will come off
during the next step.
2 Push the drum into the printer. The
protective cover slides off as the
drum enters the printer.
3
3 Swing the lower (green) lever back
to the left, making sure it clicks into
place.
Note
If the lever does not return to its original
position, make sure that the imaging
drum is all the way in the printer.
EN
Installing the consumables 99
To install the black toner
cartridge
1
1 Remove the black toner cartridge
from its packaging and gently rock
the cartridge several times to
distribute the toner.
CAUTION
Do not lift or remove the shutter (A) on
the cartridge.
2
A
3
4
2 Align the arrow on the top of the
cartridge with the arrow at the top of
the slot in the printer and slide the
cartridge into the printer.
3 Place one hand on the cartridge and
use the other hand to pull the orange
ring and remove the seal. Discard
the seal.
Note
If toner gets on fabric, wipe the toner off
with a dry cloth and then wash the
clothing in cold water. Heat will set toner
into fabric.
4 Swing the upper (blue) lever back to
the left.
Note
If the lever does not return to its original
position, make sure that the black toner
cartridge and the imaging drum are all
the way in the printer and that the
orange seal was removed from the
toner cartridge.
100 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
1
To install the color toner
cartridges
1 With the printer on, press the blue
button beneath the carousel door to
turn the carousel to a toner cartridge
slot.
2
3
Note
The carousel will not rotate unless all of
the following conditions are met (each of
these actions engages an interlock
switch, which allows the carousel motor
to receive power):
l
the carousel door is closed
l
the imaging drum is installed
completely
l
the black toner cartridge is installed
completely
l
the orange seal is removed from the
black toner cartridge
l
the upper left lever is to the left
l
the right upper door is closed
2 Open the carousel door, and push
the (blue) locking lever to the right.
3 Remove the toner cartridge that
matches the color of the sticker in
the empty carousel slot from its
packaging and gently rock the
cartridge several times to distribute
the toner.
CAUTION
Do not lift or remove the shutter (A) on
the cartridge.
EN
Installing the consumables 101
4
4 Align the arrows on the top of the
cartridge and at the top of the slot.
Slide the cartridge into the printer.
Note
If the cartridge does not slide
completely into the printer, make sure
that the color of toner in the cartridge
matches the colored sticker on the slot.
5
5 Place one hand on the cartridge and
use the other hand to pull the orange
ring and remove the seal. Discard
the seal.
6 Push the blue locking lever back to
the left and close the carousel door.
6
Note
If toner gets on fabric, wipe the toner off
with a dry cloth and then wash the
clothing in cold water. Heat will set toner
into fabric.
Note
If the carousel door does not close,
make sure that the blue lever is locked
and that the seal has been completely
removed from the toner cartridge.
7 Rotate the carousel to the two
remaining slots (by closing the
carousel door and pushing the
carousel rotation button) and repeat
steps 3 through 6 for each color.
8 Close the front door.
CAUTION
To prevent contamination or damage to
the printer, do not move the printer after
the imaging drum or any of the toner
cartridges have been installed.
102 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Configuring input trays
When input trays are configured correctly, the printer automatically
uses the correct input tray based on media type and size.
Note
Setting the media type is necessary for best print quality on envelopes,
paper heavier than 24 up to 28 lb (90 to 105 g/m2) bond paper, and
paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2) bond.
For example, tray 2 could contain letterhead; tray 3, plain legal-sized
paper; and the 2,000-sheet input unit, plain letter-sized paper. If the
trays are configured correctly, when you set up a print job you can
choose the media type and size in the printer driver, and the printer
automatically prints from the correct input tray.
Selecting the mode for tray 1
Tray 1 has two modes: FIRST mode and CASSETTE mode.
FIRST mode is the default mode for tray 1. In FIRST mode, tray 1
functions as a multipurpose tray. When tray 1 is in FIRST mode,
specify the media type and size in the printer driver. The printer looks
first for media loaded in tray 1. If the correct width of media is loaded
in tray 1, the printer prints from tray 1. If the printer senses that the
media in tray 1 is a different size than the media specified in the
printer driver, then the printer does not feed the media (to prevent
toner residue on subsequent pages).
In CASSETTE mode, tray 1 functions as a regular input tray. When
tray 1 is in CASSETTE mode, load media in tray 1 and configure the
media type and size in the printer control panel.
EN
1
Press MENU until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the
printer control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until TRAY 1 MODE = appears on the display.
3
Press – VALUE + until the correct mode appears on the display.
4
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the
right of the selection.
5
Press GO to bring the printer online.
Configuring input trays 103
Configuring media type and size
Configuring the media type is beneficial for several reasons:
Note
Note
l
Configuring the media type prevents printing on the wrong (and
possibly more expensive) media.
l
If a user changes the type of media in an input tray, other users
can still print on the correct media.
l
The printer automatically adjusts its print speed to accommodate
special media (such as card stock, labels, and transparencies).
These adjustments give the highest quality output, saving time
and resources.
If the media type is not set correctly, then the printer might not print on
the correct media or at the correct speed for the media type, which can
result in poor print quality or excessively slow printing.
1
Press MENU until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the
printer control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until TRAY <number> TYPE = appears on the display.
3
Press – VALUE + until the correct media type appears on the
display.
4
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the
right of the selection.
Tray 2, tray 3, and the optional 2,000-sheet input unit automatically
sense the media size. To configure the media size for tray 1 in
CASSETTE mode, continue with step 5. Otherwise, proceed to step 8.
5
Press ITEM until TRAY 1 SIZE = appears on the printer control
panel display.
6
Press – VALUE + until the media size appears on the display.
7
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears to the
right of the selection.
8
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to configure media type in another tray.
- Or Press GO to bring the printer online.
104 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Verifying the printer is installed correctly
Configuration page
Print a configuration page to verify that the printer was installed
correctly. Configuration pages include the following information:
Note
l
general information about the printer (such as serial number and
number of pages since most recent maintenance)
l
installed languages
l
last three printer events
l
memory available and installed DIMMs
l
printer control panel and printer hard disk security
l
installed optional equipment (such as a 2,000-sheet input unit,
multi-bin mailbox, 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker or 3,000-sheet
stacker, or duplexer)
l
tray configuration
See page 415 for more information about and examples of
configuration pages.
To print a configuration page
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the configuration page.
EIO page
Use the printer control panel to print an EIO page to verify network
configuration.
To print an EIO page
EN
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT EIO PAGE appears on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the EIO page.
Verifying the printer is installed correctly 105
Verifying DIMM installation
The HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer comes with the following
amounts of memory installed in slots 1 and 2:
l
16-MB DIMMs in the base and N models
l
32-MB DIMMs in the DN model
The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer comes with the following
amounts of memory installed in slots 1 and 2:
l
16-MB DIMMs in the base model
l
32-MB DIMMs in the N, DN, and MFP models (2 x 32 = 64)
l
64-MB DIMMs in the GN model (2 x 64 = 128)
In all printer models, slots 3 through 8 are available for additional
DIMMs.
The printer supports ROM and synchronous DRAM DIMMs.
Extended data out (EDO) or Fast Page Mode DRAM DIMMs are not
supported.
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
Figure 15.
2
DIMM slot configuration
o DRAM DIMMs must be installed in synchronized pairs: two DIMMs
with the same amount of DRAM are installed in facing left and
right slots (such as slots 5 and 6).
o ROM DIMMs need not be installed in a specific configuration. For
example, ROM DIMMs can be installed in slots 1 and 3, and slot 2
can be empty. However, ROM DIMMs cannot be installed as pairs
(in corresponding left and right slots).
o The minimum amount of memory required to start the printer is
16-MB DIMMs installed in both slots 1 and 2.
106 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550)
The duplex registration feature allows precise alignment of images on
the front and back of a duplexed page. Image placement varies
slightly for each input tray. The alignment procedure must be
performed for each tray.
Y Axis
Figure 16.
EN
X Axis
Tray 2 Duplex
Registration
Adjustment
Duplex registration
1
Press MENU until DUPLEX REGISTRATION MENU appears on the
printer control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
3
Press SELECT to print the page.
4
Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number
on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page
align most accurately.
5
Repeat step 1.
6
Press ITEM until TRAY n X= appears and use -VALUE+ to enter the
number you selected from the test page in step 4.
7
Press SELECT to store the value. An asterisk in the lower right
corner of the display indicates the currently stored value.
8
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the y axis.
Duplex registration (HP Color LaserJet 8550) 107
9
Press ITEM to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until
PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want.
10 Press SELECT to print the page.
11 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the
page are now properly aligned.
Note
If the lines on the front and back do not properly align, then repeat steps
4 through 9 until they properly align.
108 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
Booklet printing
Booklet printing is available on all HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer
models and on HP Color LaserJet 8500 models with the PCL
upgrade.
Booklet printing allows the pages of a print job to be arranged so that
the document can be folded and stapled or bound into a book.
Booklet printing is supported in PostScript and PCL5c in Windows
3.x, 9x, NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and using the Booklet Maker for
Macintosh.
Note
Duplex printing must be selected in order to use the Booklet Printing
feature.
Offline Booklet Printing delivers the job to the top (face-down)
output bin. The user can remove the job from the printer and bind or
staple it. (Right and left binding options are provided for Asian
languages.) The user may also insert one full blank page (2 booklet
pages) at any location in the booklet.
Inline Booklet Printing uses a finishing device like a multi-bin
mailbox to staple or bind the booklet. (Booklet Printing requires the
document be sent to the left [face-up] output bin instead of the top
[face-down] output bin.) The user selects the destination of the print
job, and the software places the pages in the proper order for binding.
Custom Order allows the user to specify the page sequence.
EN
Booklet printing 109
HP TonerGauge (HP Color LaserJet 8550)
Note
The HP TonerGauge feature is not enabled on HP Color LaserJet 8550
MFP printers.
The HP TonerGauge feature allows the user to estimate how much
toner is left in the cartridges. The HP TonerGauge indicator appears
on the configuration page, on the status tab of the driver, and in
HP Web JetAdmin (for the network administrator). The toner level
indicated by the gauge may be used to estimate whether enough
toner remains in the cartridges to complete a print job.
Resetting the HP TonerGauge
After a new toner cartridge is installed, the user must reset the
HP TonerGauge from the control panel. When the top cover is closed
after the printer has detected a toner low condition, the NEW TONER
CARTRIDGE=NO message is displayed on the control panel for
approximately 30 seconds. To reset the HP TonerGauge:
Note
If the NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO message is no longer displayed on the
control panel and you have replaced one or more of the toner
cartridges, then press MENU repeatedly until CONFIGURATION MENU
appears. When you replace an empty or low toner cartridge, press ITEM
repeatedly until NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO appears.
1
Press - VALUE + until YES appears.
2
Press SELECT to save the selection.
3
NEW TONER=BLACK will appear. Press - VALUE + until the correct
color appears.
4
Press SELECT to save the selection.
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 if other cartridges have been replaced.
6
Press GO to exit the menu.
110 Chapter 3 - Operational overview
EN
4
Printer maintenance
Chapter contents
Cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cleaning the post charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cleaning the density sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cleaning the transfer charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cleaning the toner catch tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Printer consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Replacement frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Replacing consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
EN
Chapter contents 111
112 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
Cleaning procedures
Cleaning the post charger
Clean the post charger on the transfer
drum if there are light streaks in halftone
areas.
To clean the post charger
EN
1
Open the right upper door.
2
Locate the post charger unit cleaner
next to the transfer drum handle.
3
Slide the post charger unit cleaner
across the bar several times.
4
Push the cleaner back into place.
5
Close the right upper door.
Cleaning procedures 113
Cleaning the density
sensor
Clean the density sensor after replacing
the imaging drum and when printed
colors are inaccurate.
To clean the density sensor and
erase lamp
1
Open the right upper door.
2
On the inside of the door, locate the
density sensor and the density
sensor brush. Use the brush to
brush off toner particles from the
density sensor and the erase lamp.
Note
You can also use a hand wipe to clean
the density sensor. To prevent scratches
on the sensor, do not use any paper
products, such as tissue or paper towels,
to clean the sensor.
114 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
3
Replace the brush.
4
Close the right upper door.
EN
Cleaning the transfer
charger
Clean the transfer charger when
irregular wavy patterns appear in solid
backgrounds.
To clean the transfer charger
EN
1
Open the front door.
2
Find the knob below the transfer
charger.
3
Pull the knob out and push it back in.
4
Close the front door.
Cleaning procedures 115
Cleaning the toner catch tray
The toner catch tray will not normally have much toner in it. Clean the
toner catch tray before moving the printer to another location or when
performing routine maintenance at the customer site.
Figure 17.
1
Open the front door.
2
Remove the toner catch tray cover by releasing the tab on the
right side of the cover with a small screwdriver.
Removing the toner catch tray cover
116 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
3
Remove the toner catch tray.
4
Vacuum toner out of the tray, or use a hand wipe to clean the tray
if there is a small amount of toner in the tray.
WARNING!
Do not use a regular vacuum to clean up toner. The toner can penetrate
the vacuum bag, and toner might be harmful if inhaled.
Figure 18.
Cleaning the toner catch tray
5
EN
Reinstall the toner catch tray and cover, and close the front door.
Cleaning procedures 117
Printer consumables
1
2
3
4 5
7
6
10
8
11
9
Figure 19.
Location of consumables in printer
1
2
3
4
5
6
Color toner cartridges
Black toner cartridge
Imaging drum
Cleaning roller
Transfer belt
Transfer drum
7
8
9
10
11
Air filters
Transfer charger
Pick-up/feed rollers
Charcoal filter
Fuser
HP encourages responsible disposal of HP printer consumables
through its printing supplies recycling program. All consumables listed
above can be disposed of through the printing supplies recycling
program.
118 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
Replacement frequencies
Table 27 lists the approximate schedule for replacing consumables
and the printer messages that appear when each consumable should
be replaced (see page 513 for part numbers). For best print quality
output, use HP consumables that have been designed to work
together in this printer.
For an explanation of printer control panel messages, see page 368.
Table 27. Replacement frequencies for printer consumables
Consumable
Printer message
Page count
Approximate
time period1
Black toner cartridge
TONER LOW
REPLACE BLACK
17,000 pages2
2.5 months
Color toner cartridges
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
TONER LOW
REPLACE [color]
8,500 pages2
1.1 to 1.6 months
Drum kit
Imaging drum
Air filters (2)
Hand wipe
DRUM LIFE LOW
REPLACE DRUM KIT
50,000 black-and-white
only pages, or 12,500
color pages3
8.3 months for blackand-white only pages,
or 2.1 months for color
pages
Transfer kit
Transfer drum
Transfer belt
Transfer charger
Cleaning roller
Charcoal filter
Hand wipe
TRANSFER KIT LOW
REPLACE KIT
150,000 black-and-white
only pages, or 75,000
color pages
25 months for blackand-white only pages,
or 12.5 months for
color pages
Fuser kit (110 Volt)
Fuser
Paper rollers (6)
Hand wipe
FUSER LIFE LOW
REPLACE KIT
100,000 pages black-and- 16.7 months for blackwhite only pages, or
and-white only pages,
50,000 color pages
or 8.3 months for color
pages
Fuser kit (220 Volt)
Fuser
Paper rollers (6)
Hand wipe
FUSER LIFE LOW
REPLACE KIT
100,000 pages black-and- 16.7 months for blackwhite only pages, or
and-white only pages,
50,000 color pages
or 8.3 months for color
pages
1
Approximate life based on printing 6,000 pages per month.
Approximate average letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual toner colors. This value
can be used to estimate other levels of coverage from 2% to 35%. For example, 5,000 pages at 5%
coverage is approximately 2,500 pages at 10% coverage. Estimates made in this manner are only
approximate, and usage conditions and print patterns can cause the results to vary.
3
Drum life is stated in terms of letter/A4-size images. The number of images printed for each sheet of
media varies, depending on the mix of color, duplexing, and large-format printing. An image is a layer of
toner. A letter-size, color (CMYK) sheet printed on one side contains four letter/A4 images. A duplexed
sheet (printed on both sides) counts as two images. In color duplex mode, there are eight letter-size
images per letter/A4 sheet. An 11-by-17/A3 sheet contains twice as many letter-size images as a lettersize sheet.
2
EN
Printer consumables 119
Replacing consumables
Toner cartridges
For information about replacing the black and color toner cartridges,
see page 100 and page 101.
Transfer kit
Replace the parts in the transfer kit when the printer control panel
displays:
TRANSFER KIT LOW / REPLACE KIT
TRANSFER KIT OUT / REPLACE KIT
1
2
3
5
4
Figure 20.
6
Contents of transfer kit
1
Transfer drum
2
Transfer belt
3
Hand wipe
4
Transfer charger
5
Cleaning roller
6
Charcoal filter
120 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
3
To replace the transfer kit
1
Open the front door of the printer.
2
Push the white button on the lower
(green) lever and swing the lever to
the right.
3
Open the upper door on the right
side of the printer, and remove the
transfer drum.
4
On the right, back wall of the
opening, firmly pull the blue knob to
release the right end of the cleaning
roller. Lift the roller slowly out and to
the right to release the left end.
4
7
CAUTION
Do not touch the roller; hold the roller
only by the blue knob and left end to
avoid print quality problems.
5
While holding the new roller by the
blue knob, insert the left end into the
hole in the left side of the back wall.
6
Push the right end into its bracket
until it snaps into place.
7
Rotate the transfer belt up using the
blue lever on the bottom, right side of
the printer opening.
8
Using the blue handles, lift the belt
up and out of the printer.
8
Note
Do not touch the surface of the transfer
belt or poor print quality might result.
EN
Printer consumables 121
9
9
Replace the belt by resting the ends
of the new belt in the notches inside
the printer. Place the gear side in the
notch first to mesh the gear teeth.
10 Rotate the belt down into place.
11
Note
Damage to the drum can cause print
quality problems. Hold the drum only by
the handles.
11 Remove the protective sheet
covering the new transfer drum by
pulling the tab. Discard the sheet.
Reinstall the transfer drum.
12
13
12 Remove the transfer charger.
Remove the new transfer charger
from its packaging and while holding
the new transfer charger by its blue
clip, slide the new transfer charger
into the printer until the transfer
charger clicks into place.
13 On the inside of the door, locate the
blue filter cover and slide it in the
direction of the arrow.
14 Pull the old filter out of the opening.
122 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
16
15 Hold the new filter by the small
handles, and remove the new filter
from its packaging.
16 Slide the filter in under the guides in
the opening and close the blue filter
door, making sure it clicks into place.
22
17 Close the upper right door. If the
door does not close, the drum might
not be all the way in the printer.
18 In the front of the printer, swing the
lower (green) lever to the left,
making sure it clicks into place.
19 Close the front door and turn the
printer on. The printer control panel
should display the message PRESS
SELECT IF TRANSFER IS NEW. If it
displays the message, go to step 20.
If it does not, go to step 21.
20 When the printer control panel
displays the message, press SELECT
to bring the printer online and reset
the transfer drum life count. Then go
to step 22.
21 If the printer control panel does not
display the message:
a. Press MENU until RESETS MENU
appears on the printer control
panel display.
b. Press ITEM until RESET
TRANSFER LIFE COUNT
appears.
c. Press SELECT to reset the transfer
drum life count.
d. Press GO to bring the printer
online.
22 Place the used parts in the
packaging from the new ones. See
the included recycling guide for
recycling information.
EN
Printer consumables 123
Drum kit
Replace the parts in the imaging drum kit when the printer control
panel displays any of the following messages:
DRUM LIFE LOW / REPLACE DRUM KIT
DRUM LIFE OUT / REPLACE DRUM KIT
DRUM ERROR / REPLACE DRUM KIT
3
1
Figure 21.
2
Contents of drum kit
1
Two air filters
2
Hand wipe
3
Imaging drum cartridge
Imaging drum life—”drum life low” and “drum life
124 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
out”
“Drum life low” warns the user that the imaging drum has only about
20% of its life remaining. This should allow the user time to order a
replacement imaging drum kit before “drum life out.” The user can
continue to operate the HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 printer until
“drum life out” occurs, at which point the printer will not operate.
The user should be advised that:
EN
Drum life specification assumes two-page jobs, one-sided
printing on letter- and A4-sized pages. When printing in color, the
number of pages will be one-fourth of the images printed.
Color printing uses four images per page even if only one color is
actually used.
The imaging drum is a relatively small contributor to the overall
printing cost.
Printer consumables 125
2
3
To replace the imaging drum
and air filters
1
Open the front door.
2
Swing the upper (blue) lever to the
right. Then, press the white button
on the lower (green) lever and swing
it to the right.
3
Pull the drum partway out. Grasp the
blue handle on the top of the drum
and remove the imaging drum.
CAUTION
A gray cover protects the new imaging
drum. Do not remove this cover; it will
come off during the next step.
4
4
Line up the guides and push firmly to
slide the new drum into the printer.
The cover will slide off as the drum
enters the printer.
5
Swing the upper (blue) lever to the
left. Then swing the lower (green)
lever to the left, making sure it clicks
into place.
6
Close the front door and open the
upper door on the right side of the
printer.
7
On the inside of the door, locate the
density sensor and the density
sensor brush. Use the brush to
brush toner particles from the
density sensor. Then replace the
brush, and close the upper right
door.
5
7
126 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
8
8
On the back of the printer, release
the two latches on the filter door and
lower the door.
9
Remove both filters from the door.
10 Insert the new filters into their
respective locations.
9
11 Close the filter door. If the filter door
does not close, make sure the filters
are in place. Use the hand wipe to
remove toner from your hands.
12 Place the used parts in the
packaging from the new ones. See
the included recycling guide for
recycling information.
10
12
EN
Printer consumables 127
Fuser kit
Replace the parts in the fuser kit when the printer control panel
displays:
FUSER LIFE LOW / REPLACE KIT
FUSER LIFE OUT / REPLACE KIT
1
2
3
Figure 22.
Note
Contents of fuser kit
1
Fuser
2
Hand wipe
3
Six paper rollers
The paper rollers are all the same; any of the rollers can be used in any
of the replacement locations.
If you do not have an optional 2,000-sheet input unit, you will need only
four of the rollers.
128 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
3
To replace the fuser
WARNING!
The fuser is very hot and can cause
burns. Turn the printer off and allow the
printer to cool for at least 30 minutes
before beginning this procedure.
4
1
If an optional multi-bin mailbox is
attached to the printer, pull the
mailbox away from the printer.
2
Open the lower door on the left side
of the printer.
3
If the printer contains an optional
duplexer, press the green tab on the
right side of the duplexer and pull the
duplexer out of the printer.
4
To unlock the fuser, rotate the blue
levers down.
5
On the right side of the fuser, lift the
large green lever to release the fuser
springs.
6
On the left side of the fuser, rotate
the blue gear down two or three
times to release the fuser.
5
6
EN
Printer consumables 129
7
8
7
Firmly pull the fuser up by the blue
tabs on both ends, and then pull the
fuser out.
8
Use the blue tabs on the new fuser
to slide it into the printer along the
guides. On the left side of the fuser,
rotate the blue gear up two or three
times until the fuser drops into place.
CAUTION
Use only the blue tabs to push the fuser
into the printer.
9
9
On the right side of the fuser, push
the green lever down.
10 Rotate the blue levers up until they
snap into place.
11 If an optional duplexer was removed
from the printer, slide the duplexer
back into the printer until it clicks into
place.
12 Close the lower left door.
10
130 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
13 If an optional multi-bin mailbox is
attached to the printer, push the
mailbox back toward the printer.
EN
2
3
4
To replace the rollers
1
Remove trays 2 and 3.
2
On the inside right of each opening,
locate the two paper rollers that are
blue on the ends.
Note
The separation rollers that are not blue
on the end will not be replaced.
3
On the end of each roller, pinch
together the release lever and
handle between two fingers and
slide the roller off of its spindle. Set
the rollers aside.
4
While holding the new roller by its
handle, slide the roller onto the
spindle until it clicks into place.
Repeat this procedure for the other
three rollers.
5
Replace trays 3 and 2.
Note
Trays 2 and 3 are not interchangeable.
6
EN
If an optional 2,000-sheet input unit
is not attached to the printer,
proceed to step 9. If a 2,000-sheet
input unit is attached, open the
vertical transfer door on the right
side of the printer.
Printer consumables 131
7
7
Locate the two rollers. Remove the
rollers (upper roller first) and replace
them (lower roller first).
Note
Press down on the lower roller while
replacing the upper one.
12
8
Close the vertical transfer door and
turn the printer on.
9
The printer control panel should
display the message PRESS
SELECT IF FUSER IS NEW. If it
displays the message, go to step 10.
If it does not, go to step 11.
10 When the printer control panel
displays the message, press SELECT
to bring the printer online and reset
the fuser life count. Then go to step
12.
11 If the printer control panel does not
display the message:
a. Press MENU until RESETS MENU
appears on the printer control
panel display.
b. Press ITEM until RESET FUSER
LIFE COUNT appears.
c. Press SELECT to reset the fuser
life count.
d. Press GO to bring the printer
online.
12 Place the used parts in the
packaging from the new ones. See
the included recycling guide for
recycling information
132 Chapter 4 - Printer maintenance
EN
5
Theory of operation
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Color theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Subtractive color theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Additive color theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electrostatic latent image formation block . . . . . . . . . 143
Developing block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Transfer block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Transfer drum cleaning block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Imaging drum cleaning block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fusing block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Consumable detection mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Drum kit life detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Transfer kit life detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Color toner lever detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Black toner level detection and cartridge detection . . 159
Environment change control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Color calibration density sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Transfer belt control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning roller control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Carousel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
EN
Chapter contents 133
Electrical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fuser control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
High-voltage power supply circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Mechanical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Laser/scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Motors and heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Pick-up/feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Sensors, switches, clutches, and solenoids. . . . . . . . 184
Fusing and delivery unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Media jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Printer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
EPH controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Sensors, switches, clutches, and motors. . . . . . . . . . 200
Pick-up and feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Switch functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Lifter operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Multi-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Configuring operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Communication link (C-link) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Sensors, switches, motors, and controller board PCA 208
Receiving paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Delivering paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
C-link communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Paper path sensors and jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
134 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Introduction
This chapter presents the theory of operation and the functional
overview for the printer. It provides the service representative with an
understanding of the printing process required to service the printer.
This chapter discusses the following:
EN
Color theory
Image formation
Paper path
Mechanical drive system
Control board system
Formatter system
Power distribution system
2,000-sheet input unit
Multi-bin mailbox
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
3,000-sheet stacker
Introduction 135
Figure 23 shows a cross-sectional view of the internal components of
the printer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
30
7
8
29
28
27
9
26
25
10
11
12
24
13
23
14
22 21 20
Figure 23.
19 18 17 16
15
Cross-section view of internal components
136 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
1
Black toner cartridge
17 Registration roller
2
Imaging drum
18 Transfer charger
3
Charging roller
19 Upper fusing roller
4
Imaging drum cartridge
20 Lower fusing roller
5
Laser/scanner
21 Tray 2
6
Preconditioning exposure LED 22 Tray 3
7
Post charging unit
23 Duplexer deflector
8
Transfer drum
9
Transfer belt
24 Left (face-up) output bin
deflector
10 Tray 1
11 Tray 1 pick-up roller
12 Separation pad
13 Feed roller 1
14 Feed roller 2
15 Separation rollers
25 Left (face-up) output bin
delivery roller
26 Cleaning roller
27 Left (face-up) output bin
28 Color toner carousel
29 Color toner cartridges
30 Delivery roller(s)
16 Pick-up rollers
EN
Introduction 137
Color theory
There are two methods used to create color. The subtractive process
(which is used in this printer) and the additive process (which is used
in monitors and television).
Subtractive color theory
The subtractive color theory deals with mixing color pigments (such
as those found in toner, ink, and paint) to produce any color. The
subtractive primary colors are cyan, yellow, and magenta. Primary
colors will produce any color in the spectrum when combined in
certain proportions. The subtractive process begins with an external
white light reflected from a white surface (for instance, paper). The
color components of the light are reflected or absorbed by the paper
and toner.
Subtractive color absorption
Table 28 describes how colors are mixed to produce subtractive
colors.
Table 28. Subtractive color absorption
Pigment color
Color of
absorbed light
Colors of
reflected light
Magenta
Green
Blue
Red
Magenta
Yellow
Blue
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Red
Green
Blue
Cyan
None
None
Red
Green
Blue
White
138 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
Perceived color
EN
Subtractive color mixing
Table 29 describes how mixing equal amounts of subtractive colors
produces other colors.
Table 29. Subtractive color mixing
Mix equal amounts of...
To produce...
Cyan + Yellow + Magenta
Black
Cyan + Yellow
Green
Yellow + Magenta
Red
Magenta + Cyan
Blue
Half-toning
Half-toning (also called dithering) is a method used to distribute color
pigment to create a full spectrum of color. Because this printer places
dots of toner on a page to create an image rather than physically
mixing the color (like paint), the dots are distributed in selected
patterns. Although they are not physically combined on the page, the
eye integrates the dots and the viewer perceives them as a solid
color.
Process colors
The printer does not use half-toning for every application. Any of the
four basic colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) can be printed as a
solid color. Since red, green, and blue are formed by combining two
base colors, they are called process colors. See page 146 for an
explanation of how the process colors are created on the transfer
drum.
EN
Color theory 139
Additive color theory
The additive color theory deals with colors that are produced when
light sources are mixed. The primary additive colors are red, blue, and
green. Adding various levels of these colors, which are generated by
a light source (such as a color monitor), produces all other colors.
Mixing equal amounts of the additive primary colors produces the
colors indicated in table 30.
Table 30. Additive color mixing
Mix equal amounts of...
To produce...
Red + Green + Blue
White
Red + Blue
Magenta
Green + Blue
Cyan
Red + Green
Yellow
140 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Image formation
Figure 24 and figure 25 give an overview of the image formation
process.
Figure 24.
EN
Image formation
Image formation 141
Figure 25 shows the simultaneous processes of image formation and
paper pick-up that occur during the electrostatic latent image
formation block.
Figure 25.
Electrostatic latent image formation block
Note
In the following sections, the text is numbered to match each of the
numbered steps in the process flowchart above.
142 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Electrostatic latent image formation block
One of the differences between color and black-and-white laser
imaging is that the color image is created with multiple layers. This
printer contains four toner cartridges (cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black).
The electrostatic latent image formation block consists of three steps
for forming the image on the imaging drum. At the end of the last step,
the negative charge on the unexposed area remains while the
negative charge on the exposed area is decreased. This potential
image on the drum is invisible to the human eye and is called
electrostatic latent image.
1. Preconditioning exposure
To prepare for primary charging, the preconditioning exposure lightemitting diode (LED) unit removes the residual charge on the imaging
drum surface. This helps prevent uneven surface charge on the
imaging drum.
Figure 26.
EN
Preconditioning exposure
Image formation 143
2. Primary charging
In preparation for the latent image formation, the imaging drum
surface is charged so that it has a uniform negative potential. AC and
DC bias are applied to the primary charging roller to create uniform
negative potential charge on the drum surface.
Figure 27.
Primary charging of imaging drum
3. Laser beam exposure
When the laser beam scans the imaging drum surface, the charge on
the exposed area is decreased. This area then forms the electrostatic
latent image.
144 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Developing block
The black toner used in the printer is magnetic single-component
toner composed of magnetite and resin. The color toner is nonmagnetic single-component toner composed of resin. The toners are
given a negative charge when they rub against the developing
cylinder and the blade.
4. Development
The developing cylinder is biased to create a potential difference with
the imaging drum. This bias consists of AC and DC components. The
AC component breaks the toner free from the developing cylinder,
creating a toner cloud. The DC component drives the toner particles
to the imaged region on the imaging drum.
The three color cartridges are brought into contact with the imaging
drum when the carousel rotates. The black toner cartridge is set
separately, and is always in contact with the imaging drum. When the
area on the imaging drum exposed by the laser beam nears the
developing cylinder, the charged toner particles move from the
developer to the image surface because of the potential differences
between the developing cylinder and the exposed imaging drum.
Figure 28.
EN
Black toner cartridge (left) and color toner cartridge (right)
development
Image formation 145
Transfer block
The image is built up on the transfer drum in layers of toner. The toner
is then transferred to the paper. The transfer block includes the
transfer of the toner from the imaging drum to the transfer drum, then
from the transfer drum to the paper.
5. Primary transfer
A positive DC bias is applied to the transfer drum during printing to
transfer the toner that is on the imaging drum to the transfer drum.
This process occurs in sequence for the four colors (yellow, magenta,
cyan, black).
For full-color printing, as the transfer steps proceed for the four colors,
the amount of toner with negative charge increases on the transfer
drum. As a result, the DC bias must increase to transfer the toner on
top of the toner that is already on the transfer drum.
Figure 29.
Primary transfer
146 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
6. Post charging
AC and DC bias are applied to the post charging unit to add the
appropriate bias to the toner that is on the transfer drum and to
increase the efficiency of the secondary transfer.
The post charging unit is turned on during the yellow toner primary
transfer as well as after the entire image is formed. During the yellow
toner transfer, the negative charge is decreased. A negative bias is
applied for the black toner transfer to increase the efficiency of the
secondary transfer (the transfer of the toner from the transfer drum to
the paper).
Figure 30.
EN
Post charging
Image formation 147
7. Secondary transfer
The paper is pressed against the transfer drum when the transfer belt
press clutch (CL4) pushes the transfer belt up to the transfer drum.
Positive DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer the toner that
is on the transfer drum surface to the paper. The positive DC bias
value changes according to the paper type (such as plain, heavy, or
overhead transparency) and environmental conditions. Because the
transfer belt is highly resistive, the potential bias is reversed between
pages to eliminate excessive charge build up on the transfer belt.
After a jam, negative DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer
any residual toner from the transfer belt. The residual toner moves
back to the transfer drum, and is then collected in the waste toner
case in the imaging drum.
Figure 31.
Secondary transfer
148 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
8. Separation
The paper is separated from the transfer drum because of the paper’s
elasticity. When duplex printing or overhead transparency (OHT)
printing is performed, an AC bias is applied to the transfer charger. In
high temperature/high humidity conditions, the AC bias is not applied
since excessive charge does not build up in high humidity conditions.
The AC bias is applied to the transfer charger to prevent discharge
between the paper and the transfer belt, which can disrupt the image.
Figure 32.
EN
Separation
Image formation 149
Transfer drum cleaning block
This block follows two steps to clean the transfer drum. Even though
most of the toner is transferred to the paper during secondary
transfer, some toner particles remain on the transfer drum surface.
This residual toner on the transfer drum is returned to the imaging
drum, where it will be moved to the waste toner case.
9. Cleaning roller charging
Bias is applied to the cleaning roller so that the residual toner on the
transfer drum surface is charged positive. The cleaning roller is
usually separated from the transfer drum. However, the cleaning roller
can be brought into contact with the transfer drum by the cleaning
roller press cam which is activated by the cleaning roller press
solenoid (SL1). When contact is made, positive bias is applied to the
cleaning roller to charge the toner on the transfer drum surface
positive.
After the charging is complete, the bias is turned off and the cleaning
roller press cam separates the cleaning roller from the transfer drum.
After printing is complete, negative bias is applied to the cleaning
roller to remove the residual toner.
Figure 33.
Cleaning roller charging
150 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
10. Transfer drum cleaning
The bias on the imaging drum is negative, and the bias on the transfer
drum is positive. Because the charge on the residual toner is made
positive by the transfer drum cleaning roller, the toner moves from the
transfer drum to the imaging drum, where it will be removed during
imaging drum cleaning.
Figure 34.
EN
Transfer drum cleaning
Image formation 151
Imaging drum cleaning block
In the primary transfer, not all of the toner on the imaging drum is
transferred to the transfer drum, leaving some toner on the imaging
drum surface. Also, additional toner is placed on the imaging drum
surface when the transfer drum is cleaned.
11. Imaging drum cleaning
To prepare for the next printing operation, the cleaner blade scrapes
the residual toner off the imaging drum surface. The scraped toner
particles are trapped with the sweeper strip and collected into the
waste toner case.
Figure 35.
Imaging drum cleaning block
152 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Fusing block
The toner image placed on the paper during transfer adheres to the
paper by static electricity, and a light touch will smear the image.
During fusing, the four toner colors are melted on the paper to create
a permanent image.
12. Fusing
The surfaces of the upper and lower fusing rollers are coated with
silicone, which has excellent offset prevention performance. The
upper fusing roller is charged with a negative DC bias to repel the
toner and help prevent the toner on the paper from adhering to the
roller.
Figure 36.
EN
Fusing the toner
Image formation 153
Consumable detection mechanisms
For information on resetting the consumable life counts, see table 24
on page 92.
Drum kit life detection
The imaging drum cartridge contains a memory device. The number
of images printed is written to the imaging drum cartridge memory.
The controller board senses the imaging drum life expiration based
on the data from the imaging drum cartridge memory. When the
image count reaches approximately 40,000 images, DRUM LIFE
LOW / REPLACE DRUM KIT is shown on the printer control panel.
This error is also written into the imaging drum cartridge memory and
cannot be erased.
The printer is still able to print after the imaging drum life expiration
warning. The controller board counts the number of printed images
after notification occurs. When the number reaches approximately
50,000 images, the controller board stops the printer and signals
DRUM LIFE OUT / REPLACE DRUM KIT. Printing cannot continue
until a new imaging drum is installed.
Note
An image is one layer of toner (cyan, magenta, yellow, or black). A fullcolor page is counted as four images.
Waste toner level detection
The waste toner detection unit in the printer senses the waste toner
level by emitting light into the detection window and passing the light
through the imaging drum cartridge when the stirring plate in the
drum removes the waste toner around the detection window. The
controller board detects the toner level by timing from the moment
that the detection window is cleared to the time the waste toner
recovers the window. If the time is shorter than a stored value in the
controller board, DRUM ERROR / REPLACE DRUM KIT is reported
on the printer control panel. The controller board writes the data into
the imaging drum cartridge memory.
The printer is still able to print after the waste toner full warning. The
controller board counts the number of printed images after notification
occurs. When the number reaches approximately 200 images, the
154 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
controller board stops the printer and signals DRUM LIFE OUT /
REPLACE DRUM KIT. Printing cannot continue without a new
imaging drum being installed.
Note
If the imaging drum cartridge memory fails, a warning will be displayed
on the printer control panel. Printing can continue until the waste toner
sensor indicates full.
Figure 37.
Waste toner level detection
EN
Consumable detection mechanisms 155
Transfer kit life detection
The transfer kit life is determined by both the page and image counts.
The number of images printed is stored in the formatter, and the
controller board senses the transfer kit life expiration based upon this
data. When the life data reaches 149,000 pages or 299,000 images
total, TRANSFER KIT LOW / REPLACE KIT is displayed on the
printer control panel. The printer is still able to print after the transfer
kit low warning.
The formatter counts the number of printed images after the transfer
kit low warning occurs. When the number reaches 150,000 pages or
300,000 images, the controller board signals TRANSFER KIT OUT /
REPLACE KIT. End of life behavior is determined by the TONER
LOW setting on the printer control panel (see page 88). Printing can
continue after the transfer kit out signal; however, print quality might
be degraded and the number of jams might increase.
Because there is not a memory mechanism in the transfer devices,
users and service personnel must reset the transfer count when a
new transfer kit is installed. Also, if the formatter board is replaced,
the transfer count must be reset in the Service menu.
Fuser kit life detection
The controller board senses the fuser kit life expiration based upon
page count stored in the formatter. When the page count reaches
99,000 pages, FUSER LIFE LOW / REPLACE KIT is shown on the
printer control panel. The printer is still able to print after the fuser kit
life expiration warning. The formatter counts the number of printed
images after notification occurs. When the number reaches the
100,000 pages, the controller board signals FUSER LIFE OUT /
REPLACE KIT. End of life behavior is determined by the TONER
LOW setting on the printer control panel (see page 88). Printing can
continue after the fuser life out signal, but print quality might be
degraded.
Color toner level detection
The color toner level sensor (PS621) detects the toner level in the
color toner cartridge. PS621 consists of a light emitter and a light
receiver. The light from the light emitter enters the detection window
at the light guide facing the outside of the toner cartridge. The light
entering the detection window passes through the inside of the
cartridge. Then the light guide at the stirring plate cleans the toner
156 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
around the detection window. The light receiver of PS621 detects the
toner. After PS621 detects light, the controller board notes the time
until light can no longer pass through the detection window.
The controller board signals the formatter that the color toner
cartridge has no toner if the time the light passes through the
detection window exceeds the fixed time. The printer detects the
toner level when the printer is turned on, or while the stirring plate is
rotating.
Light receiver
Light emitter
Figure 38.
Color toner level detection
Color cartridge sensor
The color cartridge sensor (PS1901C) detects the color toner
cartridge. PS1901C consists of a light emitter and a light receiver.
The light from the light emitter is reflected by the cartridge and
reaches to the light receiver only when the cartridge is installed. If the
light does not reach the light receiver, the controller board signals
color toner cartridge failure to the formatter and stops the printer.
Also, the printer checks for the cartridge pressure when the power
switch is turned on, or right after any cover is opened or closed.
EN
Consumable detection mechanisms 157
Color toner lever detection
The printer has a color toner lever sensor (PS1902) to prevent toner
cartridge setup failure. This sensor consists of a light receiver and a
light emitter. If the color toner lever is set incorrectly, the light from the
light emitter is reflected by the color toner lever and detected by the
light receiver. The controller board monitors the sensor when the
carousel door is closed. If the color toner lever is not locked in place,
LOCK TONER LEVER is shown on the printer control panel and the
carousel will not rotate.
Figure 39.
Color toner lever detection
158 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Black toner level detection and cartridge
detection
The toner antenna in the black toner cartridge detects the black toner
level. The controller board monitors the toner level sensor signal
output from the toner antenna via high-voltage PCA 1. The controller
board checks the signal at the moment that the black developing AC
bias is applied to the black developing cylinder. If the toner level is
less than specified, the controller board signals the formatter that the
black toner cartridge has no toner. The black toner cartridge is
detected by the black toner cartridge switch (SW644) in the printer.
Environment change control
The controller board judges the temperature/humidity environment
based on temperature/humidity sensor signals from the temperature/
humidity sensors on the temperature/humidity sensor PCA and
executes the following controls to obtain the appropriate image:
Controls the value of the secondary transfer bias, the transfer
drum cleaning bias, and the transfer charger bias.
Performs a color calibration if the environmental change is great
enough.
The controller board checks for an environment change before
starting image density control, after the power is turned on, or every
30 minutes after the image density control is completed.
EN
Consumable detection mechanisms 159
Color calibration density sensor
The density sensor inside the right upper door senses the density
detection pattern for each color formed on the transfer drum during a
calibration cycle. The sensor emits light from the LED, and the density
detection pattern on the transfer drum reflects the light. The sensor
then receives the light with the photo diode and that information is
converted to digital values and stored on the controller board. The
controller board uses this information to control appropriate
developing bias and primary charging bias values to stabilize density
of each color.
(process marks)
Figure 40.
Density sensor
Calibration occurs at the following intervals:
Note
After the power is turned on
After 95 pages in one-page mode are printed
When a toner cartridge is installed
After 50 pages in one-page mode are printed (after initial poweron)
After the printer is revived from Power Save (if Power Save has
been on for more that 30 minutes)
When an imaging drum cartridge is installed
When environment is changed by the environment change
control
The density control will only be executed if all of the printer doors are
closed and all of the printer components are detected.
160 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Transfer belt control
During secondary transfer, the controller board activates the transfer
belt press clutch (CL4). The transfer belt is normally away from the
transfer drum, except while pushed against the transfer drum during
secondary transfer. When the secondary transfer is complete, the
transfer belt is removed from the transfer drum when the controller
board sets the CL4 to off.
Figure 41.
EN
Transfer belt control
Consumable detection mechanisms 161
Cleaning roller control
The controller board activates the cleaning roller press solenoid
(SL1). SL1 presses the cleaning roller to the transfer drum just after
the secondary transfer begins. When the SL1 signals on, the cleaning
roller press cam presses the cleaning roller, and the cleaning roller
presses against the transfer drum. When the transfer drum cleaning
and secondary transfer are complete, the controller board sets the
SL1 off to detach the cleaning roller from the transfer drum.
Figure 42.
Cleaning roller control
Carousel control
The controller board controls the rotation speed and the stop position
of the carousel by monitoring the timing of the eight flags that pass
through the carousel position sensor (PS3). The rotation position
flags are located on the back side of the carousel. The eight rotation
position flags consist of the home position flag (also the black toner
162 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
cartridge stop position flag); the yellow, magenta, and cyan cartridge
stop position flags (three flags); and the fetch (removal or
replacement) flags (four flags).
When the controller board receives the print signal from the formatter,
the carousel motor (M1) is turned on at normal speed. When the
controller board detects that the carousel rotation has reached the
slow down position, the controller board reduces the carousel speed
until the controller board senses that the carousel rotation has
reached the stop position.
Figure 43 shows an example of the carousel in the yellow cartridge
stop position where the printer is ready for yellow development. The
yellow toner cartridge is facing the imaging drum.
Figure 43.
Carousel control
Carousel stop solenoid
The carousel lock control fixes the carousel by pushing the stopper
lever against the carousel when the cartridge is moved to the fetch
position. When a user presses the carousel rotation button while
replacing the color toner cartridge, the carousel begins to rotate, then
stops in the color toner cartridge fetch position. The carousel is fixed
when the carousel stopper solenoid (SL5) pushes the stopper lever.
EN
Consumable detection mechanisms 163
Electrical systems
Power distribution
The low-voltage power distribution circuit transforms the AC input
voltage to supply the DC power sources, +24VB and +5V, on which
the printer operates. The +24V source feeds the various motors,
solenoids, and exhaust fans within the printer, while the +5V source
feeds the controller board and image processor.
High-voltage
power supply/
Separation
discharge highvoltage converter
PCA
Figure 44.
Power distribution circuit diagram
164 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
When the printer receives the Power Save command from the
formatter board, the controller board turns off the FET switch in the
main relay PCA and stops the supply of +24 UH. Additionally, the
sensors, carousel motor, and toner cartridge motor are turned off.
After the fuser cools down, all fans are also turned off. When the
printer receives the “wake up” command from the formatter board, the
printer leaves Power Save mode and resumes normal operation.
High-voltage
power
supply
Figure 45.
EN
Developer/
imaging
drum bias
supply
Power Save circuit diagram
Electrical systems 165
Fuser control
The fuser controller directly interfaces with both the power supply and
controller board. As the surface temperature of the upper and lower
fusing rollers rises, the resistance of the thermistors drops and the
voltage of the fusing temperature detection signals also drops.
Table 31 shows the temperatures the formatter sets, based on the
media in use.
Table 31. Fusing temperatures
Fusing mode
Color
mode
Plain
paper
OHT
Heavy or
glossy
Envelope
1st sheet
175° C
347° F
175° C
347° F
175° C
347° F
180° C
356° F
2nd and after
165° C
329° F
170° C
338° F
165° C
329° F
180° C
356° F
1st sheet
180° C
356° F
175° C
347° F
175° C
347° F
180° C
356° F
2nd and after
165° C
329° F
170° C
338° F
165° C
329° F
170° C
338° F
Number of
sheets
Full color
Target
temperature
Black and
white
Problems in the fuser can be detected in the following three circuits:
Controller board. If the fuser is heated abnormally or does not
reach the specified temperature for some reason, the controller
board interrupts power to the fuser heaters. From there, the
formatter assesses the fusing heater failure and signals the
printer control panel.
Fusing heater safety circuit (in the power supply circuit). If the
fusing heater safety circuit detects an upper or lower fusing
heater failure, the safety circuit interrupts power to the upper and
lower fusing heaters.
Fuser abnormality detection circuit (in the power supply circuit). If
there are broken wires to the fusing heater system, the fuser
abnormality detection circuit detects no AC current flow, causing
the controller board to assess the broken wires, stop driving the
fusing heaters, and signal the printer control panel.
166 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
High-voltage power supply circuit
The printer contains three high-voltage PCAs (shown in figure 46)
that are directly controlled by the controller board:
Developer/imaging drum bias supply, which controls:
• cartridge motor (M3)
• imaging drum bias
• black developing bias
• color developing bias
High-voltage power supply, which controls:
• transfer drum
• cleaning roller
• transfer belt
• post charging unit
• upper fusing roller
Separation discharge high-voltage converter PCA which controls:
• transfer charger
EN
Electrical systems 167
Developer/imaging drum bias supply
Figure 46.
High-voltage power supply
High-voltage power supply circuit
168 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Mechanical systems
Laser/scanner
The laser/scanner unit scans the laser beam across the imaging
drum. Video signals sent from the formatter are pulse-width
modulated and converted to video data signals. The video data
signals are then converted to two low-voltage differential signals
(which suppress radio frequency emissions), and are sent to the laser
driver PCA. There the voltage differential signals are converted to a
single laser drive signal (the internal signal of the laser/scanner unit)
in the laser driver PCA, which turns the laser diode on and off and
generates the modulated laser beam.
The modulated laser beam is aligned by the collimator lens and the
cylindrical lens, becoming a parallel beam. The laser beam then
strikes the scanning mirror that rotates at a constant speed. The
beam reflected from the scanning mirror travels through the focusing
lens and the reflecting mirror located in front of the scanning mirror,
and is brought to a focus point on the imaging drum.
The scanning mirror rotates at a constant speed, so the laser beam is
scanned across the drum at a constant speed. The drum is also
rotating at a slower constant speed, which allows the laser beam to
form an image on the drum surface.
EN
Mechanical systems 169
Figure 47.
Laser/scanner
If the laser/scanner motor does not reach operating speed within
seven seconds of rotation, then the laser/scanner motor lock
detection circuit generates a scanner motor failure, and the laser/
scanner motor stops.
170 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Motors and heaters
The following section describes the motors and heaters in the printer.
Figure 48.
Printer motors and heaters
Table 32. Printer motor and heater names and descriptions
EN
Name
Description
Name
Description
M1
Carousel motor
FM1
Fan 1 motor
M2
Drum motor
FM2
Fan 2 motor
M3
Cartridge motor
FM3
Fan 3 motor
M4
Main motor
HU
Upper fuser heater
M5
Pick-up motor
HL
Lower fuser heater
Mechanical systems 171
Carousel motor (M1)
The carousel motor (M1) is a two-phase stepping motor, and rotates
the carousel. The motor operates at low and normal speeds
depending on the printer function (such as sensing toner cartridges or
printing).
Figure 49.
Carousel motor (M1)
172 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Drum motor (M2)
The drum motor (M2) is a two-phase stepping motor, and drives the
transfer drum and the imaging drum.
For overhead transparencies and glossy or heavy media, the motor
rotates at low speed (OHT mode: 1/4 speed rotation; glossy and
heavy media: 1/3 speed rotation). The speed of the media through
the fuser is identical to the speed at which the media passed through
the image transfer process.
Figure 50.
EN
Drum motor (M2)
Mechanical systems 173
Cartridge motor (M3)
The cartridge motor (M3) is a two-phase stepping motor, and drives
the black and color toner cartridge developing cylinders.
The motor rotates in the normal direction for color toner development,
then the motor reverses for black toner development. The developer
gear drive assembly and its associated clutches engage the proper
developer drive gear based on the direction of the cartridge motor
rotation.
Figure 51.
Cartridge motor (M3)
174 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Main motor (M4)
The main motor (M4) is a three-phase, eight-pole, brushless motor.
This motor drives the rollers related to pick-up, feeding, fusing, and
delivery. This motor also drives the transfer belt press drive cam and
cleaning roller press drive cam.
The controller board switches the motor speed between normal
speed, 1/4 speed for OHT mode, and 1/3 speed for glossy or heavy
media by combining the M4 speed change signals.
Figure 52.
EN
Main motor (M4)
Mechanical systems 175
Pick-up motor (M5)
The pick-up motor (M5) is a two-phase stepping motor. M5 picks up
the paper, drives tray 2 and 3 tray lifts, and activates the pick-up
rollers for trays 2 and 3. During tray 2 paper pick-up, M5 is rotated at
normal speed. During tray 3 pick-up, normal speed reverse rotation is
used.
Figure 53.
Pick-up motor (M5)
176 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Fan motors (FM1, FM2, and FM3)
The printer contains three exhaust fans, all of which use DC
brushless motors. Table 33 describes when each of the fans operates
and at what speed each operates.
Table 33. Fan operation
Turn printer on Standby
Printing
Power Save or Power Save or
power off <30 power off >30
minutes
minutes
FM1*
Full speed
On
On
On
Off
FM2
Full speed
Full speed
Full speed
Full speed
Off
FM3
Off
Off
Full speed
Off
Off
*
FM1 contains a thermistor, and the fan speed changes according to the temperature inside the printer.
EN
Mechanical systems 177
Paper path
Figure 54 shows the printer paper path.
Figure 54.
Paper path
178 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Pick-up/feed
For cassette paper pick-up, the paper is sent into the printer by the
pick-up roller, then fed by the feed roller. After the registration roller
corrects the skew of the paper, the paper stops. The paper is then
refed so that its leading edge will match the top of the image on the
transfer drum. After that, the paper is fed through the transfer,
separation, and fusing/delivery units to the top (face-down) or the left
(face-up) output bin. The printer switches the speed at which the
paper is fed for different media types as indicated in table 34.
Table 34. Feed speeds based on media type
Modes
Plain paper
Glossy or heavy media OHT
Feed speed
Normal speed
1/3 of normal speed
1/4 of normal speed
The controller board switches the feed speed when the registration
roller paper sensor detects the paper. The printer has two overhead
transparency sensors (PS1801 and PS1802, see figure 57 on page
184), and the controller board always monitors these sensors.
Automatic overhead transparency detection
The printer enters overhead transparency (OHT) mode when the user
selects to print on transparencies through the printer driver or by
selecting OHT as the media type at the printer control panel. The
OHT sensors (PS1801 and PS1802, see figure 57 on page 184) are
installed in front of the registration roller to detect transparencies even
if the user has not set the media type at the printer control panel. The
controller board monitors these sensors to execute OHT detection.
PS1801 and PS1802 consist of light emission and light reception
units. When a transparency is used, the light emitted from the light
emitter unit goes through the transparency and is received by the light
receptor. As a result, the controller board determines that the fed
media is a transparency and enters the OHT mode.
EN
Paper path 179
Paper pick-up
Paper pick-up begins when the print signal is sent. The pick-up roller
is lowered to the paper level, and the main motor (M4) rotates the
roller. This process feeds the paper into the printer from the input
trays.
Tray pick-up — When the pick-up motor is in normal rotation, the
tray 2 pick-up roller, feed roller 1, and separation roller are driven.
The paper is then picked up from the tray 2 pick-up roller. In the
case of reverse rotation, the tray 3 pick-up roller, feed roller 1, and
separation roller are driven. The paper is then picked up from the
tray 3 pick-up roller.
• Multi-feed prevention mechanism — During paper pick-up
from tray 2 or 3, the separation roller prevents multi-feeding.
• Tray 2 last page detection — The last-page sensor (PS29)
consists of a light emitter and light receiver. When paper is
present in tray 2, the light from the light emitter is reflected by
the paper and received by the light receiver. However, when
the last page is picked up, the light from the light emitter is
transmitted inside the printer and does not reach the light
receiver. The controller board signals the formatter that there
is no paper in tray 2 and stops formation of the next image.
The tray 2 last-page detection prevents the imaging drum and
the transfer drum from getting dirty by detecting that no paper
is available before the next image is written.
180 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 55.
EN
Tray 2 and 3 pick-up
1
Pick-up motor drive signal
M4
Main motor
2
Feed roller clutch drive signal
M5
Pick-up motor
3
Tray pick-up solenoid drive signal
SL3 Tray pick-up solenoid
4
Registration roller clutch drive signal
CL1 Registration roller clutch
5
Main motor drive signal
CL2 Feed roller clutch
Paper path 181
Tray 1 pick-up — One sheet of paper is pressed to the multipurpose pick-up roller by the paper lifting plate and is picked up
by the rotation of the pick-up roller. Any extra sheets are removed
by the separation pad, then sent into the printer. Operation after
transmission is the same as for tray pick-up except that the paper
lifting plate solenoid is reset on to lower the paper lifting plate
right after registration roller rotation.
• Tray 1 paper-width sensor — The tray 1 paper-width sensor
(PS1701) detects the paper width when the user adjusts the
media width guides, which moves the slide resistance
connected with the size-control plate. When paper is loaded in
tray 1, the controller board detects the paper width. If the
paper width is not the width specified by the formatter, the
controller board notifies a paper-size failure to the formatter
and stops the printer.
• Tray 1 last-page detection — The tray 1 last-page sensor
(PS19) monitors the rotation of the last-page detection roller in
tray 1 and detects the last page. If the tray has two or more
pages, the last page detection roller does not rotate at pick-up.
When the last page is picked up, the last-page detection roller
rotates past the page and PS19 and sends an off to signal the
controller board. The controller board then signals the
formatter that no pages are in tray 1 and stops the next image
formation. The PS19 detects no page before the next image is
written and prevents the imaging drum and the transfer drum
from getting dirty.
182 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 56.
Tray 1 pick-up
1
Registration roller clutch drive signal
SL4
Lifting plate solenoid
2
Main motor drive signal
CL1
Registration roller clutch
3
Registration roller paper detection
signal
CL3
Tray 1 pick-up clutch
PS1
4
Tray 1 pick-up clutch drive signal
Registration roller paper
sensor
5
Tray 1 paper detection signal
PS19
Tray 1 last page sensor
6
Lifting plate position detection signal
PS1301 Tray 1 page sensor
7
Lifting plate solenoid drive signal
PS1302 Lifting plate position sensor
8
Tray 1 last paper detection signal
PS1701 Tray 1 paper width sensor
9
Tray 1 paper width detection signal
PS1801 OHT sensor 1
10 OHT detection signal
PS1802 OHT sensor 2
11 OHT detection signal
EN
Paper path 183
Sensors, switches, clutches, and solenoids
The following figures and tables illustrate and describe the sensors,
switches, clutches, and solenoids in the printer paper path.
Figure 57.
Printer sensors
184 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Table 35. Printer sensor names and descriptions
Name
Description
PS1
Registration roller paper sensor
PS3
Carousel position sensor
PS5
Separation sensor
PS10
Top (face-down) output bin paper-full sensor
PS11
Top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor
PS17
Pick-up unit paper sensor
PS18
Pick-up unit cover sensor
PS19
Tray 1 last page sensor
PS29
Tray 2 last page sensor
PS30
Left cover sensor
PS1201
Tray 3 sensor
PS1202
Tray 2 sensor
PS1203
Tray 3 paper-level sensor 2
PS1204
Tray 3 paper-level sensor 1
PS1205
Tray 2 paper-level sensor 2
PS1206
Tray 2 paper-level sensor 1
PS1207
Tray 3 paper-out sensor
PS1208
Tray 2 paper-out sensor
PS1301
Tray 1 paper sensor
PS1302
Lifting plate position sensor
PS1801
OHT sensor 1
PS1802
OHT sensor 2
PS1901C
Color toner cartridge sensor
PS1902
Color toner lever sensor
PS1903
Fusing delivery sensor
THU
Upper thermistor
THL
Lower thermistor
TPU
Upper thermo switch
TPL
Lower thermo switch
EN
Paper path 185
Figure 58.
Printer switches
186 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Table 36. Printer switch names and descriptions
Name
Description
SW1
Power switch
SW201
Test-print switch
SW202
Reset switch
SW641
Right cover switch
SW642
Imaging-drum switch
SW644
Black toner cartridge switch
SW671
Delivery cover/front cover switch
SW672
Toner cartridge cover switch
SW673
Carousel-button switch
SW1601
Tray 3 paper-size detection switch
SW1602
Tray 3 paper-size detection switch
SW1603
Tray 3 paper-size detection switch
SW1604
Tray 3 paper-size detection switch
SW1601
Tray 2 paper-size detection switch
SW1602
Tray 2 paper-size detection switch
SW1603
Tray 2 paper-size detection switch
SW1604
Tray 2 paper-size detection switch
EN
Paper path 187
Switch functionality
The following table describes the functionality of the paper-size
switches in the printer.
Table 37. Tray 2 and Tray 3 paper-size detection
Paper-size detection switches
Paper size
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
A3
Off
On
Off
Off
A4 (horizontal)
Off
Off
On
Off
A4 (landscape)
On
Off
Off
On
A5
Off
Off
On
On
B4
On
Off
Off
Off
B5
Off
On
Off
On
Ledger
Off
Off
Off
Off
Legal
On
On
Off
Off
Letter (horizontal)
Off
Off
Off
On
188 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 59.
Printer clutches and solenoids
Name
Description
Name
Description
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
SL1
SL2
Registration roller clutch
Feed roller clutch
Tray 1 pick-up roller clutch
Transfer belt press clutch
Cleaning roller press solenoid
Left (face-up) output bin
solenoid
SL3
SL4
SL5
Tray 2 and tray 3 pick-up solenoid
Lifting plate solenoid
Carousel stopper solenoid
EN
Paper path 189
Fusing and delivery unit
The upper and lower rollers in the fuser and the face-up and facedown delivery rollers are driven by the main motor (M4). Paper
separated from the transfer drum is fed into the fuser and delivered
from the unit via the fusing roller and the fusing delivery roller. The
fusing delivery sensor detects paper delivered from the fuser.
The printer has a left (face-up) output bin and a top (face-down)
output bin, and diverts the media to the output bins using the face-up
flapper. When the face-up output bin solenoid drive signal turns off,
the face-up solenoid moves the face-up flapper to face the face-up
output bin. From there, the paper is delivered to the face-up output
bin. When the face-up solenoid drive signal turns on, the paper is
delivered to the face-down output bin. Paper delivered to the facedown output bin is detected by the face-down output bin delivery
sensor. When paper fills the face-down output bin, it is detected by
the face-down output bin paper-full sensor.
190 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 60.
Fusing and delivery unit
1
Left (face-up) output bin solenoid drive
signal
PS10
Top (face-down) output bin paper full
sensor
2
Top (face-down) output bin delivery
detection signal
PS11
Top (face-down) output bin delivery
sensor
3
Top (face-down) output bin paper full
detection signal
PS1903 Fusing delivery sensor
4
Fusing delivery detection signal
5
Main motor (M4) drive signal
EN
SL2
Left (face-up) output bin solenoid
M4
Main motor
Paper path 191
Media jam detection
The controller board checks if paper is at the appropriate sensor at
the proper time. If the controller board detects a media jam, the
printer stops printing and signals a jam condition to the formatter
board.
Printer timing
The formatter PCA and controller board PCA share information
during the printer operation. This information consists of printer
status, command, and dot-image data. Figures 61 through 66 show
the timing of different printer events.
192 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 61.
EN
Timing chart for WAIT period (1 of 2)
Printer timing 193
Figure 62.
Timing chart for WAIT period (2 of 2)
194 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 63.
EN
Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized page (1 of 2)
Printer timing 195
Figure 64.
Timing chart, printing full-color letter-sized page (2 of 2)
196 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Figure 65.
EN
Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-17-inch page (1 of 2)
Printer timing 197
Figure 66.
Timing chart, printing full-color 11-by-17 inch page (2 of 2)
198 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
EPH controller board
The external paper-handling (EPH) controller board controls the
communication from the printer to the input and output devices. The
EPH controller board PCA is integrated onto the printer formatter
PCA.
Duplexer
The duplexer is installed below the fusing assembly. The back side of
the paper is printed first. Then the paper is turned over and fed back
through the paper path to print on the front side. The duplexer
supports variable engine input speeds.
2,000-sheet input unit
The 2,000-sheet input unit is a multi-speed high-capacity device that
feeds paper to the printer. The 2,000-sheet input unit also
automatically senses the paper size.
Power supply
The 2,000-sheet input unit has an internal power supply that is
activated when the printer power switch is turned on. The EPH
controller board on the printer sends a power-on signal to the power
supply on the 2,000-sheet input unit. When the signal is high, the
power supply provides both +24 V and +5 V to the paper deck driver.
The +24V drives the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the lifter,
feed, and pick-up systems. The +5 V drives the sensors and PCA
electronics.
EN
EPH controller board 199
Sensors, switches, clutches, and motors
Figure 67 and the table below illustrate and describe the sensors,
switches, clutches, and motors on the 2,000-sheet input unit.
1
9
10
11
12
2
13
3
4
14
5
15
6
16
17
7
8
Figure 67.
2,000-sheet input unit sensors, switches, clutches, and motors
Ref. Control
device
Description
Ref. Description
1
PS32
Paper exit sensor
11
Feed roller
2
PS31
Paper entry sensor
12
Pickup roller
3
CL32
Main drive clutch
13
Separation roller
4
PS35
Vertical transfer unit (VTU) closed
sensor
14
Controller board PCA
5
CL31
VTU clutch
15
‘Diagnostic LEDs
6
MT31
Main motor
16
7
SW601 - SW602 Paper quantity switches
Normal/diagnostic mode
switch
8
SW701 - SW704 Paper size switches
17
Power supply
9
PS34
Paper tray raised sensor
10
PS33
Paper tray empty sensor
200 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Pick-up and feed system
When the 2,000-sheet input unit is loaded with paper and the paper
tray is closed, the paper stack lifts into position under the pick-up,
feed, and separation rollers. This operation is detected by the PS34
sensor in the 2,000-sheet input unit’s pick-up assembly. The
presence of paper in the paper tray is detected by the PS33 sensor.
The paper level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602. The
paper size is detected by switches SW701 through SW704.
When the EPH controller board on the printer sends an input
command to the controller board PCA on the 2,000-sheet input unit,
the paper deck driver runs the pick-up motor to rotate the pick-up,
feed, and separation rollers. As the pick-up roller turns, the paper
feeds into the VTU and passes through the PS31 and PS32 sensors.
If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU
within the allotted time, the controller board PCA on the 2,000-sheet
input unit assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2,000-sheet
input unit stops operating and reports the jam to the EPH controller
board on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer
control panel.
EN
2,000-sheet input unit 201
Switch functionality
The following tables describe the functionality of the paper-quantity
and paper-size switches in the 2,000-sheet input unit.
Table 38. Paper-quantity detection switches
SW601
SW602
Remaining paper
Off
Off
100%
On
Off
75%
On
On
50%
Off
On
25%
Table 39. Paper-size detection switches
Paper size
SW701
SW702
SW703
SW704
A3 (portrait)
On
On
Off
Off
A4 (landscape)
On
On
Off
On
B4 (portrait)
Off
Off
On
Off
Ledger (portrait)
Off
On
Off
Off
Legal (portrait)
Off
On
On
Off
Letter (landscape)
Off
On
Off
On
202 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Lifter operation
The lifting plate in the 2,000-sheet input unit is held by two wires that
are wound on four pulleys by the lifter motor. When the paper tray is
open, the pulley gears disengage from the lifter motor gears, and the
lifting plate is lowered by its own weight. The presence or absence of
the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit
paper/tray size switch assembly.
After the paper tray is closed, the lifter motor raises the paper stack
into position; this action is detected by the PS34 sensor. The PS34
sensor also maintains the height of the paper stack. As pages are
picked up by the rollers, the number of sheets decreases. Once the
paper stack decreases to a certain level, the PS34 sensor registers a
low condition. Then the paper deck driver turns on the lifter motor
again and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers
sufficient paper in the tray.
EN
2,000-sheet input unit 203
Paper path
Figure 68 illustrates the paper path components in the 2,000-sheet
input unit.
5
3
4
6
7
2
8
1
Figure 68.
2,000-sheet input unit paper path
1
2
3
4
Lifting plate
Paper stack
Pick-up roller
Feed roller
204 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
5
6
7
8
Upper VTU rollers
VTU
Lower VTU rollers
Separation roller
EN
Multi-bin mailbox
The multi-bin mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds,
from 6 to 32 ppm. The multi-bin mailbox holds up to 2,100 sheets
distributed in eight 250-sheet face-down bins and one 100-sheet
face-up bin.
Operating modes
The multi-bin mailbox features four intelligent and configurable
operating modes.
EN
Mailbox mode — The network administrator can address each
bin as an output destination with a name assigned to it. The
printer sends a print job to the selected bin. If the assigned bin is
full, the printer stops printing.
Job separator mode — Each print job (or copy, if printing
multiple original copies) is placed in a separate bin. All multi-bin
mailbox bins are used for this purpose, starting with the first facedown bin (at the top). If a multi-bin mailbox bin is full, the printer
automatically sends the job to the next available bin. If there are
more jobs than bins, the extra jobs will start again at the top facedown bin. This process is seen in the printer software as one
logical bin.
Virtual stacker mode — Printed sheets are stacked face down in
the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of where a
print job begins or ends. All printed sheets are sent to the bottom
bin until it is full; subsequent sheets are sent to the next upward
bin until it is full. This mode of operation takes advantage of the
total capacity of the multi-bin mailbox bins. In this mode, the
software sees the multi-bin mailbox as one logical bin. When the
multi-bin mailbox is full, the printer stops sending paper until all
the bins are emptied.
Multi-bin mailbox 205
Configuring operating modes
The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an
HP network configuration utility, such as the HP JetAdmin software or
the HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh. Additionally, on all
workstations that print to the printer, the printer driver might need to
be set up to reflect the chosen operating mode.
Bidirectional environment — The printer automatically selects
the mode established by the network administrator.
Unidirectional environment — The mode of operation can be
changed in the driver to reflect the current multi-bin mailbox
settings. The method for changing the mode varies with the driver
and type of operating system. For additional information, see the
online help for the printer software.
Power-on sequence
During the power-on sequence, the delivery head assembly moves
first to the top, “home” position at the face-up bin. From that position
the delivery head moves down, scanning to determine if all the multibin mailbox bins are installed, if they contain paper, and if they are
full. Then the delivery head proceeds upward again to the home
position and remains there for about 7 seconds. Finally, the delivery
head assembly moves to the bottom bin, where it waits for the next
command from the EPH controller board.
Note
If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly, the
delivery head assembly will not complete the scan and will send an
error message to the printer control panel.
206 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Communication link (C-link) cables
Communication with the multi-bin mailbox is handled through the
EPH controller board on the printer. The information coming from the
EPH controller board is carried by the C-link cables that connect the
EPH controller board PCA to all the devices that support the C-link
protocol. Figure 69 shows the C-link connections.
Figure 69.
EN
Multi-bin mailbox cabling
Multi-bin mailbox 207
Sensors, switches, motors, and controller
board PCA
Figure 70 and table 40 illustrate and describe the multi-bin mailbox
sensors, switches, motors, and controller board PCA.
10
1
11
2
12
13
3
4
5
14
6
7
15
8
9
Figure 70.
Multi-bin mailbox sensors
208 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Table 40. Multi-bin mailbox sensors, switches, motors, controller board PCA
Ref.
Control device
Description
1
M2
Flipper roller motor with encoder
2
M1
Delivery head motor
3
PSEject
Delivery-rollers-extended sensor
4
SW1
Interlock switch
5
M3
Delivery head roller motor
6
PSBinFull/Head Position Paper-bin-full sensor (below)
7
PSBinEmpty
Paper-bin-empty sensor
8
PSExit2
Paper-delivered-to-bin sensor
9
M5
Transport belt motor
10
PSFaceUp
Reverse-stepper-motor sensor
11
PSFaceFull
Left-output-bin-full sensor
12
PSEntry
Paper-entry sensor
13
PSExit1
Paper-delivered-to-head sensor
14
M4
Ejector motor
15
Controller board PCA
Receiving paper
The printer delivers paper to the multi-bin mailbox through the face-up
delivery slot (input paper guide) at a rate of 107 mm per second.
Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor, which activates the
flipper roller motor (M2), causing the paper to move through the multibin mailbox transport and delivery system.
Delivering paper
The delivery head assembly on the multi-bin mailbox moves or stays
in the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the EPH
controller board on the printer. If paper is designated for the face-up
bin, the multi-bin mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly. If
paper is designated for one of the face-down output bins, the multi-bin
mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly until the trailing edge is
sensed by the PSFaceUp sensor. Then the flipper roller motor (M2)
reverses and feeds the paper down between the transport belt and
the metal tape until it reaches the delivery head assembly.
EN
Multi-bin mailbox 209
Paper path
Figure 71 illustrates the components of the multi-bin mailbox paper
path.
8
1
2
3
9
4
10
11
5
12
13
14
6
15
17
16
18
7
19
Figure 71.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Multi-bin mailbox paper path
Face-up bin
Delivery head motor
Blind cover
Bin 1
Face-down bins
Bin 8
Controller board PCA
Flipper assembly
Input paper guide
Home position
210 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Delivery head line
Metal tape
Delivery head assembly
Eject rollers
Metal tape
Transport belt
Paper
Magnetic strip
Transport belt motor
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
Device configuration
The HP 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and the HP 3,000-sheet stacker
attach to printers’ left sides.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
Set the default offset action and default stapler action at the printer
control panel under Configuration of Stkr.
The options for default offset action are:
No
Print jobs or mopies are stacked without separation
(although stapling options override this setting).
Yes
Print jobs or mopies are offset from each other.
The options for default stapler action are:
No staple
Print jobs or mopies are delivered to the stapler bin
without being stapled.
One angled
staple
Print jobs or mopies are stapled with one staple at a
40° angle.
(#) staples
Print jobs or mopies are stapled with the configured
number (1, 2, 3, or 6) of staples.
Custom staples
Print jobs or mopies are stapled with the configured
number of staples as defined by the network
administrator.
3,000-sheet stacker
Set the default offset action at the printer control panel under
Configuration of Stkr. The options for default offset action are:
EN
No
Print jobs or mopies are stacked without separation.
Yes
Print jobs or mopies are offset from each other.
Job Separator
Print jobs or mopies are separated by offsetting the
first page.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 211
Power supply
A universal power supply is activated when the printer’s power switch
is turned on. The printer’s paper handling controller sends a power-on
signal to the power supply through the controller PCA.
The power supply provides +26 V (volts) for motors and +5 V for
sensors and controller electronics. The power supply is also activated
when the controller PCA is set to service mode.
Power-on sequence
During the power-on sequence, an internal self-test is performed. All
motors, electronics, and main assemblies are tested.
After successful power-on sequence, the user LED is lit green.
If the power-on sequence is NOT successful, a jam condition or a
hardware malfunction is indicated through the printer control panel
and the user LED is lit amber.
C-link communication
Communication and control of the C-link devices is accomplished
through the paper-handling controller embedded on the formatter
PCA (printed circuit assembly) in the printer. The C-link devices have
their own power supplies and controller boards that receive signals
and commands from the paper-handling controller.
Figure 72.
C-link cabling
212 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Paper path sensors and jam detection
The paper path sensors detect paper jams as follows:
Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntry1) and flipper entry sensor
(FLEntry):
• paper in the flipper at power on or after clearing a paper jam
(when either sensor is activated at power on or after clearing a
jam)
• paper jammed before entering the flipper (when the printer
sends a message that pages are being sent to the stapler/
stacker or stacker, but FLEntry1 is never activated)
• paper jammed in the flipper (when FLEntry1 is activated, but
FLEntry is not, or when FLEntry1 is never deactivated, or
when FLEntry is never deactivated)
Flipper exit sensor (FLExit)
• paper in the flipper at power on or after clearing a paper jam
(when FLExit is activated at power on or after clearing a jam)
• paper jammed in the last part of flipping (FLExit never
activated)
• paper jammed entering the accumulator (FLExit never
deactivated)
Gear wheel sensor (GWSens)—stapler/stacker only
• paper jammed in the accumulator (GWSens never activated)
Accumulator exit sensor (ACExit)—stapler/stacker only
• paper in the accumulator at power on or after clearing a paper
jam (when ACExit is activated at power on or after clearing a
jam)
• paper jammed in the accumulator (when ACExit is not
deactivated after eject)
Exit (Exit)—stacker only
• paper jammed in the offset module (Exit never activated)
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 213
Paper path
Paper input
The device receives paper from the printer at different speeds—106,
117, or 147 mm/second—depending on the printer in use.
Flipper
Paper arrival is sensed by FLEntry1, which activates the flipper
motors. For face-up printing, the flipper simply delivers paper sensed
by FLEntry to the face-up bin. Otherwise, the flipper changes page
orientation from face-up to face-down and delivers paper sensed by
FLExit to the accumulator assembly.
Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker ONLY)
The accumulator assembly collects and registers print jobs/mopies
from the flipper (sensed by GWSens), sends them to the carriage
assembly for stapling, and delivers them to the stapler bin (sensed by
ACExit).
Offset module (stacker ONLY)
The offset module collects and registers print jobs/mopies from the
flipper (sensed by FLExit), offsets them (if selected), and delivers
them to the stacker bin (sensed by Exit).
214 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
Face-up paper path
Flipper entry sensor
Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntry1)
(FLEntry)
Interlock switch
Face-down paper path
Paper input from
the printer
Path through accumulator
Flipper
Flipper exit sensor
(FLExit)
Accumulator exit sensor
(ACExit)
Stapler/carriage
Gear wheel sensor
(GWSens)
Controller PCA
Accumulator
Power supply
Figure 73.
EN
Stapler/stacker paper path and sensors
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 215
Face-up paper path
Flipper entry sensor
Flipper entry sensor 1 (FLEntry1)
(FLEntry)
Face-down paper path
Path through offset
module
Interlock switch
Paper input from
the printer
Flipper
Flipper exit sensor
(FLExit)
Exit sensor (Exit)
Offset module
Controller PCA
Power supply
Figure 74.
Stacker paper path and sensors
216 Chapter 5 - Theory of operation
EN
6
Removal and
replacement
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Removal and replacement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Repair notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Maintenance units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Front covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Top cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Left covers and doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Right covers and doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Top assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Laser/scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Face-down output assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Front assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor . . . . . . 251
Subrelay PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
EN
Chapter contents 217
Left assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Multi-bin mailbox/3,000-sheet stapler/stacker/3,000-sheet
stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Formatter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Internal printer hard disk (DN model) . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Feeder assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Face-up solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Face-up exit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Right assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Pick-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Registration roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Paper photo (OHT) sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Density sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Paper pick-up assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tray 1 pick-up assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Rear assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Formatter pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fan 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Cartridge motor (M3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Main motor (M4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Carousel motor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Carousel motor (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Delivery drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Main gear assembly (not shown). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Post charger HV module assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Cleaning roller HV module assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Main relay PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Drum/cartridge drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Separation discharge high-voltage converter assemblies295
Tray 2 and tray 3 media-size sensing PCAs . . . . . . . 296
218 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
2,000-sheet input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Front cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Vertical transfer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Right cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Tray 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Paper pick-up assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Controller PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Front LED PCA assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Main drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Paper-size sensor assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tension springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
EN
Chapter contents 219
Multi-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Front and back covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Paper bins and blind cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Flipper assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Delivery head position motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Transport belt motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Input paper guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Metallic tape and housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Controller PCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Anti-curl strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Delivery head assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Interlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Diagnostic LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
User status LED PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Attachment assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker . . . . . 338
Bins and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Internal assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
220 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
EN
Chapter contents 221
Introduction
Removal and replacement strategy
This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer
components.
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally,
directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included.
Repair notices
WARNING!
Turn the printer off and disconnect the power cord before servicing the
printer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in severe injury.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed
from the scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can
damage your eyes.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful not to cut
yourself when handling sheet-metal parts.
CAUTION
Always protect the imaging drum from light and physical contact when
removed from the printer. HP recommends reinstalling the original
cover whenever the drum is removed from the printer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left while removing
printer parts. Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD by using an
ESD wrist strap and protective ESD pouches.
222 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Required tools
The following tools are needed to service the printer:
Phillips #1 magnetized screwdriver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft
Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft
T-10, T-15, and T-20 Torx driver, 6-inch (152-mm) shaft
Flat-blade #2 screwdriver
Small pair of needle-nose pliers
ESD equipment (see page 222).
Penlight
Can of compressed air
If you are using a multi-speed screwdriver, ensure that you have a
torque limiter. Ensure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a
Posidriv screwdriver.
CAUTION
EN
To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it
with the existing thread pattern. Then carefully turn it clockwise to
tighten it. Do not over-tighten. If a self-tapping screw hole becomes
stripped, either repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly.
Introduction 223
Maintenance units
The user replaces the following maintenance units as part of periodic
maintenance. Chapter 4 explains the maintenance procedures.
Color toner cartridges
Black toner cartridge
Imaging drum
Air filters
Transfer drum
Transfer charger
Cleaning roller
Charcoal filter
Fuser
Paper rollers
Transfer belt
The printer keeps track of use on some of its user-replaceable parts.
Because maintenance unit life is tracked by the formatter board by
page count, swapping maintenance units between printers might
cause a misrepresentation of maintenance unit life values.
224 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Doors and covers
The following figures show the orientation of the printer and paper
handling accessories as they are referred to in this chapter.
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
Front
Right
Figure 75.
EN
Orientation of printer and accessories: top, front, and right
1
Top cover assembly
2
Front cover
3
Front right cover
4
Right upper cover assembly (includes the right upper door)
5
Right cover subassembly
6
Right lower cover assembly (includes the right lower door)
7
Right rear cover
8
VTU
Doors and covers 225
3
4
5
1
2
Rear
Figure 76.
Left
Orientation of printer and accessories: rear and left
1
Exhaust fan cover
2
Rear cover
3
Left upper cover (includes the left upper door)
4
Left rear cover
5
Left lower cover
226 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
HP Color LaserJet 8500 MFP printer—separating the
printer from the frame
1
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the attachment cover on the
left side of the printer to release the attachment cover.
2
Remove two screws (callout 2) from the attachment bracket.
2
1
2
Figure 77.
Attachment bracket, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer
3
On each side at the bottom of the rack, rotate the locking pins
(callout 3) until they slide out of the holes.
2
3
Figure 78.
Locking pins
4
EN
Roll the printer off of the rack.
Doors and covers 227
Front covers and panels
Removing the front cover
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove one screw holding the strap in place (callout 1).
2
3
2
2
1
Figure 79.
Note
Removing the front cover
3
Remove one screw holding the cover (callout 2).
4
Open the cover to approximately a 45-degree angle and lift it up
to remove it.
Callout 3 is the tag that shows engine settings; sections of Chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting” refer to the tag.
228 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the front right cover
1
Open the front door.
2
Remove one screw in the upper right-hand side that holds the
front right cover on (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 80.
Front right cover
3
EN
Pull the cover off.
Doors and covers 229
Removing the inside left panel
1
Remove the front cover (see page 228).
2
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232).
3
Remove eight screws on the inside panel (callout 1).
2
2
1
2
3
2
4
2
1
Figure 81.
Inside left panel
4
Remove the waste toner tray cover (callout 2) by releasing the tab
on the right side of the cover with a small screwdriver.
5
Remove the waste toner tray.
6
Open the left lower door to disengage the interlock.
7
Swing both the lower green lever (callout 3) and the upper blue
lever (callout 4) to the right.
8
Pull the panel off.
Notes about reinstalling:
When replacing the inside left panel, the lower left door and the
toner carousel door must be open so that the interlock engages.
230 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the filler panel for tray 2 (HP Color LaserJet
8550 base model)
1
Open the front cover.
2
Release the tab at the top, towards the right, of the filler panel
and rotate the top of the filler panel toward you.
Figure 82.
Filler panel for tray 2
Note
One screw secures the filler panel bracket. To replace the filler panel
with a tray 2, remove the screw and the bracket before attempting to
install a tray 2.
EN
Doors and covers 231
Top cover assembly
1
Remove the front right cover (see page 229). Leave the front door
open.
2
Open the left door and loosen the two screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 83.
Screws behind left door
3
Open the right door and loosen the two screws (callout 2).
2
Figure 84.
Screws behind right door
4
Open the front cover.
232 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
Lift the cover up and unplug the connector (callout 3) at the rear
of the cover.
2
3
Figure 85.
Connector on top cover
6
EN
Remove the top cover assembly.
Doors and covers 233
Left covers and doors
Removing the left rear cover
1
Open the left upper door.
2
Support the door and squeeze the prong with needle-nose pliers
to unhook the strap holding the door to the left rear cover
(callout 1).
2
1
Figure 86.
Left door and strap
234 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
3
Remove 11 screws (callout 2).
2
2
Figure 87.
Screws on left rear cover
4
EN
Pull the cover to the left and off.
Doors and covers 235
Removing the left upper cover
1
Remove the left rear cover (see page 234).
2
Remove two screws on the rail (callout 1, one screw is on the left
side of the cover and the other is located inside the front cover).
2
1
Figure 88.
Screws on upper left door
3
Remove the door.
236 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the left lower cover
1
Open the left lower cover.
2
Push the spring-loaded stopper hinges (callout 1) towards the
printer and down to release them.
2
1
Figure 89.
EN
Stopper hinges on lower left cover
3
Move the cover to a 45-degree angle and lift the right side out.
4
Slide the cover to the left and up to release the left side.
Doors and covers 237
Right covers and doors
Removing the right upper cover assembly
Tray 1 is part of the right upper door. Take the tray off and save it if
you are replacing the whole assembly (see page 261). The new
assembly does not include the tray.
Note
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Open the right upper door.
3
On the right side of the door, unplug four connectors that lead
through the printer frame to the right upper cover (callout 1).
Two connectors are plugged into the controller board, and two
connectors are inline connectors. It might be easier to disconnect the
connectors from the rear of the printer and pull the wires through the
printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door.
2
1
Figure 90.
Connectors on the right upper door
4
Close the door to a 45-degree angle and release the springloaded hinges on the right side.
238 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
With needle-nose pliers, remove the e-ring from the hinge (callout
2) on the left side of the door.
2
Figure 91.
EN
E-ring
6
Remove the front right cover (see page 229).
7
Rotate the plastic tab (located on the left hinge) in an upward
direction to a 90-degree angle.
8
Lift the door slightly to the left and pull it away from the chassis.
Doors and covers 239
Removing the right cover subassembly
Note
Note
Use this procedure if you want to separate the right cover subassembly
from the right upper cover.
1
Open the right upper cover assembly slightly.
2
Pull the right side of the subassembly slightly to the right and pull
outward on the right side to snap it out of place.
3
Move the subassembly slightly to the left and to remove it.
There is a small spring on the left side of the subassembly—be careful
it does not fall off.
Notes about reinstalling:
Figure 92.
If the spring falls off the subassembly, slide it onto the pin and
through the slot on the left side of the subassembly.
Spring on right cover subassembly
240 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removing the right rear cover
1
If you have a 2,000-sheet input unit, open the VTU.
2
Remove one screw (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 93.
Right rear cover
3
EN
Pull the bottom of the cover out and then down to remove the
cover.
Doors and covers 241
Removing the right lower cover assembly
1
Remove the front right cover (see page 229).
2
If you have a 2,000-sheet input unit, open the VTU.
3
Remove the right rear cover (see page 241).
4
Remove four screws on the right lower cover in place (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 94.
Screws on the right lower cover
5
Unfasten the holding strap on the right.
6
Remove tray 2 and tray 3, and release the locking tabs inside the
tray 3 area.
7
While holding the cover in place, push down to release the tabs
on the top of the cover and pull out on the bottom of the cover.
Notes about reinstalling:
Insert the tabs on the top of the cover in the corresponding holes
first, then snap the bottom of the cover into place.
242 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Rear cover
1
For HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer models, complete the
following steps before continuing to step 2 on the following page:
a Release two thumb screws (callout 1) to disconnect the video
I/O connector.
b Remove three screws (callout 2) from inside the opening; the
plate remains attached to the rear cover.
2
1
2
Figure 95.
EN
Plate, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer
Doors and covers 243
2
Remove the rear lower left cover (one screw) (callout 1).
2
2
4
2
3
Figure 96.
Note
2
1
2
4
Rear cover
3
Remove the left rear cover (see page 234).
4
Open the right upper door.
5
Remove three screws in the sheet metal tab (callout 2).
6
Remove the right rear cover (see page 241).
7
Remove two screws (callout 3).
8
Remove 13 screws on the rear cover (callout 4).
Two screws are holding the cover to the hinges at the bottom. It is not
necessary to remove these screws.
9
Lift the rear cover off.
244 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Top assemblies
Gain access to the following assemblies from the top of the printer:
EN
control panel
laser/scanner unit
face-down output assembly
Top assemblies 245
Control panel
1
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232).
2
Turn the cover upside down.
3
Remove four screws attaching the control panel to the top cover
(callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 97.
Bottom of the control panel
4
Remove three screws from the bar on the bottom of the control
panel that is holding the wires in place (callout 2).
5
Release the cable stays.
6
Remove the assembly.
246 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Laser/scanner unit
1
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232).
2
On HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models, remove four screws,
two on each side (callout 1 shows two of them), from the laser/
scanner shield and lift the shield out of the printer (the shield is
not present on HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer models).
2
1
Figure 98.
EN
Laser/scanner shield
Top assemblies 247
3
Remove four screws (callout 1) from the laser/scanner unit.
2
1
2
Figure 99.
Scanner unit
4
Release the wires from the cable stay.
5
Unplug the two connectors (callout 2).
6
Gently remove the laser/scanner unit and place it in an ESD
pouch.
248 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Face-down output assembly
1
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232).
2
Remove the left rear cover (see page 234).
3
Remove the left upper cover (see page 236)
4
On the top of the printer, remove the black airflow vent by
releasing the cut tab (callout 1) and lifting the vent off.
2
1
Figure 100.
Upper airflow vent
5
Remove two screws on the face-down exit sensor rail (callout 2).
2
3
2
Figure 101.
Face-down exit sensor rail
6
EN
Unplug the sensor connector on the left side of the rail and
release one cable stay (callout 3).
Top assemblies 249
7
Pull the rail away from the chassis.
8
Remove two screws (callout 4).
2
4
Figure 102.
Face-down output assembly
9
Lift the right side of the assembly, slide the assembly to the left,
and lift it out of the chassis.
250 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Front assemblies
Gain access to the following assemblies from the front of the printer:
toner lock sensor
color cartridge sensor
subrelay PCA
Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor
1
Remove the inside left panel (see page 230).
2
Remove one screw on the toner lock sensor (callout 1).
2
2
1
2
3
2
4
Figure 103.
EN
Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor
3
Remove one connector (callout 2).
4
Remove one screw on the color cartridge sensor (callout 3).
5
Remove one connector (callout 4).
Front assemblies 251
Subrelay PCA
1
Remove the inside left panel (see page 230).
2
Remove the five connectors on the subrelay PCA (callout 1).
3
Remove four screws on the subrelay PCA (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 104.
2
1
Subrelay PCA
252 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Left assemblies
Gain access to the following assemblies from the left side of the
printer:
formatter board
internal printer hard disk
feeder assembly
face-up solenoid
face-up exit assembly
Multi-bin mailbox/3,000-sheet stapler/stacker/
3,000-sheet stacker
Remove the paper output accessory before beginning repairs on the
left side of the printer.
EN
1
Turn the printer off and unplug the power cable.
2
Unplug the paper output accessory power cable from the printer.
3
Unplug the paper output accessory interface cable from the
printer.
4
Holding the paper output accessory by the handle on the top and
by the main body towards the bottom, pull the accessory away
from the printer.
5
Push down on the end of the guide rail until it releases from the
bracket on the 2,000-sheet input unit.
6
Raise the guide rail.
Left assemblies 253
Formatter board
If the formatter board needs to be repaired or replaced, remove the
hard drive and retain it to reattach to the formatter board later.
1
Print a configuration page if the printer is able to generate one
(see page 415). Use this page to reset the NVRAM values that
will be lost if the formatter board is replaced.
2
Loosen the two finger screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 105.
Formatter board
3
Pull the formatter board out of the formatter pan. Removing the
formatter board from the formatter pan disconnects the formatter
board from the chassis.
254 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Notes about reinstalling:
After reinstalling the formatter board, print a configuration page to
compare with the configuration page printed before the formatter
board was removed. Look at the following NVRAM values, and
reset the NVRAM values to match those on the configuration
page that was printed before the formatter board was removed.
• Serial number
• Formatter number
• Page counts (if the controller board is being replaced as well)
• Transfer kit count (percentage of life remaining)
• Fuser kit count (percentage of life remaining)
• Engine settings
Note
The last two digits of the engine settings might vary from those found
on the sticker inside the front cover. This difference is due to check sum
variation and is acceptable.
For information on setting each of these values, see table 26 on
page 93.
EN
Left assemblies 255
Internal printer hard disk (DN model)
If the internal printer hard disk needs to be repaired or replaced, all
data stored on the hard disk will be lost. Download fonts and other
information as necessary.
1
Remove the formatter board from the printer (see page 254).
2
Unplug one connector (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 106.
Connector on formatter board
3
On the other side of the formatter board, release the two tabs with
your fingers (callout 2).
2
Figure 107.
Back side of formatter board
4
CAUTION
With the other hand, pull the hard disk out from the other side.
Take care not to damage the plastic retaining clips on the hard disk.
256 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Feeder assembly
The feeder assembly is located inside the left upper door.
1
Open the front door, and the left lower cover.
2
Remove the left rear cover (see page 234).
3
Remove the left upper cover (see page 236).
4
Remove six screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 108.
Feeder assembly
5
Lift the feeder assembly up and out.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Verify that the gears on the left mesh together on both the top and
the bottom of the assembly.
Replace the screw inside the front door for the right side of the
bar.
Left assemblies 257
Face-up solenoid
The face-up solenoid is below the carousel stop.
1
Remove the feeder assembly (see page 257).
2
Remove the face-up output bin.
3
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
4
Remove one screw inside the back of the printer (callout 1).
2
3
2
1
Figure 109.
Face-up solenoid (1 of 2)
258 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
Lift the face-up solenoid up to release the tab and pull out to
remove the solenoid (callout 2).
2
Figure 110.
Face-up solenoid (2 of 2)
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Ensure that the plastic arm from the solenoid is engaged under
the delivery drive swing arm (callout 3, figure 109).
Left assemblies 259
Face-up exit assembly
The face-up exit assembly is located on the left lower cover.
1
Remove the left lower cover (see page 237).
2
Remove six screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 111.
Screws on the face-up exit assembly
3
Remove the stopper hinges by popping the peg out of the door
assembly.
4
Lift the assembly out.
Notes about reinstalling:
The larger peg on the stopper hinge fits into the assembly.
260 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Right assemblies
Gain access to the following assemblies from the right side of the
printer:
tray 1
pick-up roller
registration roller assembly
density sensor
paper pick-up assembly
tray 1 pick-up assembly
paper photo sensors
Tray 1
Tray 1 is part of the right upper door. Take the tray off and save it if
you are replacing the whole assembly. The new assembly does not
include the tray.
1
Open the tray out about 45-degrees.
2
1
Figure 112.
EN
Tray 1
2
Open the extender all the way out.
3
Grasp both sides and bend towards the middle. Pull the left side
of the tray out first, then pull the right side of the tray out.
4
Unplug one connector on the right side (callout 1).
Right assemblies 261
Pick-up roller
The pick-up roller is located on the tray 1 pick-up assembly.
1
Open the right upper door.
2
Rotate the roller cover back off of the roller.
3
Squeeze the tabs on the roller and pull to the left to remove the
roller (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 113.
Pick-up roller
Note
The figure above shows the inside of an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer.
The black plastic piece (callout 2) is eliminated on HP Color LaserJet
8550 printer models.
262 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Registration roller assembly
The registration roller assembly is located inside the right upper door
under the transfer belt.
1
Open the front door and the right upper door.
2
Remove the transfer drum.
3
Remove the transfer belt.
4
Lift the paper diverter and remove two screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 114.
EN
Registration roller assembly (front)
263
5
Hint
Remove two screws on the back of the assembly (callout 2).
You might need to use a shorter screwdriver to get the back screws out.
2
Figure 115.
Registration roller assembly (back)
264 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Release and remove the cover over the connectors on the right
side of the registration roller assembly.
7
Unplug the innermost connector on the right side (callout 3).
2
3
Figure 116.
Connectors on registration roller assembly
8
Remove one screw from the green knob on the front of the printer
and remove the knob.
9
Pull the registration roller assembly out.
Notes about reinstalling:
When you replace the registration roller assembly, make sure the
gears mesh or you could cause scarring.
Paper photo (OHT) sensors
The paper photo sensors are located under the registration frame
assembly and are used to sense overhead transparencies.
EN
1
Remove the registration roller assembly (see page 263).
2
Remove the two paper photo sensors by releasing the two clasps
on each sensor and unplugging one connector on each sensor.
265
Density sensor
The density sensor is located on the right upper door.
1
Open the right upper door.
2
With a flat screwdriver, release the six tabs on the sensor cover
(callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 117.
Density sensor
3
Remove three screws from the sensor (callout 2).
4
Unplug one connector and remove the sensor.
266 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Paper pick-up assembly
The paper pick-up assembly is located inside the right upper cover
assembly.
1
Remove trays 2 and 3.
2
Remove the right upper cover assembly (see page 238).
3
Remove the right lower cover assembly (see page 242).
4
Remove four screws, one in each corner of the paper pick-up
assembly (callout 1) and pull the assembly out approximately 5
cm (2 in).
2
1
Figure 118.
Paper pick-up assembly
5
Unplug one connector on the right that goes to the paper pick-up
PCA on the right side of the paper pick-up assembly.
6
Lift out the paper pick-up assembly.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Plug in the connector and reroute the wires before replacing the
assembly.
267
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
The tray 1 pick-up assembly is located on the right upper door.
1
Open the right upper door.
2
Remove the screw on the right side of the assembly (callout 1).
.
2
2
1
Figure 119.
Tray 1 pick-up assembly (1 of 2)
3
Remove the cover on the right side of the assembly (callout 2).
268 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
4
Note
Unplug the four connectors on the right side (callout 3).
Two connectors are plugged into the controller board, and two
connectors are inline connectors. It might be easier to disconnect the
connectors from the rear of the printer and pull the wires through the
printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door.
.
2
3
2
4
2
3
Figure 120.
EN
Tray 1 pick-up assembly (2 of 2)
5
Remove four screws (callout 4).
6
Release two clips and lift the assembly off.
269
Rear assemblies
2
1
2
7
2
2
8
2
9
2
3
2
4
2
10
2
5
2
11
2
6
2
12
2
13
Figure 121.
Rear of printer with cover removed
1
2
Developer/imaging drum bias
supply (shown in two parts, the
upper part is eliminated in all
HP Color LaserJet 8550
printer models)
5
Post charger high-voltage
(HV) module
6
Controller board
7
Sheet metal cover plate
Main relay PCA—located
behind high-voltage power
supply (callout 3)
8
Fan 2
9
Carousel motor (M1)
3
High-voltage power supply
4
Cartridge motor (M3)
10 Fan 1
11 Cleaning roller HV module
12 Formatter pan
13 Power supply
270 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
2
1
2
4
2
2
5
2
3
Figure 122.
EN
Rear of printer with formatter pan removed
4
Separation discharge highvoltage converter PCA
5
Separation discharge highvoltage converter
1
Delivery drive assembly
2
Lower air duct
3
Main motor (M4)
The main relay PCA is behind the high-voltage power supply.
The tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing PCAs are located
behind the power supply.
The main gear assembly is behind the developer/imaging drum
bias supply.
Rear assemblies 271
Formatter pan
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board from the formatter pan (see
page 254).
3
On the back of the printer, remove two screws on the top and
three on the bottom of the pan (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 123.
Formatter pan
272 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
4
Remove five screws on the left side of the printer (callout 2).
2
Figure 124.
Formatter pan (left side)
5
EN
Pull the formatter pan off.
Rear assemblies 273
Fan 1
Fan 1 is located on the middle right side of the rear of the printer. For
information about removing the fan 1 housing, see page 283 (steps 4
through 6).
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Unplug the fan connector from the PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 125.
2
3
Fan 1
3
Push out on the two tabs on the left and right sides of the fan
housing (callout 2).
4
Pull the thermistor out (callout 3).
5
Pull the fan out.
274 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Fan 2
Fan 2 is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer. For
information about removing the fan 2 housing, see page 283 (steps 7
through 8).
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Unplug one connector (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 126.
EN
Fan 2
3
Push out on the tabs on the left and right sides of the fan housing
to release the fan (callout 2).
4
Pull the fan out.
Rear assemblies 275
Power supply
The power supply is located on the lower right side of the rear of the
printer.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Unplug the five connectors.
4
Release one cable stay.
5
Remove five screws (two in the top, one on the left, two on the
right) (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 127.
Power supply
6
Lift the power supply out of the chassis.
276 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Controller board
The controller board is located on the lower left side of the rear of the
printer. Shown in figure 128 is a controller board in an HP Color
LaserJet 8550 MFP printer and includes the ECO board cable
(callout 1). Compare the controller board to the same part from an
HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer, in figure 129 on page 278.
2
1
Figure 128.
Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer
Note
Controller board removal procedures, which begin on page 278,
change only in the locations of connectors from one printer to another.
EN
Rear assemblies 277
Removing the controller board
Hint
1
Print a configuration page if the printer is able to generate one
(see page 415). This page can be used to reset the page count
values that will be lost if the controller board is replaced.
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
3
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
4
Unplug 25 connectors.
All 25 connectors are keyed. Also, it is easier to unplug the connectors
before removing the screws from the PCA.
5
Remove four screws (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 129.
Controller board, HP Color LaserJet 8500
6
Push the white plastic holding tab in the upper left corner to the
left (callout 2), and pull the controller board straight out.
Notes about reinstalling:
When putting the controller board back in, the pins on the back
connector must be lined up or you might damage the pins.
278 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
ECO board
The ECO board is located on the lower left side of the rear of the
printer, below the controller board, on HP Color LaserJet GN printer
models.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Unplug the ECO board connector (callout 1).
2
Figure 130.
ECO board
4
Note
EN
2
1
Remove two screws (callout 2) to release the ECO board.
You might have to also pinch the plastic tabs on the right side of the
ECO board to remove the board.
Rear assemblies 279
Cartridge motor (M3)
This motor is located to the left of fan 1.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Unplug one connector (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 131.
Cartridge motor
3
Remove four screws on the motor (callout 2), and pull the motor
out.
280 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Main motor (M4)
This motor is located to the right of the controller board, behind the
formatter pan.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Unplug one connector.
4
Remove four screws (callout 1), and pull the motor away from the
chassis.
2
1
Figure 132.
EN
Main motor
Rear assemblies 281
Carousel motor PCA
This PCA is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Unplug six connectors.
3
Remove one screw (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 133.
Carousel motor PCA
4
Release three tabs from the PCA (callout 2).
5
Lift the PCA out.
282 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Carousel motor (M1)
The carousel motor is located behind the fan 1 housing.
1
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232).
2
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
3
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
4
Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off.
5
Remove four screws from the fan 1 assembly (callout 1).
2
3
2
4
2
2
1
Figure 134.
EN
Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies
6
Release two cable stays and unplug one connector on the right
side of the assembly (callout 2) to remove the housing.
7
Remove one screw from the fan 2 assembly (callout 3).
8
Release one cable stay and unplug one connector from the fan 2
assembly (callout 4) to remove the housing.
Rear assemblies 283
9
On the right side of the carousel motor, unplug one connector
(callout 5).
2
6
2
5
Figure 135.
Carousel motor
10 Remove four screws from the motor and lift it out (callout 6).
284 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Delivery drive assembly
The delivery drive assembly is located behind the fan 1 housing and
the formatter pan.
1
Remove the carousel motor PCA (see page 282).
2
Remove fan 1 housing (see page 283, steps 4 through 6).
3
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the lower air duct and
remove the lower air duct (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 136.
EN
2
Lower air duct
Rear assemblies 285
4
Release three cable stays on the bottom of the delivery drive
assembly.
5
Remove one screw (callout 3) and the gear cover.
2
4
2
5
2
3
Figure 137.
Screws on the delivery drive assembly
6
Remove seven screws from the delivery drive assembly
(callout 4).
7
Lift the assembly up and off the tabs.
Notes about reinstalling:
Ensure that the metal swing arm is above the face-up solenoid
(callout 5).
286 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Main gear assembly (not shown)
1
Open the left lower cover and remove the fuser.
2
Open the right upper door and remove the transfer drum.
3
Remove the registration roller assembly (see page 263).
4
Remove the paper pick-up assembly (see page 267).
5
Remove the main motor (M4) (see page 281).
6
Remove the lower air duct (see figure 136 on page 285).
7
Remove the lowest gear (callout 1) on the delivery drive assembly
(three screws and one e-ring).
2
1
2
Figure 138.
Access to main gear assembly
8
Remove tray 2 and tray 3 from the printer.
9
Remove the tray 2 rail from the front of the printer (one screw, two
connectors).
10 Remove the inner cover 4 (see reference 4, on page 526).
11 Remove the lower (green) lever (two screws).
12 Remove the pressure lever (two e-rings and two bushings).
13 Remove two screws and pull the main gear assembly (callout 2).
EN
Rear assemblies 287
Post charger HV module assemblies
The post charger HV module assemblies are located on the midupper of the rear of the printer. Shown in figure 139 below are the
assemblies in an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer. Compare the
developer/imaging drum bias supply to the same part from an
HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer, in figure 140 on page 289, callouts 1
(the smaller portion) and 2 (the larger portion). The smaller portion is
combined with the larger portion in HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer
models, and so is not present in these models.
Figure 139.
Developer/imaging drum bias supply, HP Color LaserJet 8550
printer
288 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Removing developer/imaging drum bias supply
1
Remove the top cover assembly (see page 232) and then remove
the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off.
3
Unplug four connectors (callout 3).
2
3
2
1
2
5
2
2
4
2
3
Figure 140.
EN
Developer/imaging drum bias supply
4
Release two cable stays.
5
Remove two screws on the bottom of the PCA housing (callout 4).
6
Remove one screw on the PCA (callout 5).
7
Lift the PCA up and off.
Rear assemblies 289
Removing post charger HV module
1
Remove the high-voltage power supply (see page 291).
2
Remove one screw to release the wire from the open ended
diode (callout 1, screw is hidden from view).
2
2
1
Figure 141.
Post charger HV module
3
Release two cable stays.
4
Remove one screw on the top of the module (callout 2).
5
Lift the module up and out.
290 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Cleaning roller HV module assemblies
The cleaning roller HV module includes two PCAs stacked on top of
each other and is located on the upper left side when facing the rear
of the printer.
Removing high-voltage power supply
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Remove the controller board (see page 277).
4
Unplug six connectors from the PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
2
2
1
Figure 142.
EN
High-voltage power supply
5
Release two cable stays.
6
Remove two screws from the PCA (callout 2).
7
Lift the PCA up slightly and out.
Rear assemblies 291
Notes about reinstalling:
Seat the bottom of the PCA first by placing the tabs in the
corresponding holes.
When putting the PCA back in, be sure you do not get any wiring
caught behind it.
Removing cleaning roller HV module
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Unplug two connectors (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 143.
Cleaning roller HV module
4
Release two cable stays.
5
Remove one screw from the top of the module (callout 2).
6
Pull the module out.
292 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Main relay PCA
This PCA is located behind the developer/imaging drum bias supply.
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove five screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off.
3
Remove the developer/imaging drum bias supply (see page 291).
4
Unplug eight connectors (callout 1).
2
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 144.
Main relay PCA
5
Note
Take note of where the interlock tabs come out of their casing so that
you can reinstall them correctly (callout 3).
6
EN
Remove two screws (callout 2).
Lift the PCA up and out.
Rear assemblies 293
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
This assembly is behind the high-voltage power supply assembly.
1
Remove the post charger HV module (see page 290).
2
Remove the cleaning roller HV module and the high-voltage
power supply (see page 289).
3
Remove the fan 1 housing (see page 283, steps 4 through 6).
4
Release three cable stays.
5
Remove 12 screws (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 145.
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
6
Lift the assembly up and out.
Notes about reinstalling:
Replace the screws starting with the callout 2 screw to prevent
print defects. Continue to replace screws clockwise around the
assembly.
294 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Separation discharge high-voltage
converter assemblies
The separation discharge high-voltage converter assemblies are
located in the bottom right corner of the rear of the printer.
Removing separation discharge high-voltage
converter PCA
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (pages 254, 272).
3
Unplug three connectors from the PCA (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 146.
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
4
Release one cable stay.
5
Remove two screws (callout 2).
6
Lift the PCA up and off.
Removing separation discharge high-voltage
converter
EN
1
Remove the high-voltage converter 3 PCA (see page 295).
2
Unplug one connector.
3
Pull the converter toward you and lift out.
Rear assemblies 295
Tray 2 and tray 3 media-size sensing PCAs
1
Remove the rear cover (see page 243).
2
Remove the formatter board and formatter pan (see page 254
and page 272).
3
Remove the power supply (see page 276).
4
Release one cable stay.
5
Remove one screw (callout 1) from the plate and remove the
plate.
2
1
Figure 147.
Plate over media size sensing PCAs
296 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
6
Open the corresponding tray.
7
Remove three screws (callout 2) and unplug one connector on
each PCA to remove.
2
1
Figure 148.
Media size sensing PCAs
Note
The two PCAs and wire-sensing finger assemblies are
interchangeable.
EN
Rear assemblies 297
2,000-sheet input unit
You do not have to detach the 2,000-sheet input unit from the printer
to service any of the units. The replaceable units are:
front, back, left, and right
covers
VTU
tray 4
front LED PCA assembly
tension springs
paper pick-up assembly
controller PCA
298 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
power supply
main drive assembly
paper size sensor
assemblies (2)
EN
Front cover
1
Open tray 4 to the stops.
2
Remove the paper limit-back plate from the tray (callout 1).
.
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 149.
Front cover of the 2,000-sheet input unit
3
Remove four screws (callout 2).
4
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs
on the left- and right-front sides of the tray (callout 3).
5
Carefully lift up on the front cover, and then pull it out to release
the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the front cover
to the tray chassis.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Ensure the plastic retaining tabs are replaced properly.
2,000-sheet input unit 299
Back cover
1
Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the
2,000-sheet input unit.
2
Remove four screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 150.
Back cover removal
3
Pull the cover back from the chassis.
Notes about reinstalling:
Make sure the tab on the lower-left corner is inserted into its
alignment slot.
300 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Left cover
1
Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the
2,000-sheet input unit.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 151.
Left cover removal
3
Pull out on the top of the cover, and then lift up on the right side of
the cover to clear the retaining tabs that are along the bottom
edge (callout 2).
4
Pull out on the lower-left corner to release the plastic retainer tab
that secures that corner of the cover to the chassis.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Replace the left side first.
Tilt the right side down and toward the chassis to place the lower
retaining tabs over the chassis rail (callout 2).
2,000-sheet input unit 301
Vertical transfer unit
Remove the VTU to access the left side of the unit and the paper path
mechanisms.
WARNING!
1
Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the
2,000-sheet input unit.
2
Open the VTU.
3
Rotate the two plastic safety catches on the VTU hinges towards
the unit to the “open” position (callout 1).
Do not release the safety catches from the “open” position while the
VTU is removed. The springs on the safety catches are very strong and
can cause injury.
4
Unplug two connectors (callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 152.
Vertical transfer unit
302 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
5
Remove two screws, one on the inner side of each safety catch.
6
Pull the door halfway closed, then lift the unit straight up to clear
the metal locating tabs on the chassis.
Notes about reinstalling:
WARNING!
EN
Before tightening the screws, ensure that the metal locating tabs
are in place.
Release the safety catches only after tightening the screws that secure
the VTU to the chassis.
2,000-sheet input unit 303
Right cover
1
Remove the VTU (see page 302).
2
Remove two screws near the middle of the right cover (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 153.
Right cover with VTU removed
3
Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab on
the upper-left corner of the cover (callout 2).
4
Carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to
clear the retaining tabs that are along the cover’s bottom edge.
Notes about reinstalling:
Make sure the retaining tabs that are along the cover’s bottom
edge are placed over the chassis rail.
304 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Tray 4
1
Open tray 4 and remove any paper.
2
Remove the vertical transfer unit (VTU) (see page 302).
3
Remove the left and right covers (see page 301 and page 304).
4
Remove one screw and one metal retaining tab from each side of
the chassis (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 154.
Tray 4 removal
5
EN
Support the rear of the tray while sliding it straight out of the
chassis.
2,000-sheet input unit 305
Paper pick-up assembly
The paper pick-up assembly is located on the right side of the unit.
1
Remove the VTU (see page 302).
2
Remove the right cover (see page 304).
3
Open tray 4 to the stops.
4
Unplug three connectors (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 155.
Paper pick-up assembly
5
Remove five screws (callout 2).
6
Slide the assembly straight out of the chassis.
306 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Controller PCA
The controller PCA is located on the back of the unit.
1
Remove the back and left covers (see page 300 and page 301).
2
Unplug 11 connectors (callout 1).
2
4
2
1
2
2
3
2
5
Figure 156.
Controller PCA
3
Remove four hex screws from the two C-link cable connectors
(callout 2).
4
Remove two screws from the right side of the PCA (callout 3).
5
Release the two plastic retaining posts from the left side of the
PCA (callout 4).
6
Pull the PCA out from the chassis.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Ensure that the DIP switches on the PCA are in the Normal
Setting (off) (callout 5). For information on DIP switch settings,
see page 473.
2,000-sheet input unit 307
Front LED PCA assembly
1
Open tray 4 halfway to the stops.
2
On the upper-left corner of the front of the chassis, remove one
screw (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 157.
Screw on front LED PCA assembly
3
Reach behind the LED PCA assembly and pull it away from the
chassis.
4
Release three plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to
the connector (callout 2).
2
Figure 158.
Front LED PCA
5
Unplug the LED PCA from the connector.
308 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Power supply
1
Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the
2,000-sheet input unit.
2
Remove the back and left covers (see page 300 and page 301).
3
Unplug one connector (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 159.
EN
Power supply
4
Remove two screws (callout 2).
5
Lift the power supply upward to clear the locating tabs
underneath, and then slide it to the left to free it from the chassis.
2,000-sheet input unit 309
Main drive assembly
1
Remove the back cover (see page 300).
2
Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 160.
Note
Main drive assembly
3
Release two cable stays.
4
Remove one screw on top of the main drive assembly and one
screw on the bottom (callout 2).
5
Pull the main drive assembly away from the chassis.
Inspect the paper deck drive bushing on the main drive assembly. If the
bushing is broken, it can be replaced without replacing the whole drive
assembly.
310 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Paper-size sensor assemblies
There are two paper-size sensor assemblies: the quantity switch
assembly and the paper-size switch assembly.
Removing the quantity switch assembly
1
Remove the back cover (see page 300).
2
Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 161.
Paper quantity switch assembly
3
Release two cable stays.
4
Remove one screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring
(callout 3) that hold the assembly in place.
5
Remove the assembly.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Seat the retaining spring (callout 3) onto the locating pins that are
on the chassis.
2,000-sheet input unit 311
Removing the paper-size switch assembly
1
Remove the back cover (see page 300).
2
Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 162.
Paper size switch assembly
3
Remove one screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring
(callout 3) that hold the assembly in place.
4
Remove the assembly.
Notes about reinstalling:
Seat the retaining spring (callout 3) onto the locating pins that are
on the chassis.
312 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Tension springs
1
Remove the left cover (see page 301).
2
Open tray 4 to the stops.
3
Inside the tray, remove one spring on the left runner and one
spring on the right runner (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 163.
EN
Tension springs
2,000-sheet input tray 313
Multi-bin mailbox
The following covers and assemblies can be removed from the multibin mailbox:
Hint
front, back, and top covers
power supply
paper bins and blind cover
flipper assembly
delivery head position motor
transport belt motor
input paper guide
controller PCA
anti-curl strings
delivery head assembly
interlock switch
diagnostic LED PCA
user status LED PCA
attachment assembly
metallic tape and housing
assembly
Place the multi-bin mailbox on a table for ease in servicing the unit.
314 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Front and back covers
1
Remove the multi-bin mailbox from the printer.
2
For each cover, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the
three retaining tabs that secure the cover to the frame (callout 1).
2
1
2
1
Figure 164.
Front and back covers
3
EN
Rotate the cover outward to release it from the frame.
Multi-bin mailbox 315
Top cover
1
Remove the front and back covers (see page 315).
2
Disconnect the cable from the LED PCA (callout 1, at the upperfront side of the frame).
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 165.
Top cover
3
Remove one screw that secures the LED PCA to the frame
(callout 2).
4
Remove two screws close to the upper-right side (callout 3).
5
Slide the top cover to the left side of the unit, then lift it up and out
of the frame.
316 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Power supply
1
Unplug one connector from the controller PCA (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 166.
Power supply
2
EN
Press the plastic retaining tabs on each side of the power supply
to remove it (callout 2).
Multi-bin mailbox 317
Paper bins and blind cover
The procedure for removing the paper bins and the blind cover is the
same. Each bin rests in its labeled slot.
Figure 167.
1
Remove the face-up bin first. Lift the outer edge of the bin to clear
the retaining notch in the frame, and then pull the bin away from
the frame.
2
Remove the blind cover.
Paper bins
3
Remove each face-down bin, starting at the top and working
down in sequence.
Notes about reinstalling:
Slide a bin into its designated slot, and then lower the bin into the
retaining notch in the frame.
Replace the paper bins, beginning with the bottom face-down bin
and continuing upward in order. Be sure to place the blind cover
between face-down bin 1 and the face-up bin.
318 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Flipper assembly
1
Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
2
Remove the front, back, and top covers (pages 315, 316).
3
Remove two screws closest to the upper-left side (callout 1).
2
1
2
1
2
3
Figure 168.
Flipper assembly (1 of 3)
4
Hold down the jam access door and unplug the ground wire
(callout 2).
2
Figure 169.
EN
Flipper assembly (2 of 3)
Multi-bin mailbox 319
5
Unplug three connectors (figure 168, callout 3).
6
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tab
that secures the assembly to the top of the frame (callout our).
2
4
2
5
Figure 170.
Flipper assembly (3 of 3)
7
Hold down the jam access door (callout 5) and pull the assembly
out.
Notes about reinstalling:
CAUTION
Hold down the jam access door to reconnect the ground wire to
the flipper motor (callout 2).
Do not over-tighten the screws that secure the flipper assembly to the
multi-bin mailbox frame. The nuts in the flipper assembly can rotate in
their slots.
320 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Delivery head position motor
1
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
2
Unplug one connector (callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 171.
Delivery head motor
3
Remove two screws from the motor (callout 2).
4
Pull the motor away from the frame.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Position the motor in the frame so that the cable grommets are
face down.
Multi-bin mailbox 321
Transport belt motor
1
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
2
Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
3
Release the controller PCA assembly from the bottom of the
frame (see page 327, steps 1 through 7).
4
Unplug the J8 connector on the multi-bin mailbox controller PCA
(callout 1).
2
2
1
Figure 172.
Transport belt motor
5
CAUTION
Remove two screws (and washers) on the transport belt motor
(callout 2).
When removing the motor, do not damage the internal drive belt.
6
Gently pull out the motor.
Notes about reinstalling:
Reroute the cable on the transport belt motor behind the flat
cable, and connect it to the J8 connector on the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA (callout 1).
Replace the internal drive belt onto the transport belt motor gear
before replacing the screws that secure the motor to the frame.
322 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Input paper guide
1
Remove the multi-bin mailbox from the printer.
2
Remove the face-up bin and the blind cover (see page 318).
3
Hold down the jam access door while unplugging the ground wire
(callout 1).
2
1
Figure 173.
EN
Input paper guide (1 of 2)
Multi-bin mailbox 323
4
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs on the
top of the input paper guide (callout 2).
2
Figure 174.
2
3
Input paper guide (2 of 2)
5
Pull the input paper guide free of the frame while routing the
ground wire through the wire access hole (callout 3).
324 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Metallic tape and housing assembly
1
WARNING!
Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury. When
rewinding the metal tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and
rewind it slowly.
2
With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi-bin
mailbox, hold the metal tape near the end, and push and release
the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the
frame (callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing.
2
1
2
Figure 175.
EN
Metallic tape and housing assembly (1 of 2)
3
Remove one screw from the static brush (callout 2), and then
move the static brush out of the way.
4
Lower the delivery head assembly halfway to the stops.
Multi-bin mailbox 325
5
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs
located on each side of the tape housing (callout 3).
2
4
2
3
Figure 176.
Metallic tape and housing assembly (2 of 2)
6
Gently pull on the delivery head assembly to remove the end of
the tape from behind the rollers (callout 4).
7
Pull the tape housing toward you to remove it.
Notes about reinstalling:
Thread the end of the metal tape behind the rollers (callout 4),
and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the multi-bin
mailbox and reinsert it into place (callout 1).
Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing (callout 3). When
the housing is correctly positioned, it will click into place.
326 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Controller PCA
1
Disconnect the power cable (callout 1).
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 177.
2
3
Controller PCA (1 of 2)
2
Disconnect the C-link cable (callout 2).
3
Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
4
Carefully lay the multi-bin mailbox on its front side.
5
Loosen one grounding screw and two self-tapping screws on the
right side of the PCA cover (callout 3).
6
Remove two self-tapping screws and the grounding cable from
the left side of the PCA cover (callout 4).
7
Open the cover to reveal the PCA.
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
Reinstall the grounding cable.
Multi-bin mailbox 327
8
Unplug eight connectors (callout 5) and remove the PCA.
2
5
Figure 178.
Controller PCA (2 of 2)
328 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Anti-curl strings
1
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
2
Remove all the paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
3
On the lower-left side of the frame, remove two screws securing
the tension springs (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 179.
EN
Anti-curl strings (1 of 2)
4
Remove the anti-curl strings from the lower pulleys (callout 2).
5
Remove the delivery head assembly (see page 331).
Multi-bin mailbox 329
6
Release the upper ends of the anti-curl strings from the jam
access door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings
to the door (callout 3).
2
3
Figure 180.
Anti-curl strings (2 of 2)
330 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Delivery head assembly
WARNING!
1
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
2
Remove all paper bins and the blind cover (see page 318).
The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury. When
rewinding the metal tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and
rewind it slowly.
3
With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi-bin
mailbox, hold the metal tape near the end, and release the
retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the
frame (callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing.
2
1
Figure 181.
Delivery head assembly (1 of 4)
4
EN
Remove the anticurl strings (see page 329).
Multi-bin mailbox 331
5
Release the flat ribbon cable from the cable clip (callout 2), and
gently disconnect the cable (callout 3).
2
Figure 182.
2
3
Delivery head assembly (2 of 4)
6
Raise the assembly to the top of the frame.
7
Hold up the assembly and remove two screws (callout 4).
2
4
Figure 183.
Delivery head assembly (3 of 4)
Note
The screw that secures the back end is captive.
332 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
8
Rotate the assembly clockwise while guiding the back end out of
its access opening (see figure 184).
9
Release the anti-curl strings from the pulleys on each end of the
assembly (callout 5).
2
5
Figure 184.
Delivery head assembly (4 of 4)
Notes about reinstalling:
EN
When reinstalling the assembly onto its elevator mounts, ensure
that the locating pins are in place.
Ensure that the assembly moves up and down freely.
Multi-bin mailbox 333
Interlock switch
1
CAUTION
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
Before removing the wires from the multi-bin mailbox interlock switch,
note the location of each wire. Replacing the wires incorrectly can
damage the interlock switch.
2
Disconnect two wires from the switch (callout 1).
2
Figure 185.
2
1
Interlock switch
3
Press the two retaining tabs together to remove the switch
(callout 2).
334 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Diagnostic LED PCA
1
Remove the back cover (see page 315).
2
Unplug two connectors from the PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 186.
EN
Diagnostic LED PCA
3
Remove one screw (callout 2).
4
Pull the PCA away from the frame.
Multi-bin mailbox 335
User status LED PCA
1
Remove the front cover (see page 315).
2
Disconnect the cable from the PCA (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 187.
User status LED PCA
3
Remove one screw (callout 2).
4
Pull the PCA away from the frame.
336 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Attachment assembly
1
Remove the controller PCA, but leave cables connected (see
page 327).
2
Set the controller PCA on top of the unit (callout 1).
2
1
2
Figure 188.
EN
Attachment assembly
3
Remove the e-ring (callout 2).
4
Release the pivot pin that holds the attachment assembly rod to
the frame.
5
Remove the assembly.
Multi-bin mailbox 337
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker
The following covers and assemblies can be removed from the 3,000sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker:
face-up and stapler/stacker
bins
front, back, and foot covers
1
2
stapler door assembly with
label1/stacker door
assembly2
controller PCA cover
flipper assembly
carriage assembly1
accumulator assembly1
stapler1
controller PCA
LED PCA
power supply
interlock switch
safety switch assembly
attachment assembly
flipper ribbon cable
stationary and adjustable
casters
offset module2
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker only
3,000-sheet stacker only
338 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Bins and covers
Face-up bin
CAUTION
1
Lift slightly the end of the bin (callout 1).
2
Pull the bin away from the product (callout 2).
When replacing the bin, make sure you position it under the bin-full flag
(callout 3). Placing it over the bin-full flag and then attempting to force
the bin into its slots can damage the flag.
Stapler bin/stacker bin
1
Unhook the plastic tabs underneath the bin (callout 4).
2
Carefully lift the bin straight up until it is released from the frame.
2
3
2
1
2
2
4
Figure 189.
Bins removal
Front cover
EN
1
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 1).
2
Lift the cover straight up until it is released from the product.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 339
Back cover
1
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 2).
2
Press and hold in the interlock switch (callout 3) while lifting the
cover straight up until the cover is released from the product.
2
3
2
2
1
Figure 190.
Front and back covers removal
340 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Foot cover
Figure 191.
1
Remove the front and back covers.
2
Grasp the foot cover on one side, rotate it out slightly, and then lift
it up to clear the locating pin. Repeat this step for the opposite
side of the foot cover.
3
Lift up the cover and pull it away from the product.
Foot cover removal
To reinstall
The cover can be difficult to replace correctly. Make sure you line up
the ridges on the bottom of the cover with the grooves on the product.
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 341
Stapler door assembly with label/stacker door
assembly
Note
1
Open the door assembly and, on a stapler/stacker, center the
stapler unit.
2
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws (callout 1) from
inside the door, one at the front and one at the back of the device.
The screws remain attached to the plastic screw holders.
3
Rotate the door down until the flat sides of the hinges are parallel
to the floor and pull the door straight away from the product.
Controller PCA cover (with label)
1
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove the upper and lower screws
(callout 2) from the cover.
2
Rotate the cover to clear the tabs at the back of the product and
lift the cover away from the product.
2
Figure 192.
2
1
Stapler door assembly and controller PCA cover removal
342 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Internal assemblies
Flipper assembly
1
Remove the front and back covers.
2
At the back of the product, disconnect the flipper ribbon cable
(callout 1) by pressing the black tabs on the connector to release
the cable.
3
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 2), two
on each side of the assembly.
2
2
1
Figure 193.
Flipper assembly removal (1 of 2)
Note
Sheet-metal edges may be sharp.
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 343
4
Use both hands to grasp the assembly on each side and, with a
firm tug, lift the assembly straight up to clear the tabs (callout 1;
one of the two tabs is shown) on each side of the assembly.
5
Pull the assembly straight away from the product, being careful of
the bin-full flag.
2
1
Figure 194.
Flipper assembly removal (2 of 2)
344 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker only)
1
Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the controller PCA
cover.
2
Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1) from the controller PCA by
pressing the black tabs to release the cable.
2
1
Figure 195.
Carriage assembly removal (1 of 2)
3
EN
Push the ribbon cable up through the hole.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 345
4
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws (callout 1), one
on each side of the assembly.
5
Lift the assembly to clear the tabs on each side of the assembly
and pull the assembly straight away from the frame.
2
1
Figure 196.
Carriage assembly removal (2 of 2)
346 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker only)
1
Note
Remove the front cover, the back cover, the controller PCA cover,
the flipper assembly, and the carriage assembly.
While it is possible to remove the accumulator assembly without first
removing the carriage assembly, HP strongly recommends that the
carriage assembly be removed before removing the accumulator
assembly. Otherwise, you might find it very difficult to reposition the
accumulator assembly with the carriage assembly in the way.
2
Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1) from the controller PCA by
pressing the black tabs to release the cable.
2
1
Figure 197.
Accumulator assembly removal (1 of 2)
3
EN
Push the ribbon cable up through the hole.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 347
4
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 1), two
on each side of the assembly.
2
1
Figure 198.
Accumulator assembly removal (2 of 2)
5
Lift the accumulator assembly up to clear the tabs at each side
and rotate the top of the assembly down while pulling it away from
the product.
348 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Offset module (stacker only)
1
Remove the front cover, the back cover, the controller PCA cover,
and the flipper assembly.
2
Disconnect the ribbon cable (callout 1) from the controller PCA by
pressing the black tabs to release the cable.
3
Push the ribbon cable up through the hole.
4
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 2), two
on each side of the module.
2
2
1
Figure 199.
Offset module removal
5
EN
Lift the offset module to clear the tabs at each side and rotate the
top of the module away from the product while pulling it away from
the product.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 349
Stapler (stapler/stacker only)
Figure 200.
1
Remove the carriage assembly from the 3,000-Sheet stapler/
stacker and place it on a work surface.
2
Remove the staples cartridge from the stapler.
3
Disconnect the cable from its connector and unthread the cable
from the cable guides.
Stapler removal (1 of 3)
350 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Note
4
Use the TX-10 screwdriver to remove the grounding screw
(callout 1) and release the grounding cable.
5
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove two screws and their
washers (callout 2) from the stapler.
Keep the washers with the screws to make sure they are reinstalled.
2
1
2
Figure 201.
Stapler removal (2 of 3)
Note
The stapler is affixed tightly to the carriage assembly. Once the two
screws have been removed, the stapler is held in place by the two metal
tabs located on the side of the stapler opposite the screws.
6
EN
Use firm pressure to slide the stapler toward the tab side of the
stapler, clearing the tabs.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 351
7
Note
Lift the stapler away from the carriage.
In the figure below, the stapler has been removed from the carriage
assembly and is rotated to show the tabs (callout 1) and tab slots
(callout 2).
2
2
1
Figure 202.
Stapler removal (3 of 3)
To reinstall
Place the tabs in the tab holes and use firm pressure to slide the
stapler toward the screws side of the stapler, lining up the screw
holes. Do not attempt to replace the screws until the screw holes are
lined up.
352 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Controller PCA
1
Remove the controller PCA cover.
2
Release the seven cables, including the C-link cable, from their
connectors (callout 1) on the stapler/stacker controller PCA.
3
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove three screws (callout 2).
2
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 203.
Stapler/stacker controller PCA or stacker controller PCA removal
Note
You might have to squeeze the three locating pins to allow the holes
on the controller PCA to clear the pins.
4
Pull the controller PCA from the product.
Note
See chapter 7, Troubleshooting, for information about the service LEDs
(callout 3).
CAUTION
Placing the controller PCA on a metal surface can damage the
controller. Place the controller PCA on an ESD mat.
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 353
LED PCA
1
Remove the front cover.
2
Use the TX-10 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 1) from
the LED PCA.
3
Disconnect the cable (callout 2) to release the LED PCA.
2
1
2
Figure 204.
LED PCA removal
354 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Power supply
1
Remove the controller PCA cover.
2
Unplug the power cable (callout 1) from the power supply.
3
Disconnect the cable from the controller PCA (callout 2).
4
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 3) from
the bracket that holds the power supply in place.
2
2
1
Figure 205.
Power supply removal
5
EN
2
3
Lift the bracket and the power supply out and away from the
product.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 355
Interlock switch
1
Remove the back cover.
2
Disconnect two cables (callout 1) from the interlock switch.
3
Squeeze the interlock switch on the top and bottom (callout 2),
and slide the interlock through the hole (callout 3).
2
2
3
2
1
Figure 206.
Interlock switch removal
356 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Safety switch assembly
1
Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the carriage
assembly.
2
Press the two tabs on the sides of the safety switch assembly
cover (callout 1) to release it from the frame and lift the cover
away from the assembly.
3
Disconnect two cables (callout 2) from the safety switch
assembly.
4
Press the tabs on the bottom of the safety switch assembly (one
tab on each side—callout 3) to release it from the frame and lift
the assembly away from the product.
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 207.
EN
Safety switch assembly removal
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 357
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
1
Unplug the attachment assembly’s C-link cable from the
controller PCA and power cable from the power supply.
2
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove four screws (callout 1) from
the attachment assembly.
3
Guide both cables through the hole and pull the assembly away
from the product.
2
1
Figure 208.
Attachment assembly removal
358 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Flipper ribbon cable
1
Remove the back cover and the controller PCA cover.
2
Disconnect the cable (callout 1) at both ends by pressing the
black tabs on the connectors.
3
Open the three cable clips (callout 2; two of the three cable clips
are shown) to release the cable.
2
1
2
Figure 209.
EN
Flipper ribbon cable removal
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 359
Stationary caster
1
Remove front or back cover, depending upon the caster you want
to replace.
2
Lay the stapler/stacker on its front or back side so that the caster
being replaced is off the floor.
3
Use the TX-20 screwdriver to remove one screw (callout 1) from
the inside of the frame.
4
Rotate the caster 90° to clear the tabs and pull the caster away
from the product.
2
1
Figure 210.
Stationary caster removal
360 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
Adjustable caster
1
Remove the front cover, the back cover, and the foot cover.
2
Lay the stapler/stacker on its front or back side so that the caster
being replaced is off the floor.
3
Use a flat blade screwdriver to snap the e-clip off of the adjusting
knob (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 211.
Adjustable caster removal
4
EN
Slide the caster out of its position.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker 361
362 Chapter 6 - Removal and replacement
EN
7
Troubleshooting
Chapter contents
Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Printer message troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Aids to troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Continuous configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Demonstration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Service mode engine diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Disabling interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Service mode formatter diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Cold reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fault log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Paper path troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
General paper path checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Wrinkled pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Sealed envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Image formation troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Understanding color variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Common causes of color variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
EN
Chapter contents 363
Image defects troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Image orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Image defect examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Developer streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Color-plane registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Toner bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Charge roller set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Missing toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Hot offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Color balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Repetitive defects troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Color developer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Charging roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Black developer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Cleaning roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Developer DSD wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Transfer drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Imaging drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Transfer belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Ways to troubleshoot the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Status LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Status LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Standalone running test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Motor test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Sensor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
364 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Switching the multi-bin mailbox to test mode. . . . . . . 477
Power-up sequence test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Paper path test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Multi-bin mailbox LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Calibrating the staple position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Troubleshooting tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Printer messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Communications troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
HP network interface support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Third-party network interface support . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
EN
Chapter contents 365
366 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Before troubleshooting any specific printer problem, make sure that
the following conditions are met:
Note
EN
l
Remove the printer from the network before beginning
troubleshooting to make sure that the failure is not associated
with the network. For HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printers,
compare printed pages to copied pages to determine whether the
problem is a print engine problem or a copy problem. Use the
HP Color LaserJet 8550 MFP printer service manual to
troubleshoot copy module and document feeder problems.
l
The printer driver is correct for the printer installed.
l
The printer is being powered off with the power button, not by the
power cable, so that cooling fans run through their entire cycle.
l
Overdue maintenance is performed before troubleshooting.
l
The maintenance units are within their rated life.
The customer is responsible for ensuring that the items included in the
consumable kits are in good condition.
l
The printer has been maintained on a regular basis as described
in chapter 4. Note the location of spilled or accumulated toner
before troubleshooting. Toner contamination might indicate
ventilation or printer environment problems.
l
The toner catch tray is not overfull. Empty the toner catch tray, if
necessary, and identify the source of excessive waste toner.
l
The customer is using supported media.
l
The operating environment is within the specified parameters
listed in chapter 1 of this manual.
l
The printer is not exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced
by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials.
l
The printer is never exposed to direct sunlight.
l
The media are stored correctly and within environmental limits.
l
The printer is installed on a solid, level surface.
l
The line voltage does not vary more than 20% from the nominal
rated value specified on the Power Rating Label. Suspect this
problem if large motors are used near the printer such that they
might cause temporary voltage changes.
l
Any non-HP components (toner, memory boards, and EIO cards)
are removed from the printer.
l
Printer hardware or software configuration has not changed, or
the problem is not associated with any specific software. Refer
customers to their software vendor for software-related problems.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist 367
Printer message troubleshooting
This section contains explanations and recommended actions for
messages that appear on the printer control panel.
Note
l
Numbered messages — table 41 (beginning on this page)
l
Unnumbered messages (in alphabetical order) — table 42
(beginning on page 388)
The action field for each control panel message describes the steps to
resolve the message. Each step is a self-contained resolution for the
message; however, the steps should be followed in order.
Table 41. Numbered printer messages
****************
Event log message: None
Description:
Displayed during startup as the individual tasks
begin initializing and during a low-level self-test.
(A character other than “*” indicates an error has
occurred.)
Action:
No action is required.
13.00.00 (event log message)
See
CLEAR PAPER JAM
in table 42 on page 394.
Paper jam
13.00.03 (event log message)
Fusing delivery paper delay jam
See
CLEAR FUSER JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 390.
13.00.04 (event log message)
Fusing delivery stationary jam
See
CLEAR FUSER JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 390.
13.00.05 (event log message)
Delivery paper delay jam
See
CLEAR OUTPUT JAM
UPPER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 393.
13.00.06 (event log message)
Delivery stationary jam
See
CLEAR OUTPUT JAM
UPPER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 393.
368 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
13.00.07 (event log message)
Two-sided turnaround paper late jam
See
CLEAR DUPLEX JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 390.
13.00.08 (event log message)
Two-sided turnaround paper stopped jam
See
CLEAR DUPLEX JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 390.
13.00.09 (event log message)
Two-sided path paper late jam
See
CLEAR DUPLEX JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 390.
13.00.10 (event log message)
Transfer jam
See
CLEAR TRANSFER
JAM
in table 42 on page 394.
13.00.11 (event log message)
See
CLEAR UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE JAM
THEN LOAD TRAY 1
<type><size>
in table 42 on page 394.
Tray 1 jam
13.11.11 (event log message)
Time-out at paper entry sensor (PS31)
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 390.
13.11.1B (event log message)
Time-out at paper exit sensor (PS32)
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 390.
13.11.21 (event log message)
Page stays too long at paper entry sensor (PS31)
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 391.
13.11.2B (event log message)
Page stays too long at paper exit sensor (PS32)
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 391.
13.11.31 (event log message)
At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU is
active.
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 391.
13.11.3B (event log message)
At power on, paper exit sensor (PS32) in VTU is
active.
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 391.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 369
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
13.22.01, 13.22.02 (event log messages)
Multi-bin mailbox jam
See
CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM
in table 42 on page 392.
13.22.03 (event log message)
Multi-bin mailbox jam
See
CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM
in table 42 on page 392.
13.22.04 (event log message)
Multi-bin mailbox jam
See
CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM
in table 42 on page 393.
13.22.05 (event log message)
Multi-bin mailbox jam
See
CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM
in table 42 on page 393.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Event log message: 20.00.00
Description:
More data has been received from the computer
than fits in the printer’s internal memory.
Action:
No action is required. Only the amount of data that
fits in the printer’s internal memory is printed.
If this error occurs frequently or if large or complex
print jobs are often sent to the printer, add more
memory to the printer. The optimum amount of
memory is 128 MB.
22 EIO <n> BUFFER
OVERFLOW
Event log message: 22.00.01
Description:
The EIO buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
This might happen if several complex jobs are sent
simultaneously via the network and are larger than
the overflow will allow.
Action:
No action is required. The current data in the print
buffer will be lost.
<n> = EIO slot number:
1 = Bottom EIO slot
2 = Top EIO slot
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Event log message: 22.00.01
Description:
Indicates the parallel buffer has overflowed. This
might happen if several complex jobs are sent
simultaneously via the parallel port and are larger
than the overflow will allow.
Action:
No action is required. The current data in the print
buffer will be lost.
370 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
30.00.01 (event log message)
Hard disk internal self-test routine failure detection
See
DISK
DEVICE FAILURE
in table 42 on page 396.
40.<n> HP EIO ERROR
Event log message: 40.00.00
Description:
An EIO accessory connection has been abnormally
broken while transferring data from the computer to
the printer.
Action:
<n> = EIO slot number
1 = Bottom EIO slot
2 = Top EIO slot
1
Press GO.
2
Print an EIO configuration page to verify that
the EIO accessories are installed properly.
3
Check that all cables are connected to the EIO
ports and that the EIO accessory is seated
properly.
4
Turn the printer off and on to reset it.
5
If possible, print to another network printer to
verify the network is working properly.
All data in the print buffer will be lost.
40.00.01 (event log message)
An EIO accessory is initializing.
See
EIO <n>
INITIALIZING
in table 42 on page 397.
13.11.31 (event log message)
At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU is
active.
See
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
in table 42 on page 391.
41.2 PRINTER ERROR
Event log message: 41.00.02
Description:
Indicates that a beam detect laser scanner error
has occurred on the previous page. The page will
reprint and continue.
Action:
EN
1
Open and close the front door of the printer to
remove any remaining pages from the printer.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Reconnect connector J1001 on the laser driver
PCA and connector J205 on the controller
board.
4
Reconnect connector J2 on beam detect PCA,
relay connector J40, and connector J211 on
the controller board.
5
If the problem persists, replace the laser/
scanner unit.
6
If, after replacing the laser/scanner unit, the
problem persists, replace the controller board.
Printer message troubleshooting 371
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
41.3 UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE
LOAD TRAY 1
<width> <length>
Event log message: 41.00.03
Description:
Tray 1 is configured for a specific media size, but the
printer detects a different size being fed from tray 1.
For example, the printer was expecting a lettersized page but detected that an 11-by-17 inch-sized
page was fed instead.
Action:
<width> = Media width specified in the printer driver
or application
<length> = Media length specified in the printer
driver or application
41.5 UNEXPECTED
PAPER TYPE
LOAD TRAY <x>
<type> <size>
1
Verify the correct size media (width and length)
are loaded in tray 1.
2
Verify the paper guides are set correctly.
3
Load the requested size media in tray 1. Or,
press GO to print on the default size.
4
Verify that the media width sensor on the
paper guides are working properly.
5
Reconnect connector J1701 on the tray 1
width detection PCA, relay connector J33, and
connector J208 on the controller board.
6
Replace the tray 1 pick-up assembly.
Event log message: 41.00.05
Description:
Action:
The printer was expecting one type of medium to be
1
Open and close the front door to remove the
fed from an input tray and a different type was fed.
page from the printer.
For example, the printer was expecting
2
Verify that the correct media are loaded in the
transparencies and plain paper was fed.
input tray and the printer control panel is
configured correctly.
<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4)
<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or 3
application
<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or
4
application
Note: The size error in this message applies only to
tray 1.
372 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Clean the detection windows of OHT sensors 1
and 2.
Reconnect connectors J1801 and J1802 of
OHT sensors 1 and 2, connector J214 on the
controller board, and relay connector J17.
5
Replace OHT sensors 1 and 2.
6
Replace the controller board.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
49.<xxxx> ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 49.<xxxx>
Description:
Indicates that a software or data communications
error has occurred, or corrupt data was sent to the
printer. This can be caused during times of high
network traffic or by incomplete or out-of-bounds
print data. This error can also occur because of
defective EIO devices.
Action:
1
Verify that all cables are connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Remove all EIO cards and reinstall them to
ensure they are seated correctly.
4
If using a parallel connection, verify that the
cable is IEEE-1284 compliant.
5
If the error occurs frequently, try adding more
memory.
50.1 FUSER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 50.00.01
Description:
Indicates that a low temperature error has occurred
in the fuser.
Action:
1
Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the
printer.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Turn the printer off and remove the fuser.
Measure the resistance across fuser
connectors J26F-A4 (FXTHU) and J26F-A3
(GND). If it is not in the range of 250 kOhms to
600 kOhms (room temperature), check the
wiring from the connector J222 on the
controller board up to the upper thermistor. If
the wiring is normal, replace the fuser kit.
4
Reconnect connector J222 on the controller
board and connector J26 on the fuser.
5
Replace the fuser kit.
6
Replace the power supply.
50.2 FUSER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 50.00.02
Description:
Indicates that a warmup error has occurred in the
fuser.
Action:
EN
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the
printer.
3
Check for media jams in the fuser.
4
Replace the fuser kit.
Printer message troubleshooting 373
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
50.3 FUSER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 50.00.03
Description:
Action:
Indicates that a high temperature error has occurred 1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
in the fuser. This error is saved in the controller
2
Turn the printer off and unplug it. Place a flat
board by an electrical charge in capacitor C259.
blade of a screwdriver between the two wires
of C259 to short out the capacitor and clear the
memory.
3
Replace the fuser kit.
4
Replace the power supply.
5
Replace the controller board.
50.4 FUSER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 50.00.04
Description:
Indicates that a fuser drive or power unit error has
occurred in the fuser.
Action:
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the
printer.
3
Replace the fuser kit.
4
Replace the power supply.
5
Replace the controller board.
50.00.05 (event log message)
An incompatible fuser is installed.
See
INCORRECT FUSER
LOWER LEFT DOOR
in table 42 on page 399.
50.6 FUSER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 50.00.06
Description:
Indicates that a heater error has occurred in the
fuser.
Action:
374 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the
printer.
3
Reconnect connector J222 on the controller
board, connector J26 on the fuser, and
connector J101 on the power supply.
4
Replace the fuser kit.
5
Replace the power supply.
6
Replace the controller board.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
51 LASER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 51.00.01
Description:
Indicates that a laser malfunction has occurred.
Action:
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Reconnect connector J1001 on the laser driver
PCA and connector J205 on the controller
board.
3
Reconnect connector J2 on the beam detect
PCA, relay connector J40, and connector J211
on the controller board.
4
If the problem persists, replace the laser/
scanner unit.
5
If, after replacing the laser/scanner unit, the
problem persists, replace the controller board.
52 SCANNER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 52.00.00
Description:
Indicates that the scanner motor is not turning
properly.
Action:
EN
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Reconnect connector J901 on the scanner
motor PCA, relay connector J40, and
connector J211 on the controller board.
3
Measure the voltage across connector J647B11 (+24UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the power supply.
4
Measure the voltage across connector J211-7
(SCND) and J211-6 (GND) on the controller
board after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage changes from 0 V to 17 V or more,
replace the laser/scanner unit.
5
Replace the laser/scanner unit.
6
Replace the controller board.
Printer message troubleshooting 375
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
53.<x><y>.<zz> ERROR
DIMM SLOT <n>
Event log message: 53.<x><y>.<zz>
Description:
Indicates that a memory error occurred during the
configuration and validation of DIMM memory.
Action:
1
Verify that the DIMM board is installed
correctly and the DIMMs are configured
correctly. DRAM DIMMs must be installed in
synchronous pairs in adjacent slots, with the
same size and speed in both slots. Only
SDRAM is supported.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Remove and replace the DIMM that caused
the error.
<x> = Hardware type:
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
2 = Font DIMM*
<y> = Hardware device:
0 = Onboard ROM/RAM
1 = DIMM slot 1
2 = DIMM slot 2
3 = DIMM slot 3
4 = DIMM slot 4
5 = DIMM slot 5
6 = DIMM slot 6
7 = DIMM slot 7
8 = DIMM slot 8
For more information about installing DIMMs, see
page 106.
<zz> = Error:
00 = Unsupported memory
01 = Unrecognized memory
02 = Unsupported memory size
03 = Failed RAM test
04 = Exceeded maximum RAM size
05 = Exceeded maximum ROM size
06 = Invalid DIMM speed; check DRAM
07 = DIMM is reporting incorrect checksums
10 = DIMM address
11 = PDC XROM out of bounds
12 = Could not make temporary mapping
13 = Invalid RAM type
14 = DIMM not paired properly
15 = Bad firmware upgrade DIMM checksum
16 = More than one set of firmware upgrade DIMMs
17 = Not enough DRAM to run
<n> = EIO slot number:
1 = Bottom EIO slot
2 = Top EIO slot
*The HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer supports font DIMMs; the HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer does not
support font DIMMs.
376 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
54.1 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 54.00.01
Description:
Indicates that the temperature/humidity sensor in
the printer has malfunctioned. The temperature/
humidity sensor is located below tray 2.
Action:
54.2 CAROUSEL ERROR
CYCLE POWER
1
Reconnect connector J801 and relay
connector J55 on the temperature/humidity
sensor, and connector J206 on the controller
board.
2
Replace the cassette crossmember assembly
which includes the temperature/humidity
sensor.
3
Replace the controller board.
Event log message: 54.00.02
Description:
Action:
Indicates that the color toner carousel is not working
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
correctly. This could be caused by an obstruction in
2
Open the carousel door and waste toner tray.
the carousel path, such as a loose shutter or
Look for an obstruction, such as a toner
disengaged toner cartridge.
cartridge shutter catching on the waste toner
tray. Verify the toner lock lever is fully locked. If
the message does not clear after closing the
doors, turn the printer off and on to reset the
printer.
EN
3
Clean the carousel position sensor (PS3) with
compressed air. If the problem persists,
replace the sensor.
4
Reconnect connector J701 on carousel motor
PCA; connectors J641, J642, J644, and J648
on the main relay PCA; connector J672 on the
subrelay PCA; and connector J102 on the
power supply.
5
Check operation of the carousel stopper arm.
Replace the carousel stopper solenoid.
6
Check electrical continuity between connector
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the main relay PCA.
7
Check electrical continuity between connector
J644-1 (PBK) and J644-2 (PMP) on the main
relay PCA when the door switch (SW644) is
turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the black toner cartridge on/off switch.
Printer message troubleshooting 377
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
(54.2 CAROUSEL ERROR
CYCLE POWER, continued)
8
Check electrical continuity between connector
J642-1 (PYMC) and J642-2 (PBK) on the
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW673)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the toner cartridge cover switch in the
subrelay PCA.
9
Check electrical continuity between connector
J642-1 (PYMC) and J648-1 (+24 VAR) on the
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW642)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the main relay PCA.
10
Measure the voltage across connector J648-1
(+24 VAR) and J648-3 (GND) on the main
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
11
Reconnect connectors J704 and J706 on the
carousel motor PCA, and connector J220 on
the controller board.
12
Reconnect connector J43 on the carousel
position sensor, relay connector J42 and
connector J207 on the controller board.
13
Measure the voltage across connector J220A6 (RLSROT) and J220-B5 (GND) on the
controller board after the printer is turned on. If
the voltage changes to about 3.5 V from 0 V,
replace the carousel motor PCA.
14
Replace the carousel motor (M1).
15
Replace the controller board.
54.00.03 (event log message)
See
DUPLEX ERROR
CHECK DUPLEXER
in table 42 on page 397.
54.3 CALIBRATION WARNING PRESS
GO TO CONTINUE
Event log message: 54.00.03
Description:
The process marks in the density sensing pattern
are corrupted (see chapter 5 for more information).
Action:
378 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Press GO.
2
Print a configuration page and troubleshoot as
an image-quality problem.
3
Check the transfer guide for cracks and
replace the transfer guide as needed.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
54.4 WASTE TONER
SENSOR ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 54.00.04
Description:
The waste toner sensor has failed. Printing cannot
continue.
Action:
1
Replace the waste toner sensor assembly.
2
Replace the imaging drum.
54.00.05 (event log message)
Sensor abnormality.
See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
in table 42 on page 389.
54.00.06 (event log message)
Out of range cyan.
See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
in table 42 on page 389.
54.00.07 (event log message)
Out of range magenta.
See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
in table 42 on page 389.
54.00.08 (event log message)
Out of range yellow.
See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
in table 42 on page 389.
54.00.09 (event log message)
Out of range black.
See CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
in table 42 on page 389.
55 PRINTER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 55.00.01
Description:
Indicates a printer command error. The commands
cannot be exchanged between the printer and its
controller.
Action:
56.1 ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 56.01.01
Description:
Indicates an input feed error (such as requesting to
feed transparencies through the duplexer), or that
the input tray is not installed.
Action:
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Verify the controller board is fully seated.
1
If the input tray you are trying to print from is
not installed, install the input tray.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
56.2 ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 56.00.02
Description:
Indicates an illegal output error. For example, the
multi-bin mailbox is not installed and it was selected
as the output destination, or there are
transparencies in the duplexer.
Action:
EN
1
Open the printer and remove media from the
paper path.
2
Verify that the media type is set in the printer
control panel.
3
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
Printer message troubleshooting 379
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
57.1 FAN FAILURE
Event log message: 57.00.01
Description:
One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed.
Action:
1 = Fan 1 (FM 1)
380 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate
the printer in this condition or it can be
seriously damaged.
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset it.
2
Reconnect connectors J702 and J706 on the
carousel motor PCA, and connector J220 on
the controller board.
3
Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel
motor PCA, connectors J648 and J641 on the
main relay PCA, and connector J102 on the
DC power supply.
4
Measure the voltage across J702-3 (FAN1ON)
and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel motor PCA
after the printer is turned on. If the voltage
changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace fan 1.
5
Measure the voltage across connector J701-1
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is about 24 V, replace the carousel
motor.
6
Measure the voltage across connector J641-1
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
7
Check the AC power supply.
8
If the problem is not rectified after the printer is
turned off and on again, find the cause of
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more
than two minutes before turning the power
back on.
9
Replace the power supply.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
57.2 FAN FAILURE
Event log message: 57.00.02
Description:
One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed.
Action:
2 = Fan 2 (FM 2)
EN
Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate
the printer in this condition or it can be
seriously damaged.
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset it.
2
Reconnect connectors J703 and J706 on the
carousel motor PCA and connector J220 on
the controller board.
3
Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel
motor PCA, connector J648 on the main relay
PCA, and connector J102 on the DC power
supply.
4
Measure the voltage across connector J703-3
(FAN2ON) and J703-1 (GND) on the carousel
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace fan
2.
5
Measure the voltage across connector J701-1
(+24 VB) and J701-2 (GND) on the carousel
motor PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is about 24 V, replace the carousel
motor.
6
Measure the voltage across connector J641-1
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is 24 V, replace the main relay PCA.
7
Check the AC power supply.
8
If the problem is not rectified after the printer is
turned off and on again, find the cause of
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more
than two minutes before turning the printer
back on.
9
Replace the power supply.
Printer message troubleshooting 381
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
57.3 FAN FAILURE
Event log message: 57.00.03
Description:
One of the cooling fans failed.
Action:
3 = Fan 3 (FM 3)
Caution: Turn the printer off and do not operate
the printer in this condition or it can be
seriously damaged.
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset it.
2
Reconnect connectors J645 and J647 on the
main relay PCA, J18 and J74 relay connectors,
and connector J227 on the controller board.
3
Reconnect connector J641 on the main relay
PCA, and connector J102 on the power supply.
4
Measure the voltage across J645-3 (FAN3ON)
and J645-1 (GND) on the main relay PCA after
the printer is turned on. If the voltage changes
from 0 V to 24 V, replace fan 3.
5
Measure the voltage across connector J641-1
(+24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
6
Measure the voltage across connector J641-1
(-24 VB) and J641-4 (GND) on the main relay
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
7
Check the AC power supply.
8
If the problem is not rectified after the printer is
turned off and on again, find the cause of
activation of the overcurrent/overvoltage
detection circuit in the power supply. Wait more
than two minutes before turning the printer
back on.
9
Replace the controller board.
58.1 ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 58.00.01
Description:
Indicates that the paper diverter inside the right
upper door is out of position, causing an error
feeding media from tray 1.
Action:
382 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Open the right upper door and check for a
media jam or misfed media.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
59.<x> MOTOR ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 59.00.0<x>
Description:
Indicates that the main motor (M4) is not working
properly.
Action:
<x> = Description:
0 = General error
1 = Startup error
2 = Rotation error
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Reconnect connector J219 and relay
connector J1 on the controller board.
3
Replace the main motor (M4).
4
Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647
on the main relay PCA, connectors J671 and
J673 on the subrelay PCA, connector J102 on
the power supply, and connector J227 on the
controller board.
5
Check electrical continuity between connector
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the main relay PCA.
6
Check electrical continuity between connector
J671-2 (PMP) and J671-2 (PFUPR) on the
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW671)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the subrelay PCA.
7
Measure the voltage across connector J647B11 (+24 UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
8
Replace the controller board.
62.<x> SERVICE
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 62.00.0<x>
Description:
Indicates that a problem exists with the internal
memory.
Action:
<x> = Description:
0 = Internal ROM or RAM
1-8 = DIMM slots 1-8
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter
diagnostics in the Service Menu.
3
If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM.
63 SERVICE
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 63.00.00
Description:
Indicates that the internal RAM memory test failed.
Action:
EN
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter
diagnostics in the Service Menu.
3
If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM.
Printer message troubleshooting 383
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
64 PRINTER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 64.00.00
Description:
Indicates a scan buffer error.
Action:
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
65 PRINTER ERROR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 65.00.00
Description:
Indicates a DRAM controller error.
Action:
66.<x>0.<yy> C-LINK
COMM ERROR
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter
diagnostics in the Service Menu.
3
If the problem persists, replace the bad DIMM.
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
Indicates a communication error between the 2,000- 1
Verify that the C-link and power cables are
sheet input unit or the multi-bin mailbox and the
connected.
printer.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
<x> = Device number in the link
<yy> = Error code from the optional device
66.11.01 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.11.01
Description:
Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit lifting
motor error.
Action:
384 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Verify that there are no objects or paper stored
in the left side of the tray.
4
Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by
hand.
5
Verify that the paper size plates are installed
correctly, and that they are not bent.
6
Replace the paper deck drive assembly
bushing.
7
Replace the paper deck drive assembly.
8
Replace the paper tray (tray 4) for the 2,000sheet input unit.
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
66.11.02 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.11.02
Description:
Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit feed
motor error.
Action:
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Verify that there are no objects in the left side
of the tray.
4
Verify that the paper tray raised sensor (PS34)
is working properly (perform a sensor test).
5
Check for proper installation of the pick-up
roller.
6
Check the pick-up assembly and the paper
deck drive assembly cabling.
7
Replace the pick-up assembly.
8
Replace the paper deck drive assembly.
66.11.03 INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.11.03
Description:
Indicates a 2,000-sheet input unit lifting and
feed motor error.
Action:
EN
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Verify that there are no objects in the left side
of the tray.
4
Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by
hand.
5
Verify that the paper size plates are installed
correctly, and that they are not bent.
6
Replace the paper deck drive assembly
bushing.
7
Replace the paper deck drive assembly.
8
Check that the paper tray raised sensor (PS34)
is working properly (perform a sensor test).
9
Check for proper installation of the pick-up
roller.
10
Check pick-up assembly cabling.
11
Replace the pick-up assembly.
Printer message troubleshooting 385
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
66.22.08 OUTPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.22.08
Description:
Indicates a multi-bin mailbox flipper motor error.
Action:
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Check for jams in the flipper assembly area.
4
Replace the flipper assembly.
5
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
66.22.09 OUTPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.22.09
Description:
Indicates a multi-bin mailbox external memory
error.
Action:
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
66.22.<xx> OUTPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 66.22.<xx>
Description:
Indicates a multi-bin mailbox error.
Action:
1
Verify that the c-link and power cables are
connected.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Replace the C-link cables.
4
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
<xx> = Error code from the optional device
67.<x> ERROR
POWER CYCLE
Event log message: 67.00.0<x>
Description:
Indicates an electronic controller error.
Action:
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
<x> = Description:
1 = Controller board error
2 = Controller board IC malfunction
3 = Internal communication malfunction
2
Replace the controller board.
386 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 41. Numbered printer messages (continued)
68 NVRAM ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED
Event log message: 68.00.00
Description:
Indicates that a recoverable error has been
detected in the NVRAM. Values for some NVRAM
settings were found to be illegitimate in form and
were set back to their default value.
Action:
1
Verify the printer control panel settings. One or
more fields have been reset to their factory
defaults during the error recovery.
2
Perform a factory defaults reset (see page 92).
3
Perform a cold reset (see page 431).
68 NVRAM FULL
SETTINGS LOST
Event log message: 68.00.01
Description:
Indicates that the NVRAM is full, and the printer is
unable to write new data to the NVRAM.
Action:
Verify the printer control panel settings. One or
more fields might have been reset to their factory
defaults during error recovery. The next time the
printer is turned off and on, NVRAM will be cleared
and all factory defaults will be restored.
79 SERVICE <xxxx>
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 79.<xxxx>
Description:
Action:
The firmware has detected a hardware failure within
1
Turn the printer off. Disconnect all
the formatter. This failure can be caused by
communication cables and EIO cards. Turn the
defective EIO devices and communication ports
printer back on.
<xxxx> Description
01<xx> = IO ASIC register error
02<xx> = Video ASIC register error
03<xx> = IDE ASIC register error
2
Run extended formatter diagnostics from the
Service Mode Menu to troubleshoot the failure.
3
If the problem persists without the
communications connected, replace the
formatter board.
8<n>.<xxx> (event log message)
See
EIO <n>
NOT FUNCTIONAL
in table 42 on page 398.
EIO card error
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 387
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages
ACCESS DENIED
Event log message: None
Description:
A user has attempted to select a menu value while
printer control panel locking is enabled.
Action:
See the system administrator for access to the
printer control panel. If it is necessary to override
the password, perform a cold reset. See page 431
for information about performing a cold reset.
CALIBRATING
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is adjusting the print density (see page
160 for more information).
Action:
No action is required. If the printer does not return
to Ready, turn the printer off and on to reset the
printer.
Note: It might take five to six minutes for the printer
to complete the calibration.
CANCELING JOB
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is canceling the current print job.
Action:
No action is required. If the printer does not return
to Ready, turn the printer off and on to reset the
printer.
CHECK CONTROL
PANEL SETTINGS
Event log message: None
Description:
Indicates that the page might not be printing
because the control panel setting for media type
and/or size does not match the media in the tray.
Action:
See page 104 for information about configuring
media type and size for each input tray.
CHECK TRAY 1
PAPER GUIDES
Event log message: None
Description:
The width of the guides does not match the size of
the media selected for the print job.
Action:
Adjust the media width guides to the edge of the
page. Ensure the media size selected for the print
job is the same as the size of media loaded in
tray 1.
388 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: 54.00.0<x>
Description:
The process marks in the density sensing pattern
are corrupted (see chapter 5 for more information).
Action:
<x> = Description:
5 = Sensor abnormality
6 = Out of range cyan
7 = Out of range magenta
8 = Out of range yellow
9 = Out of range black
1
Press GO.
2
Print a configuration page and troubleshoot as
an image-quality problem.
3
Check the transfer guide for cracks and
replace the transfer guide as needed.
CLEAR DUPLEX JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
Event log message: 13.00.0<x>
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the duplexer.
Action:
EN
<x> = Description:
7 = Two-sided turnaround paper late jam
8 = Two-sided turnaround paper stopped jam
9 = Two-sided path paper late jam
1
Open the left lower cover, remove the duplexer,
remove the jammed media, reinstall the
duplexer, and close the left lower cover.
2
The fusing assembly and diverter assemblies
can also cause duplex printing problems.
Verify their operation.
3
Open the left lower cover and defeat the
delivery cover interlock. Toggle the sensors at
the paper exit and entrance. While running the
sensor monitor test from the Service Mode
Menu, verify sensors that 8 and 9 on the
printer control panel indicate 1 (on) when
toggled.
Note: This procedure will not work if the left
lower cover interlock is not defeated.
4
Replace the duplexer.
Printer message troubleshooting 389
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEAR FUSER JAM
LOWER LEFT DOOR
Event log message: 13.00.0<x>
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the fuser area.
The printer expected a page to come through the
fuser, but the paper has not toggled PS1903, or
PS1903 has been toggled an extended amount of
time.
Action:
<x> = Description:
3 = Fusing delivery paper delay jam
4 = Fusing delivery stationary jam
WARNING! Do not touch the fuser; it could be very
hot and could cause burns.
1
If media jam frequently in the fuser area when
duplexing 11-by-17 media or A3-sized media, the
duplexer feed roller might have become slick.
Open the left lower cover, remove the jammed
media, and close the left lower cover.
2
On the left side of the fuser, check the fuser
exit flag and the reflective absorptive sticker
that the sensor (PS1903) uses.
See the section about paper path tests under “Aids
to Troubleshooting.”
3
Perform the sensor monitor test in the Service
Mode Menu. Toggle PS1903 and check to
make sure that sensor 2 on the printer control
panel indicates 1 (on) when toggled.
See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of
paper jam detection details.
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM
Description:
There is a jam in the 2,000-sheet input tray.
Event log message: 13.11.1<x>
<x> Description:
1 = Time-out at paper entry sensor (PS31)
B = Time-out at paper exit sensor (PS32
Action:
Review “Media requirements” in Chapter 1 of this
manual.
1
Open the VTU and remove any media.
2
Verify that the paper entry sensor (PS31)
moves freely.
3
Verify that the feed, separation, and pickup
rollers are properly seated.
4
If the problem persists, open the VTU and
override the VTU closed sensor (PS35).
Perform a paper path test feeding from the
2,000-sheet input unit, and verify that the feed
rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do
not rotate, verify the connections at the pickup
assembly and the controller PCA in the 2,000sheet input unit.
5
If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not
advance the paper, replace the feed and
separation rollers using the maintenance kit.
6
If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down,
replace the pickup assembly.
7
If the problem persists, replace the VTU, which
includes PS31.
Check the control panel settings for media type.
See the section about paper path tests under
“Aids to Troubleshooting.”
390 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEAR INPUT
DEVICE JAM (continued)
Event log message: 13.11.2<x>
<x> Description:
1 = Page stays too long at paper entry sensor
(PS31)
B = Page stays too long at paper exit sensor (PS32)
Action:
1
Open the VTU and remove any media.
2
Verify that the paper entry sensor (PS31)
moves freely.
3
Verify that the feed, separation, and pickup
rollers are properly seated.
4
If the problem persists, open the VTU and
override the VTU closed sensor (PS35).
Perform a paper path test feeding from the
2,000-sheet input unit, and verify that the feed
rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do
not rotate, verify the connections at the pickup
assembly and the controller PCA in the 2,000sheet input unit.
5
If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not
advance the paper, replace the feed and
separation rollers using the maintenance kit.
6
If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down,
replace the pickup assembly.
7
If the problem persists, replace the VTU, which
includes PS31.
Event log message: 13.11.3<x>
<x> Description:
1 = At power on, paper entry sensor (PS31) in VTU
is active
B = At power on, paper exit sensor (PS32) in VTU is
active
Action:
EN
1
Open the VTU and remove any media.
2
Verify that PS31 and PS32 in the VTU move
freely.
3
If either PS31 or PS32 are damaged, replace
the VTU.
Printer message troubleshooting 391
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEAR INPUT JAM
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the transfer or
registration area, in an input tray, or in the duplexer.
Action:
1
Open the front door, press the white button on
the lower (green) lever, and swing the lever to
the right. Open the right upper door, remove
the transfer drum, and remove the jammed
media from under the metal paper guide.
Reinstall the transfer drum, and close the right
upper door. Swing the lower (green) lever to
the left, and close the front door.
2
Open each input tray, remove any jammed
media, and close the input tray.
3
Open the left lower cover, remove the duplexer,
remove the jammed media, reinstall the
duplexer, and close the left lower cover.
4
Check the entire paper path.
CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM
Event log message: 13.22.01, 13.22.02
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the multi-bin
mailbox.
1
Open the jam access door and remove any
media.
2
Verify that the left (face-up) output bin full
sensor (PSFaceFull) flag moves freely.
3
Verify that the flipper shaft is in place.
4
Replace the flipper assembly.
5
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
Action:
Event log message: 13.22.03
Action:
392 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Check for a jam at the double-belt system and
delivery head assembly.
2
Ensure free movement of the double belt (both
belts).
3
Ensure parallel position of the double belt
system.
4
Verify that the metallic tape is in place and in
good condition.
5
Replace the transport belt motor (M5).
6
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
7
Replace the delivery head assembly.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
(CLEAR
MAILBOX JAM, continued)
Event log message: 13.22.04
Action:
1
Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly.
2
Ensure free movement in (PSExit1) sensor
flags on the delivery head assembly.
3
Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over
the ejector rollers on the delivery head
assembly.
4
Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to
the delivery head assembly to the controller
board PCA.
5
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
6
Replace the delivery head assembly.
Event log message: 13.22.05
Action:
CLEAR OUTPUT JAM
UPPER LEFT DOOR
1
Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly.
2
Ensure free movement in (PSExit2) sensor
flags on the delivery head assembly.
3
Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over
the ejector rollers on the delivery head
assembly.
4
Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to
the delivery head assembly to the controller
board PCA.
5
Replace the multi-bin mailbox controller board
PCA.
6
Replace the delivery head assembly.
Event log message: 13.00.0<x>
<x> = Description:
5 = Delivery paper delay jam
6 = Delivery stationary jam
Action:
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the top (face1
Open the left upper door, remove the jammed
down) output bin. This message might be caused by
media, and close the left upper door.
the paper not reaching PS11 or by paper toggling
2
Verify that PS30, PS10, PS11, and PS3
PS11 for an extended period of time.
sensors and the surrounding area are clean.
See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of
paper jam detection details.
EN
3
Perform sensor monitor test in the Service
Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors
are functioning properly or to locate the jam.
Printer message troubleshooting 393
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEAR PAPER JAM
Event log message: 13.00.00
Description:
The printer senses a media jam. Because this is a
generic media jam message, the media might be at
any point in the paper path.
Action:
1
Open and shut the front door of the printer to
clear any media from the printer. Be sure to
check the fuser area because media can get
wrapped around the fuser and be difficult to
find.
2
Check all areas of the printer for jammed
media because the printer is unable to
determine the location of the media jam.
3
Perform sensor monitor test in the Service
Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors
are functioning properly or to locate the paper
jam.
CLEAR TRANSFER
JAM
Event log message: 13.00.10
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in the transfer drum
area when media has not reached PS5. In some
cases the media might wrap around the transfer
drum and become lodged near the imaging drum.
Action:
Open the right upper door and the front door.
Remove the transfer drum. Rotate the green lever at
the front of the printer while removing the jammed
media. Reinstall the transfer drum and close the
front door and the right upper door.
See table 44 on page 436 for an explanation of
paper jam detection sensors.
CLEAR TRAY 4 JAM
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in tray 4.
Action:
Open tray 4 and the VTU, remove the jammed
media, and close both.
CLEAR UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE JAM
THEN LOAD TRAY 1
<type> <size>
Event log message: 13.00.11
Description:
The printer senses a media jam in tray 1, or the
media fed are longer than what was expected.
Action:
1
<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or 2
application
<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or
application
Open the right upper door and remove the
jammed media.
Load the media type and size indicated on the
printer control panel.
The <type> and <size> can be the default media
type and size if an automatic paper override has
occurred or if GO was pressed during a mount
request.
394 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
CLEARING PAPER
FROM PRINTER
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is attempting to remove unusable media
(such as a misfed page or media damaged in a
media jam).
Action:
No action is required.
CLOSE
<location> DOOR
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer senses that one of the doors is not
closed properly.
Action:
<location> = A printer door
1
Close the door indicated in the message.
2
Check the function of the door interlocks (see
page 425 for interlock locations).
COLD RESET
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has recognized the key sequence for
performing a cold reset. The printer will reset to the
factory default settings.
Action:
No action is required. For more information about
factory default settings, see the menu maps
beginning on page 82.
Note: Before performing a cold reset, print a
configuration page as a reference for resetting the
printer settings. See page 415 for information about
printing a configuration page.
See page 431 for more information about
performing a cold reset.
CONFIG LANGUAGE
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has recognized the key sequence for
selecting the display language.
Action:
Wait for the display language options to appear and
select the appropriate language. For more
information about selecting the display language,
see page 97.
CONTINUOUS TEST
PRESS CANCEL JOB
Event log message: None
Description:
A continuous configuration page is printing.
Action:
Press CANCEL JOB to exit the configuration page
printout mode. If the printer is in the process of
printing when CANCEL JOB is pressed, the printer
finishes printing the buffered pages before returning
online.
DATA RECIEVED
PRESS GO KEY
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has received and processed data. The
printer is waiting for a formfeed.
Action:
Press GO.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 395
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
DISK
DEVICE FAILURE
Event log message: 30.00.01
Description:
The printer hard disk’s internal self-test routine has
been invoked to read minimum and maximum
logical block addresses (with no retries) and has
detected a failure. If access to the printer hard disk
is not required, printer operation can continue.
Action:
Replace the printer hard disk.
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has received an illogical PJL command
(such as download to nonexistent directory).
Action:
No action is required.
DISK IS FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer hard disk is full.
Action:
1
From the host computer, delete data from the
printer hard disk using the printer drivers or a
disk management application.
2
To clear all data from the printer hard disk,
reformat the printer hard disk from the printer
control panel. To reformat the printer hard disk:
a
Press MENU until CONFIGURATION
MENU appears on the display.
b
Press ITEM until INITIALIZE DISK
appears on the display.
c
Press SELECT to reformat the printer hard
disk.
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
Event log message: None
Description:
A user has attempted to save to the printer hard
disk while the printer hard disk is write-protected.
Action:
See the system administrator for access to the
printer hard disk.
DRUM ERROR
REPLACE DRUM KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected an error in the imaging
drum memory device. Printing can continue but will
be stopped as soon as the waste toner signal is
triggered. Printing behavior is determined by the
TONER LOW control panel setting.
Action:
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Reconnect connector J209, and relay
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller
board.
3
Replace the drum kit.
See table 20 on page 88 for information about the
TONER LOW setting.
396 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
DRUM LIFE LOW
ORDER DRUM KIT
or
DRUM LIFE LOW
<20% REMAINING
Event log message: None
Description:
The imaging drum is almost past its specified life.
Printing can continue; however, print quality might
be degraded.
Action:
Printing can continue until DRUM LIFE OUT
message appears.
DRUM LIFE OUT
REPLACE DRUM KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The imaging drum is past its specified life or the
waste toner cartridge in the imaging drum is full.
Printing cannot continue until the drum kit has been
replaced.
Action:
1
Replace the drum kit.
2
Remove the drum cartridge from the printer,
and clean the waste toner sensor window with
a dry cloth.
3
Reconnect connector J221 on the controller
board, and connectors J631 to J633 and relay
connector J71 on the waste toner sensor.
4
Reconnect connector J209, and relay
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller
board.
5
Replace the drum cartridge.
6
Replace the waste toner sensor.
DUPLEX ERROR
CHECK DUPLEXER
Event log message: 54.00.03
Description:
The printer has detected an error in the duplexer.
Action:
1
Open the left lower cover, press the green tab
on the right side of the duplexer, and pull the
duplexer out of the printer. Check for and
remove any jammed media from the duplexer.
Reinstall the duplexer.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Replace the duplexer.
EIO <n>
INITIALIZING
Event log message: 40.00.01
Description:
An EIO accessory is initializing.
Action:
No action is required.
<n> = EIO slot number:
1 = Bottom EIO slot
2 = Top EIO slot
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 397
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
EIO <n>
NOT FUNCTIONAL
Event log message: 8<n>.<xxx>
Description:
Indicates an EIO card error, but printing can
continue. The configuration page will indicate that
EIO <n> is not supported.
Action:
<xxx> = Failure code
1
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
2
Replace the offending EIO accessory.
<n> = EIO slot number:
1 = Bottom EIO slot
2 = Top EIO slot
ENGINE TEST
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is running an internal test to verify
operation. When the printer is finished, the printer
returns to the ready state but remains offline.
Action:
Press GO to bring the printer online.
FACE UP
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The top output bin on the multi-bin mailbox is full.
Action:
1
Remove all media from the top output bin in
the multi-bin mailbox to continue printing.
2
Check the functionality of the Bin Full flag.
FUSER LIFE LOW
REPLACE KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The fuser and paper rollers are almost past their
specified life. The fuser kit has approximately 1,000
pages until the end-of-life warning appears.
Action:
Although printing can continue, the fuser kit should
be replaced for optimum printer operation.
Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by
pressing SELECT before attempting to print (or use
the RESETS menu on the printer control panel).
FUSER LIFE OUT
REPLACE KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The fuser and paper rollers are past their specified
life.
Action:
Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by
pressing SELECT before attempting to print (or use
the RESETS menu on the printer control panel).
If TONER LOW is set to CONTINUE in the
Configuration Menu, printing can continue with
degraded print quality. Otherwise printing will be
halted.
398 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
See table 20 on page 88 for information about the
TONER LOW setting.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
INCORRECT FUSER
LOWER LEFT DOOR
Event log message: 50.00.05
Description:
The printer has detected that an incompatible fuser
(possibly the wrong voltage of fuser for the printer)
has been installed.
Action:
1
Remove the fuser and install the fuser
specified for use with this printer. Printing
cannot continue until the correct fuser is
installed in the printer. For information about
ordering a fuser kit, see page 511.
2
Reconnect connector J222 on the controller
board and connector J26 on the fuser.
3
Replace the controller board.
INPUT DEVICE
PAPER PATH OPEN
Event log message: None
Description:
The VTU on the 2,000-sheet input unit is open.
Action:
Close the VTU.
INSTALL <color>
Event log message: None
Description:
The toner cartridge is not installed, not correctly
installed in the printer, or not being detected by the
cartridge sensor.
Action:
1
Note: The color toner carousel will not rotate
unless the following conditions are met:
<Color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black
Caution: Use the blue button to rotate the carousel
to prevent damage to the printer.
EN
Insert the cartridge or make sure the installed
cartridge is correctly seated in the printer.
•
The blue toner lever is locked.
•
The clear door is closed.
•
The imaging drum is installed.
•
The black toner cartridge is installed
completely, including removing the orange
seal from the black toner cartridge and
swinging the upper (blue) lever to the left.
•
The right upper door is closed.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
If the cartridge is installed correctly, check that
the sensor PS1901C is functioning properly.
4
Clean the sensor with a toner wipe.
5
Reconnect connector J221 on the controller
board, and connector J621 and relay
connector J70 on the remaining color toner
sensor.
Printer message troubleshooting 399
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
(INSTALL <color>, continued)
6
Make sure that the black toner cartridge is
installed.
•
Install the black toner cartridge if it is not
installed.
•
If the black toner cartridge is already
installed, turn the printer off, reinstall the
black toner cartridge, and turn the printer
on again.
7
Reconnect connectors J641 and J644 on the
main relay PCA, and connector J102 on the
power supply.
8
Reconnect connector J227 on the controller
board, and connector J647 on the main relay
PCA.
9
Check electrical continuity between connector
J644-1 (PBK) and J644-2 (PMP) when the
door switch (SW644) is turned on. If there is no
electrical continuity, replace the black toner
cartridge on/off switch.
10
Check the upper (blue) lever (black toner
cartridge lever) on the printer. Move the lever
to the left. Replace the lever if it is cracked.
11
Replace the black toner cartridge if it is
deformed or damaged.
12
Replace the remaining color toner sensor.
13
Replace the controller board.
INSTALL FUSER
LOWER LEFT DOOR
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected that the fuser is not
installed.
Action:
400 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Install the fuser and verify that it is working
correctly.
2
Reconnect connector J26 on the fuser.
3
Reconnect connector J222 on the controller
board.
4
Replace the controller board.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
INSTALL IMAGING
DRUM
OPEN FRONT DOOR
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected that the imaging drum is
not installed.
Action:
1
Note: All doors must be closed for the printer to
detect the imaging drum.
EN
Install the imaging drum before attempting to
print. If the condition persists, take the imaging
drum out and reinstall it.
Note: The imaging drum must be installed and
the upper lever must be to the left in order for
the carousel to rotate.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
3
Replace the drum cartridge.
4
Replace the drum cartridge if the drum
cartridge on/off switch guide is deformed.
5
Make sure that the drum cartridge is installed.
•
Install the drum cartridge if it is not
installed.
•
If the drum cartridge is already installed,
turn the printer off, reinstall the drum
cartridge, and turn the printer on again.
6
Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647
on the main relay PCA, connectors J671 and
J673 on the subrelay PCA, connector J102 on
the power supply, and connector J227 on the
controller board.
7
Check electrical continuity between connector
J641-1 (+24 VB) and J642-3 (PMP) on the
main relay PCA when the door switch (SW641)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the right cover switch on the main relay
PCA.
8
Check electrical continuity between connector
J671-2 (PMP) and J671-2 (PFUPR) on the
subrelay PCA when the door switch (SW671)
is turned on. If there is no electrical continuity,
replace the delivery cover/front cover switches
on the subrelay PCA.
9
Measure the voltage across connector J641-1
(+24 VB) and J641-A1 (GND) on the main
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the power supply.
10
Measure the voltage across connector J647B11 (+24UH) and J647-4 (GND) on the main
relay PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not 24 V, replace the main relay
PCA.
Printer message troubleshooting 401
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
(INSTALL IMAGING
DRUM
OPEN FRONT DOOR, continued)
11
Check the drum cartridge on/off switch lever
on the printer. Set the lever at the correct
position if it is disconnected. Replace the lever
if it is cracked.
12
Reconnect connector J209, and relay
connectors J47 and J48 on the controller
board.
13
Replace the controller board.
INSTALL
TRANSFER DRUM
OPEN RIGHT DOOR
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected that the transfer drum is
not installed.
Action:
1
Install the transfer drum before attempting to
print.
Note: All doors must be closed for the printer to
detect the transfer drum. If the right upper cover
interlock is defeated, this error will occur unless the
density sensor is covered with paper.
2
Take the transfer drum out and reinstall it.
3
Make sure that the transfer drum is installed.
•
If the transfer drum is not already installed,
install the transfer drum.
•
If the transfer drum is already installed, turn
the printer off, verify the transfer drum is in
the correct position, and turn the printer on
again.
4
Reconnect connector J1101 on the density
sensor PCA, intermediate connectors J75 and
J46, and connector J206 on the controller
board.
5
Measure the voltage across connector J704-1
(+24 VAR) and GND on the density sensor
PCA after the printer is turned on. If the
voltage is not approximately 24 V, replace the
density sensor PCA.
6
Replace the controller board.
LANGUAGE = <xxxx>
Event log message: None
Description:
Displayed during start up. The printer has
recognized the key sequence for changing the
control panel language.
Action:
No action is required. For more information on
changing the printer control panel display language,
see page 97.
<xxxx> = Printer control panel display language
402 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
LEFT
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The left (face-up) output bin on the printer is full.
Action:
Remove all media from the left (face-up) output bin
of the printer to continue printing.
Note: This message appears only if the optional
multi-bin mailbox is installed.
LOCK TONER LEVER
Event log message: None
Description:
The blue lever inside the clear door is not locked.
Action:
1
Open the front door of the printer, open the
clear door, and swing the blue toner lock lever
on the carousel to the right.
2
Remove the toner cartridge, and then reinstall
it, making sure the cartridge is all the way in
the printer.
3
Swing the blue toner lock lever on the carousel
to the left until it clicks, and then close the clear
and front doors.
MAILBOX
COMM ERROR
CHECK CABLES
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: None
Description:
Communication with the multi-bin mailbox has been
lost.
Action:
1
Verify all cables are connected correctly.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
MAILBOX <x>
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
A mailbox in the multi-bin mailbox is full.
Action:
Remove all media from the multi-bin mailbox to
continue printing.
<x> = Mailbox 1 through 8
MAILBOX NOT
ATTACHED
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
The multi-bin mailbox is not correctly attached to the Push the multi-bin mailbox up against printer.
printer. The printer will print to the top (face-down)
output bin when in this state.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 403
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
MANUALLY FEED
<type> <size>
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is requesting that a sheet of media or an
envelope be manually fed.
Action:
Load the requested media type and size into tray 1.
If the proper media is already loaded into tray 1,
press GO to initiate printing.
<type> = Media type specified in the printer driver or
application
<size> = Media size specified in the printer driver or
application
MEMORY SHORTAGE
PAGE SIMPLIFIED
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
The printer is compressing the print job so that all of
1
If possible, simplify the print job by lowering the
the job will fit into the available printer memory. The
resolution of graphics.
print job’s appearance might be altered by the
2
Install more printer memory. For more
compression of the data.
information about printer memory options, see
page 511.
NO JOB
TO CANCEL
Event log message: None
Description:
CANCEL JOB was pressed and there is no job to
cancel.
Action:
No action is required.
NO JOBS
PENDING
Event log message: None
Description:
While in the Proof and Print Menu, ITEM was
pressed and there are no pending proof and print
jobs.
Action:
No action is required.
OFFLINE
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is offline.
Action:
Press GO to bring the printer online.
404 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
OUT OF MEMORY
JOB CLEARED
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer personality for the current job could not
be run in the available memory. The job was
canceled, and no pages were printed.
Action:
1
Reprint the job. If the message still appears,
turn the printer off and on to reset the printer
before sending the print job again.
2
Install more printer memory. For more
information about printer memory options, see
page 511.
PCL MEMORY FULL
STORED DATA LOST
Event log message: None
Description:
The resource save area for the printer personality is
full. Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might
have been deleted.
Action:
Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM.
PJL OPERATIONS
FAILED
Event log message: None
Description:
The requested PJL operation could not be
completed because the option is unavailable or the
PJL data was corrupt.
Action:
No action is required.
PLEASE WAIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is in the process of going offline or into
the menus.
Action:
No action is required.
POWERSAVE ON
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
The printer is in Power Save mode. Power Save
Clear this message by pressing any key.
settings can be changed on the printer control panel
through the Configuration Menu (see page 88).
Note: This message will also be cleared if a print
job is sent to the printer or if an error condition is
detected by the printer.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 405
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
PRESS SELECT IF
FUSER IS NEW
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected that a new fuser might
have been installed.
Action:
Note: This message will also occur if the printer is
turned off and on and the internal fuser count
indicates the fuser is near the end of its life, or the
fuser door is opened. The message displays for 10
seconds.
1
If the fuser has been replaced, press SELECT
to reset the internal counter. If the message
clears before pressing SELECT, the value can
be reset in the RESETS menu.
2
If the fuser has not been replaced, press GO.
PRESS SELECT IF
TRANSFER IS NEW
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer has detected that a new transfer drum
might have been installed.
Action:
Note: This message will also occur if the printer is
turned off and on and the internal transfer count
indicates the transfer drum is near the end of its life,
or the transfer door is opened. The message
displays for 10 seconds.
1
If the transfer drum has been replaced, press
SELECT to reset the internal counter. If the
message clears before pressing SELECT, the
value can be reset in the RESETS menu.
2
If the transfer drum has not been replaced,
press GO.
PRESS SELECT TO
INITIALIZE DISK
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer hard disk is new or has been formatted
for another file system.
Action:
406 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Press SELECT to reformat the printer hard disk.
All data currently on the printer hard disk will
be lost.
2
If you don’t want to initialize the printer hard
disk, wait until the message clears (10
seconds) or press GO, and the disk will not be
initialized. This will render the disk nonfunctional, but the configuration page will show
that the disk is installed.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
PRESS SELECT TO
LOSE DISK DATA
PRESS GO KEY
TO CANCEL
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
This is a request to confirm initialization of the
1
If you want to proceed with initialization, press
printer hard disk (see PRESS SELECT TO
SELECT.
INITIALIZE DISK above). Initialization will perform a
2
If you don’t want to initialize the printer hard
high-level check of the disk and register the disk
disk, wait until the message clears (10
with the disk manager software.
seconds) or press GO and the disk will not be
initialized. This will render the disk nonfunctional, but the configuration page will show
that the disk is installed.
PRINTER LANGUAGE
NOT AVAILABLE
JOB CANCELED
Event log message: None
Description:
PJL encountered a request for a printer personality
that does not exist in the printer. The job was
canceled and no pages were printed.
Action:
No action is required.
PRINTING
CONFIGURATION
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is printing the configuration page. When
the configuration page is printed, the printer returns
to an online and ready state.
Action:
No action is required.
PRINTING
DEMONSTRATION
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is printing a demonstration page. When
the demonstration page is printed, the printer
returns to an online and ready state.
Action:
No action is required.
PRINTING
EVENT LOG
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is printing the event log. When the event
log is printed, the printer returns to an online and
ready state.
Action:
No action is required.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 407
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
PRINTING
FILE DIRECTORY
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is printing the disk directory. When the
file directory is printed, the printer returns to an
online and ready state.
Action:
No action is required.
PRINTING
FONT LIST
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is printing the font list. When the font list
is printed, the printer returns to an online and ready
state.
Action:
No action is required.
PRINTING
MENU MAP
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
The printer is printing the menu map. When the
No action is required.
menu map is printed, the printer returns to an online
and ready state.
PROCESSING
COPY <x> OF <y>
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is processing a proof-and-print or
mopy-print job.
Action:
No action is required.
<x> = Number of the copy in process
<y> = Total number of copies
PROCESSING JOB
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is actively processing a print job.
Action:
No action is required.
PROCESSING JOB
FROM TRAY <x>
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is actively processing a print job.
Action:
No action is required.
<x> = Input tray (1, 2, 3, or 4).
408 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
PS MEMORY FULL
STORED DATA LOST
Event log message: None
Description:
The resource save area for the printer personality is
full. Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might
have been deleted.
Action:
Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM.
READY
Event log message: None
Description:
Action:
The printer is online and ready for data. No status or No action is required.
printer attention messages are pending.
RESETTING
ACTIVE IO
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is resetting active I/O ports.
Action:
No action is required.
RESETTING
ALL IO
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is resetting all I/O ports.
Action:
No action is required.
RESTORING
FACTORY SETTINGS
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is resetting the printer’s factory defaults.
The printer is in the process of completing a cold
reset. When the reset is completed, the printer
returns to the ready state but remains offline.
Action:
Reset the EIO type and configure the printer before
bringing the printer online. For more information on
factory defaults and configuring the printer control
panel, see page 82.
SEPARATOR
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The multi-bin mailbox output bins are full.
Action:
Remove all media from the output bins on the multibin mailbox to continue printing.
STACKER
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The multi-bin mailbox output bins are full.
Action:
Remove all media from the output bins on the multibin mailbox to continue printing.
EN
Printer message troubleshooting 409
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
TONER LOW
REPLACE <color>
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is almost out of the specified toner. The
printer remains online and ready to print; however,
the print quality might be degraded.
Action:
Although printing can continue, the toner cartridge
should be replaced for optimum printer operation.
<color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black
Note: Do not shake the toner cartridge in attempts
to extend the cartridge life.
For more information about configuring the printer
response to this message, see the description of
the TONER LOW setting on page 88.
TONER OUT
REPLACE <color>
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer is out of the specified toner and cannot
continue.
Action:
1
Replace the toner cartridge specified.
2
Reconnect connector J226 on the controller
board and connector J5001 on high-voltage
converter 1 PCA.
3
Check the contact for remaining toner
detection on the black toner cartridge and the
contact for remaining toner detection on the
printer for deformation or damage.
<color> = Cyan, magenta, yellow, or black
•
Replace defective parts. (Replace the
black toner cartridge if it is defective.)
•
Check the contacts. If they are
disconnected, return them to their correct
positions.
4
Replace the high-voltage converter 1 PCA.
5
Replace the controller board.
TOO MANY FILE
STORAGE DEVICES
REMOVE EITHER
DISK
Event log message: None
Description:
The printer can support only one physical printer
hard disk and two have been detected. Printing will
not be possible until one of the hard disks has been
removed.
Action:
Turn the printer off and remove the extra printer
hard disk.
410 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Note: The DN model comes with a factory-installed
internal hard disk on the formatter board.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
TOP
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Event log message: None
Description:
The top (face-down) output bin of the printer is full.
Action:
1
Remove all media from the top (face-down)
output bin on the printer to continue printing.
2
Verify that PS30, PS10, PS11, and PS3
sensors and the surrounding area are clean.
TRANSFER KIT LOW
REPLACE KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The transfer drum, transfer belt, cleaning roller, and
charcoal filter are almost past their specified life.
The transfer kit has approximately 750 color or
1,000 black-and-white images remaining until the
printer will signal the end of the kit life.
Action:
Although printing can continue, the transfer kit
should be replaced for optimum printer operation.
Replace the transfer kit and reset the transfer
counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to
print (or use the RESETS menu on the printer
control panel).
TRANSFER KIT OUT
REPLACE KIT
Event log message: None
Description:
The transfer drum, transfer belt, cleaning roller, and
charcoal filter are past their specified life. If TONER
LOW is set to continue, printing can continue with
degraded print quality; otherwise printing will be
halted.
Action:
Replace the transfer kit and reset the transfer
counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to
print (or use the RESETS menu on the printer
control panel).
For more information about configuring the printer
response to this message, see the description of
the TONER LOW setting on page 88.
TRAY 1 CONTAINS
UNKNOWN MEDIA
Event log message: None
Description:
Media was stacked in tray 1 for continuous manual
feed printing, and the job has been completed.
However, media remains in the input tray. The
printer considers the input tray not to be configured.
Action:
Configure the media type for tray 1 or remove the
remaining media.
EN
For more information about configuring the media
type, see page 104.
Printer message troubleshooting 411
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
TRAY 1 LOAD
<type> <size>
Event log message: None
Description:
A user has requested a media size that is not
currently installed in tray 1.
Action:
Load the media type and size specified on the
printer control panel display. After tray 1 is loaded,
the printer automatically brings itself online.
<type> = Last media type configured for the input
tray
<size> = Last media size configured for the input
tray
If the correct media type and size are loaded in tray
1 and the media does not feed into the printer, verify
that the printer control panel settings for tray 1
(Cassette mode) match the media type and size
requested.
TRAY 1 SIZE = <size>
Event log message: None
Description:
This message is shown when media is placed in
tray 1 and the tray is configured for Cassette Mode.
Action:
<size> = Last media size configured for the input
tray
1
Press – VALUE + to view the choices.
2
Press SELECT when the choice you want is
shown.
3
Press GO to bring the printer online.
If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media
is detected in the input tray, the displayed size is
automatically selected, the message is cleared, and
printing begins.
TRAY 4
COMM ERROR
CHECK CABLES
CYCLE POWER
Event log message: None
Description:
Communication with the 2,000-sheet input unit has
been lost.
Action:
412 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
1
Verify all cables are connected correctly.
2
Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer.
EN
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
TRAY <x> EMPTY
<type> <size>
Event log message: None
Description:
An input tray not currently selected has run out of
media.
Action:
1
Load the media type and size specified on the
printer control panel display.
<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4)
<type> = Last media type configured for the input
tray
<size> = Last media size configured for the input
tray
2
Replace the upper/lower cassette lifter
(remaining paper sensor lever) if it is damaged
or deformed. Also, if the lifter is out of position,
set it in its correct position.
3
Reconnect connector J1201 on the pick-up
PCA and connector J210 on the controller
board.
4
Replace the tray 2 and tray 3 remaining paper
sensors 1 and 2.
5
Replace the pick-up PCA.
6
Replace the controller board.
TRAY <x> LIFTING
Event log message: None
Description:
The specified input tray is lifting the media into
position for printing.
Action:
No action is required.
<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4)
TRAY <x> LOAD
<type> <size>
CHECK CONTROL
PANEL SETTING
Event log message: None
Description:
A user has requested a media size and type
combination that is not currently installed or
configured in the printer. This message is also
generated when the current input tray runs out of
media and no other auto-selectable input trays
contain that size and type of media.
Action:
Load the media type and size specified on the
printer control panel display, and configure the
media type in the printer control panel. After the
requested input tray is loaded, the printer
automatically goes online.
<x> = Input tray number (1, 2, 3, or 4)
<type> = Last media type configured for the input
tray
<size> = Last media size configured for the input
tray
EN
Pressing GO causes the printer to attempt to print
the page on the default type and size media. If the
condition persists, check the input tray type and size
configuration in the control panel.
Printer message troubleshooting 413
Table 42. Unnumbered printer messages (continued)
TRAY <x>
NOT FUNCTIONAL
Event log message: None
Description:
The installed tray is not supported by the printer.
Action:
Press GO to continue printing.
<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4)
TRAY <x> OPEN
Event log message: None
Description:
An input tray is open.
Action:
Close the input tray before resuming printing.
<x> = Input tray number (2, 3, or 4)
TRAY <x> TYPE = <type>
Event log message: None
Description:
This message is shown when media is placed in an
input tray.
Action:
1
Press – VALUE + to view the choices.
2
<x> = Input tray number (1, 2, 3, or 4)
<type> = Last media type configured for the input
tray
Press SELECT when the choice you want is
shown.
3
Press GO to bring the printer online.
WARMING UP
Event log message: None
Description:
The fuser is warming up.
Action:
No action is required.
414 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media
is detected in the input tray, the type shown is
automatically selected, the message is cleared, and
printing begins.
EN
Aids to troubleshooting
This section describes various tools service personnel can use to
diagnose hardware problems.
In addition to the tools described in this section, the service and
support CD-ROM included with your service manual contains the
user documentation. Use the additional information to supplement the
information found in this manual.
Configuration page
Print a configuration page to verify that the printer is set up correctly
or to verify information about the printer’s configuration. The page
includes the following information:
serial number
formatter board number
page counts (use if the controller board is also being replaced)
transfer kit count for percentage of life remaining
fuser kit count for percentage of life remaining
engine settings for verifying that the registration settings are
accurate (the last two digits of the engine settings might vary from
those found on the sticker)
To print a configuration page
EN
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the page.
Aids to troubleshooting 415
Interpreting a configuration page
The numbers below correspond to the numbered areas on the
examples on the following page:
1
Printer information—lists the following information:
• printer product number
• serial number
• PCL firmware date code
• PostScript version
• total pages printed during the life of the printer
• number of color pages printed during the life of the printer
• number of black-and-white pages printed during the life of the
printer
• number of duplex pages printed during the life of the printer
2
Installed options—shows whether options have been installed,
such as the printer hard disk, DIMMs, duplexer, multi-bin mailbox,
and optional input trays.
3
Consumables: % of life remaining—shows the percentage of
the maximum rated life remaining for the transfer kit, fuser kit, and
drum kit. For HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer models (except for
the MFP model), estimates of the amount of toner remaining in
each of the four cartridges are also shown.
4
Memory—shows the total memory installed in the printer
(including the printer hard disk) and the settings that affect how
the memory is used.
5
Paper tray configuration—lists the types and sizes of media
configured for each input tray.
6
Security—shows whether the security features have been
activated, such as the printer control panel lock, printer control
panel password, and printer hard-disk lock. There is also a
service information code for service personnel.
7
Event log—lists the last three printer events, including media
jams, service errors, and other printer actions.
8
Color adjust—lists color adjustment halftone settings and the
number of pages since the last manual color adjustment.
9
Duplex registration (8550 models only)—lists the x- and y-axis
coordinates for duplex registration.
10 HP JetSend (8550 models only)—lists HP JetSend addresses.
416 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
1
3
6
4
2
5
7
8
Figure 212.
Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8500 printer configuration
page
1
3
6
4
2
5
9
7
8
10
Figure 213.
EN
Example of an HP Color LaserJet 8550 printer configuration
page
Aids to troubleshooting 417
Continuous configuration page
Continuous configuration pages can be printed to simulate full color
printing in which two pages are developed on the transfer drum per
rotation (two-page mode).
Printing a continuous configuration page
Note
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG PAGES appears
on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the page.
Press CANCEL JOB to stop printing. The printer will print all of the pages
in the buffer before stopping.
Demonstration page
Use this page to simulate printing a color image. If the image print
quality is in question, a demonstration page should be printed to
assure that the problem is not related to software, communications, or
file quality.
Printing a demonstration page
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer
control panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT LASERJET DEMONSTRATION appears
on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the page.
418 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Event log
Detailed service information is noted in the event log. The following is
a list of the types of messages logged in the event log:
media jam errors
disk failures
EIO errors
catastrophic errors
The last 50 errors are listed, with the most recent error first.
Reoccurring events give indications of failing parts or problem areas
within the printer. See the printer control panel message descriptions
beginning on page 368 for more information on items found in the
event log.
Printing the event log
EN
1
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the control
panel display.
2
Press ITEM until PRINT EVENT LOG appears on the display.
3
Press SELECT to print the page.
Aids to troubleshooting 419
Service mode engine diagnostics
Engine diagnostics can be used to perform mechanical tests on the
print engine and its related components to help pinpoint components
in the printer that need replacement or repair.
WARNING!
Take care when you use engine diagnostics — some tests require door
interlocks to be defeated, and defeating interlocks can expose potential
hazards in the engine. High-voltage supplies and the laser are shut
down whenever the printer is in diagnostic mode. However, any
defeating of interlocks without entering the engine diagnostic mode
results in potential exposure to the laser and high voltages.
Entering the Service Mode Menu
1
From a READY state, press MENU until SERVICE MENU
appears.
2
Press ITEM – (the left side of the key) and VALUE – simultaneously.
For a menu map of the Service Mode Menu, see page 93.
Paper path test
The paper path test simulates a page moving through the paper path
from input trays 1, 2, and 3 to the output bins. Removing some engine
parts (such as the transfer drum) prevents paper from feeding
completely. It is possible to select the input and output trays for the
test by indicating in the Paper Path Menu which input tray and output
bins should be accessed (by selecting ON or OFF). Multiple input
trays can be selected, but only a single output can be selected. A
page is fed from each input tray to the selected output. If a jam occurs
during the test, the test should continue with the next input tray in the
list.
CAUTION
Jam detection is OFF in this mode and an unattended test might result
in damage to the printer.
420 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
The pick-up rollers, feed rollers, registration roller, transfer belt press
clutch (CL4), cleaning roller press cam and solenoid (SL1), fuser,
transfer belt, and output feed roller can be exercised during the paper
path test. For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and
scanner are all turned off during testing.
Note
1
From the Service Mode Menu, press MENU until PAPER PATH
appears.
2
Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears.
3
Press – VALUE + to display the number of repetitions (1 to 10).
4
Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions.
5
Press ITEM until the desired input source appears.
6
Press – VALUE + until ON or OFF appears on the display.
7
Press SELECT.
You can select more than one input source for the test.
8
Press ITEM until OUTPUT= appears on the display.
9
Press – VALUE + until TOP OUTPUT BIN or LEFT OUTPUT BIN
appears on the display.
10 Press SELECT to choose an output destination.
11 Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display.
12 Press SELECT to perform the paper path test.
Notes
To stop the paper path test, press CANCEL JOB.
The transfer drum can be removed with the right upper door open and
the right cover interlock defeated (see figure 214 on page 425).
However, media might not feed past the transfer area unless 11-by-17
inch or A3-sized media is used.
EN
Aids to troubleshooting 421
Developer motor test
Visually and audibly inspect the cartridge motor (M3) and carousel
motor (M1) as they rotate during this test. To view the printer
components, run the test with the right upper door open and the
transfer drum removed and the front cover and right upper door
interlocks defeated (see figure 218 on page 427 and figure 214 on
page 425). The engine runs this test for a fixed duration and then
stops. Multiple repetitions of the test are allowed.
Notes
For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are
all turned off during testing.
The carousel cannot turn with the imaging drum removed because the
supply voltage to the carousel is cut off to avoid a pinch hazard.
1
From the Service Mode Menu, press MENU until DEVELOPER
MOTOR appears.
2
Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears.
3
Press – VALUE + to display the possible number of repetitions.
4
Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions.
5
Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display.
6
Press SELECT to perform the developer motor test.
422 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Drum motor test
This test activates the drum motor (M2), imaging drum, transfer drum,
and imaging drum waste paddle simultaneously. To view the printer
components, run the test with the right upper door open, the transfer
drum and imaging drum removed, and the right upper door interlock
defeated (see figure 214 on page 425). The engine runs this test for a
fixed duration and then stops.
Note
For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are
all turned off during testing.
1
From the Service Mode Menu, press MENU until DRUM MOTOR
appears.
2
Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears.
3
Press – VALUE + to display the possible number of repetitions.
4
Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions.
5
Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display.
6
Press SELECT to perform the drum motor test.
Sensor monitor test
This test allows service personnel to activate and deactivate sensors
in the printer to verify that the sensors are working properly.
Note
EN
For safety reasons, the fuser, high-voltage supplies, and scanner are
all turned off during testing.
1
From the Service Mode Menu, press MENU until SENSOR
MONITOR appears.
2
Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display.
3
Press SELECT to perform the sensor monitor test.
4
Determine whether each sensor is working by viewing the test
results for each sensor on the printer control panel. A single
character in the upper line of the display provides a label for each
sensor bit. A 0 (off) or 1(on) is displayed for each sensor bit,
indicating whether the sensor is activated or deactivated. See
table 43 for an explanation of the test results.
Aids to troubleshooting 423
Table 43. Sensor monitor test
Designator
Sensor name
0
Registration roller paper sensor (PS1)
1
Pick-up unit paper sensor (PS17)
2
Separation sensor (PS5)
3
Fusing delivery sensor (PS1903)
4
Top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor (PS11)
5
Tray 1 paper sensor (PS1301)
6
Tray 2 sensor (PS1202)
Toggles once. Trays do not lift during test.
7
Tray 3 sensor (PS1201)
Toggles once. Trays do not lift during test.
8
Duplex paper sensor (PS24)
Paper sensor in the duplexer in the output position
(HP Color LaserJet 8550 only)
9
Reverse sensor (PS26)
Paper sensor in the duplexer at the reversing position
(HP Color LaserJet 8550 only)
A
Bit 0 of temperature/humidity sensor
B
Bit 1 of temperature/humidity sensor
The ambient temperature and humidity sensor data are
combined into 2 bits showing 4 states of temperature and
humidity.
00 = Normal/normal
01 = High/high
10 = Normal/low
11 = Low/low
See figure 57 on page 184 for more information on these sensors.
Exiting the service mode
Exit the service mode by cycling through the menu until EXIT
SERVICE MODE is reached, and press SELECT. It is not necessary to
turn the printer off and on again unless you have accessed the
formatter diagnostics.
424 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Disabling interlocks
Figure 214.
Right upper cover detection interlock
Figure 215.
Drum cartridge detection interlock
EN
Aids to troubleshooting 425
Figure 216.
Black toner cartridge detection interlock
Figure 217.
Toner carousel door detection interlock
426 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Front cover
Left lower door
detection interlock
Delivery cover
Front cover
detection interlock
Left lower door
detection interlock
Front cover
detection interlock
Figure 218.
EN
Front cover/delivery cover detection interlocks
Aids to troubleshooting 427
Laser shutters
Laser shutter
interlocks
Figure 219.
Laser shutters
428 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 220.
Left upper cover detection
Figure 221.
Right lower cover detection
EN
Aids to troubleshooting 429
Service mode formatter diagnostics
1
From the Service Mode Menu, press MENU until FORMATTER
DIAGNOSTICS appears.
2
Press SELECT. WARNING MEMORY LOSS appears on the
printer control panel briefly. Then EXECUTE TESTS appears.
3
Press ITEM until one of the following tests appears on the printer
control panel:
• ROM CRC — The read-only memory cyclic redundancy check
reads the values stored in the firmware ROMs, computes
checksum variables based on the read information, and
compares the computed checksums with those stored in the
ROM.
• DRAM DIMMS — Installed DIMMs are tested to ensure that
they are supported by the formatter board and are functioning
properly. The time that this test takes to run varies depending
on the amount of memory installed. DRAM DIMMs are tested
using a pattern test, an address test, and a walking ones test.
• IDE ASIC — This test is performed on the IDE ASIC of the
formatter board to ensure read and write integrity. Values are
written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification.
• DISK — The disk drive test does the following:
a instructs the disk drive (if installed) to perform its internal
self-test (similar to a power-on test)
b enters into sleep mode and wakes up again
c seeks and reads sequential sectors forward for 30 seconds
d seeks and reads sequential sectors backward for 30
seconds
e seeks and reads random sectors for 30 seconds
f performs read and write tests
• VX ASIC — This test is performed on the VX ASIC of the
formatter board to ensure read and write integrity. Values are
written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification.
Note
4
Press – VALUE + until ON or OFF appears on the display.
5
Press SELECT.
6
Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the printer control
panel display.
7
Press SELECT.
Turn the printer off and on to exit the formatter diagnostics.
430 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Cold reset
The following are effects of performing a cold reset:
While a cold reset is being performed, all control panel keys are
ignored.
A cold reset changes all user-accessible printer variables stored
in NVRAM to their factory defaults except for the following items:
• page counts
• fuser life count
• transfer life count
• multi-bin mailbox mode
• display language
Color adjust values revert to the factory defaults.
None of the service mode variables such as the following are
affected by a cold reset:
User-accessible EIO values are reset to the factory defaults by a
cold reset.
• serial numbers
• model name
• model number
• registration values
• cold reset paper size
The event log is not cleared.
Performing a cold reset
1
Print a configuration page (see page 415) to record the previous
printer settings.
2
Turn the printer off.
3
Hold down GO while turning the printer on. Release GO after
COLD RESET appears on the printer control panel display.
COLD RESET (in English) appears on the display for one second
to verify that the key sequence has been recognized, followed by
the power-on self-test message.
Once the power-on self-test is finished, the message
RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS displays in English.
EN
Aids to troubleshooting 431
Fault log
The fault log is implemented within the formatter diagnostics to record
error messages. This log provides service personnel with an account
of all errors that occurred while the formatter diagnostics tests were
executing. This log is completely separate from the event log. No
entries are made in the event log for any diagnostic mode failure.
Error message logging
When a test in formatter diagnostics detects an error, the Attention
LED is lit and a message describing the error is added to the fault log.
The fault log holds a maximum of 50 entries. When the fault log is full
and a new message needs to be added, the oldest message is
discarded. The contents of the fault log are erased when the printer is
powered off or when the fault log is cleared.
Viewing the fault log
The fault log menu appears as an Item selection only when one or
more error messages exist in the log. The fault log menu is entered
automatically at the end of a test run if any error messages were
recorded. Enter the fault log by using ITEM to view the fault log entry.
Error message format
Each error message has the form:
mm.NAME_t<description>[<data>]
where:
mm
NAME
t
<description>
<data>
432 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Message number in the fault log, 1 being the
oldest message
Name of the test that found the failure
Error number within the test
Type of failure
Pertinent data related to the failure
EN
Paper path troubleshooting
General paper path checklist
Verify the green lever on the fuser is down.
Clean the printer. Toner and paper dust in the paper path inhibit
free movement of media through the printer and block the
sensors.
Vary the input and output selections of the printer to determine if
the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer.
Worn separation rollers on the input tray cause last-page multifeeds. Check the condition of the pick-up rollers and separation
rollers when troubleshooting multi-feeds. Bent separation tabs
cause misfeeds and multi-feeds. Replace the tray if necessary.
Defective input tray switches can cause media jams by indicating
the wrong size media to the formatter board.
Scraps of paper left in the paper path can cause intermittent
media jams. Always check that the paper path is clear when
cleaning the printer and when clearing media jams. Also, remove
the fuser and carefully check it for jammed media.
Reduce curl of black-only transparencies by:
Check that the post charger cleaner is pushed all the way to the
right. Media jams could occur when it is out of place.
• placing the transparencies in a presentation sleeve
• printing to the left (face-up) output bin
Verify that the media requirements are met (see page 29).
Wrinkled pages
EN
Verify the green fuser lever is down.
Verify the media meets the specifications listed in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide.
Verify the media size and type are set correctly in the printer
driver and the printer control panel.
Paper path troubleshooting 433
Sealed envelopes
To prevent envelopes from sealing in the printer, set the envelope size
in the printer driver as a custom size. However, setting envelopes as a
custom size can cause poor fusing.
Media jams
When troubleshooting media jams, remember that jams are posted as
a result of timing errors. That is, media fails to arrive at, or fails to
clear, the paper path sensor in the allotted time. The paper path
timing is set by the controller board. Stuck or defective sensors cause
the paper path timing to post a jam message at power on, as do
scraps of paper caught in the paper path.
Use figure 222 to locate the paper path sensors. The media jam
message code identifies the sensor that failed to change state in the
required time.
Note
Check that the paper path sensors are free throughout their full range
of travel. All interlock switches must be operational in order for the
printer to clear media jam messages.
434 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 222.
Printer paper path
For information about printer and paper handling accessory sensors,
see chapter 5.
EN
Paper path troubleshooting 435
Following are possible media jams:
Table 44. Media jam detection
Location of jam
Detected when . . .
Pick-up delay jam 1
The page has not reached the pick-up unit paper sensor
(PS17) within about:
1.2 seconds after leaving tray 2
Pick-up delay jam 2
The media does not reach the registration roller paper sensor
(PS1) within about:
1.9 seconds after leaving tray 2
Transfer jam
about 0.3 seconds (high-gloss mode)
12.8 seconds (overhead transparency mode)
9.6 seconds (high-gloss mode)
9.6 seconds (overhead transparency mode/letter-sized
media landscape)
7.2 seconds (high-gloss mode/letter-sized media
landscape)
4.2 seconds (normal mode/11-by-17 inch-sized media)
17.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode/11-by-17
inch-sized media)
12.7 seconds (high-gloss mode/11-by-17 inch-sized
media)
The fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) does not detect the
media for the specified time or longer within 0.2 to 1.2
seconds after PS1903 detects the leading edge of the media
within approximately:
0.8 seconds (normal mode)
436 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
about 0.4 seconds (overhead transparency mode)
The media has not passed through the fusing delivery sensor
(PS1903) after PS1903 detects the leading edge of the media
within approximately:
2.4 seconds (normal mode/letter-sized media landscape)
Fusing unit paper coil jam
1.8 seconds after leaving tray 1
The media has not reached the fusing delivery sensor
(PS1903) since the top of paper signal within about:
3.2 seconds (normal mode)
Fusing delivery stationary jam
2.0 seconds after leaving tray 3
The separation sensor (PS5) does not detect the media for the
specified time or longer within 1.5 to 2.2 seconds after the top
of paper signal:
about 0.1 seconds (normal mode)
Fusing delivery paper delay jam
1.3 seconds after leaving tray 3
3.2 seconds (overhead transparency mode)
2.4 seconds (high-gloss mode)
EN
Table 44. Media jam detection (continued)
Location of jam
Detected when . . .
Top (face-down) output bin delivery delay
media jam
The media has not reached the top (face-down) output bin
delivery sensor (PS11) within the specified time after the
fusing delivery sensor (PS1903) detects the media:
about 4.0 seconds (normal mode)
Top (face-down) tray delivery stationary
jam
about 16.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode)
about 12.0 seconds (high-gloss mode)
The media has not passed through the top (face-down) output
bin delivery sensor (PS11) after PS11 detects the media
within approximately:
2.4 seconds (normal mode/letter-sized media landscape)
9.6 seconds (overhead transparency mode/letter-sized
media landscape)
7.2 seconds (high-gloss mode/letter-sized media
landscape)
4.2 seconds (normal mode/11-by-17 inch-sized media)
17.0 seconds (overhead transparency mode/11-by-17
inch-sized media)
12.7 seconds (high-gloss mode/11-by-17 inch-sized
media)
Wrong media size feed jam
The controller board detects media size with the registration
roller paper sensor (PS1), and it stops the engine if the media
size differs more than 15 mm between the specified media
size and the actual media size. On the other hand, if the
difference is within +7.5 to 15 mm, or -3.7 mm or less, the
media is automatically delivered.
Door-open jam
The sensors listed below detect the media when a cover is
opened or closed:
registration paper roller sensor (PS1)
Initial residual jam
separation sensor (PS5)
top (face-down) output bin delivery sensor (PS11)
fusing delivery sensor (PS1903)
The sensors listed below detect the media the specified time
after the power switch is turned ON:
separation sensor (PS5)
EN
pick-up unit paper sensor (PS17)
fusing delivery sensor (PS1903)
Paper path troubleshooting 437
Image formation troubleshooting
Before beginning image formation troubleshooting:
1
Verify the media type is set correctly in the printer control panel,
and that the media type selected in the printer driver matches the
media being printed on.
2
Verify that the media meets the specifications listed in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. The
following media-related items are responsible for many imageformation and print-quality defects:
• rough paper
• heavy paper (heavier than 58 lb, or 216 g/m2 bond)
• transparencies thicker or thinner than the specified thickness
of 5 mil
• paper that has absorbed moisture from the atmosphere
• room environment (humidity too high or low)
3
Print a configuration page. The configuration page tests the ability
to print each primary and process color. For information about
printing a configuration page, see page 415.
In addition to items listed above, the configuration page does the
following:
• shows that all colors print
• checks that the room humidity is within specifications
• shows varying levels of color
• shows that the formatter board is working properly
4
Print a demonstration page to check the following:
• image quality
• half-tones
• process colors
438 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Understanding color variations
The printed output might not match the computer screen, and the
colors printed on successive pages might not match. While color
variations are inherent in this printing method, they also might
indicate changes in the printing environment, print media, or printer
components.
Common causes of color variation
The following list outlines the major causes of color variations
between computers, applications, and output devices.
EN
Half-tone patterns produced on monitors and the types of
patterns used in the print jobs are different and might cause
apparent differences between the printed output and the screen.
Different papers have different color, brightness, and gloss, which
will affect the color appearance.
Printed colors with identical CMYK or RGB values but with a
different halftone (ColorSmart, text, graphic, or image) might look
different when printed. Select the manual color option in the driver
and change the halftoning options to vary the shading and quality
of the colors.
The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because
the monitor and the print media have different reference values
for black and white. The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the
black level, and the white on the monitor screen is actually a light
blue. Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of
the printer, and most good-quality paper has a very high white
level. In addition, phosphor (used in color monitors) and toner
have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color
rendering capabilities. Blues generally match better than reds.
The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color.
Fluorescent light emphasizes different colors from incandescent
light, and the color range of natural light is broader than any
artificial light. When comparing color, choose a standard light
source for reference and understand that the perceived color will
change as the light changes.
Long-term color variations occur as the paper ages. Use highquality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize
discoloration.
Environmental changes can cause color variation. The
development process places a high potential across an air gap to
attract toner to the imaging drum. Changes in relative humidity
vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum. The
Image formation troubleshooting 439
printer has a humidity sensor that adjusts operating parameters
as the humidity changes to minimize the effects of environmental
changes.
All consumable components have a finite life span, and as these
components reach the end of their useful life, their ability to
produce consistent print quality diminishes.
When printing on transparencies, OHT must be selected in the
printer driver in order for the colors to be treated properly on the
transparencies.
Color selection process
The user selects the color in the application, but the operating system
might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before
sending the information to the printer driver. The printer driver might
also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output
mode.
Any color characteristics not addressed by the printer driver or
applications are set to the printer default. The default color might not
match the color the user selected.
Some applications (such as Adobe® PageMaker, Illustrator, and
PhotoshopTM) bypass the printer driver altogether. If color information
is not sent, the printer has no way of knowing the white point, black
point, and chromaticity assumptions used by the application. This
mismatch can cause color differences.
Matching screen colors
Matching input, on-screen, and output colors is a very sophisticated
process. The input device software and output device each influence
the ability to select and produce printed color output. To improve color
matching between the printed output and the monitor:
Turn off any color-matching feature in the software that does not
specifically mention ColorSync, ICM, or ICC.
Calibrate the monitor. One option for monitor calibration is the
Colorific software included on the color-productivity CD-ROM.
If a color management system is being used, make sure the input
(monitor) and output (composite) profiles are correct.
If a color-management system is available, try turning it off or on
to see if changing the setting changes the color match.
Compare monitor and output colors by placing the output in a
neutral surrounding 18 to 24 inches (46 to 61 cm) away from the
monitor. This will help the eye make the transition from the
monitor white point (blue) to the paper white point.
440 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Image defects troubleshooting
Image orientation
Unless otherwise specified, all references in this section to horizontal
or vertical directions of print-quality problems refer to problems found
on letter- and A4-sized media. These media sizes are fed into the
printer long edge first.
Because media sizes other than letter or A4 are fed into the printer
short edge first, the orientations of print quality problems differ from
those on letter- or A4-sized media. Print quality problems that appear
horizontally on a letter- or A4-sized page when it is held with the short
edge up run vertically on other media sizes when the page is held
with the short edge up. The same is true for a vertical defect on a
letter- or A4- sized page; it will appear as a horizontal defect on other
sizes of media.
Figure 223 on the following page shows a print quality problem
printed on both a letter- or A4-sized page and the same defect on an
11-by-17 inch or A3-sized page.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 441
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 223.
Note
Image orientation and direction of travel
1
Letter- or A4-sized media
2
11-by-17 inch or A3-sized media (or any other size of media)
3
Print quality problem (developer streak, in this example)
4
Direction media moves through the printer (process direction)
5
Direction streaks occurs on pages
6
Direction banding occurs on pages
PostScript print samples are located on the service and support CD
(which is included with your service manual). Print these files by
copying them to the parallel port (LPT 1), for example:
copy magnta.ps lpt1
Image defect examples
Figures 225 through 232 show examples of image defects.
Resolutions for these defects follow the illustrations.
442 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
é Leading edge é
Figure 224.
Color-plane registration
See page 452 for a resolution to this print defect.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 443
é
Developer streak
é Leading edge é
Figure 225.
Developer streak
See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect.
444 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
é Leading edge é
Figure 226.
Rain
See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 445
é Leading edge é
Figure 227.
Toner bubbles
See page 453 for a resolution to this print defect.
446 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
é Leading edge é
é 44 mm intervals
Figure 228.
é
44 mm intervals
é
Charge roller set
See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 447
é Leading edge é
Figure 229.
Waves
See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect.
448 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
é Leading edge é
Figure 230.
Missing toner
See page 454 for a resolution to this print defect.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 449
é Leading edge é
Figure 231.
Hot offset (glossy paper or transparency)
See page 455 for a resolution to this print defect.
450 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
é Leading edge é
Figure 232.
Fading resulting from broken transfer guide
See page 455 for a resolution to this print defect.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 451
Color-plane registration
(See figure 224 on page 443 for an example of this print defect.)
Poor color-plane registration is characterized by “bleeding” colors, by
apparent gaps in color, and by colors offset from each other or from
black. The examples on page 443 show all three types:
In the upper left, yellow is offset from colors that use yellow.
At the bottom, the double line is caused by black offset from
colors.
In the upper right, colors are offset from black, causing a
noticeable gap.
Use the troubleshooting list below to resolve poor color-plane
registration. If the problem still exists after you complete step 1, try
step 2. If step 2 fails to solve the problem, try step 3, and so on.
Note
1
Check manufacturing codes on toner cartridges if the problem
appears after replacing a color toner cartridge (see "Toner
cartridge manufacturing codes" on page 456).
2
Check the green handle (see figure 252 on page 524, reference
#6); the locking pins on the back of the handle can break or even
can be sheared off if, when the transfer drum is removed, the
green handle is not swung all the way to the right.
3
Check the transfer drum guide (see figure 260 on page 540,
reference #40) and replace it if it has developed cracks.
4
Check engine settings 1 and 2 in service mode and compare the
values to the numbers shown on the engine settings tag (see
figure 79 on page 228, callout 3). Correct the settings to match
the tag.
The last two digits of engine setting 2 might not match; this is normal.
5
Find out if the printer has operated recently in extreme
temperature conditions.
6
Replace the transfer drum.
452 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Developer streak
(See figure 225 on page 444 for an example of this print defect.)
Developer streak is characterized by a line of dark or missing toner
that stretches from the leading edge to the trailing edge. Replace the
toner cartridge corresponding to the color of the developer streak (for
example, if the streak is magenta, replace the magenta toner
cartridge).
Rain
(See figure 226 on page 445 for an example of this print defect.)
Rain is characterized by small, white, elongated spots in printed
areas. Typically, rain begins toward the center of a printed page.
Spots are elongated in the print direction.
Rain is caused by particles of color toner scratching the imaging drum
in some high-coverage, long-print-job conditions. Once the imaging
drum has been damaged, it must be replaced.
Eliminate rain by first checking manufacturer codes on toner
cartridges (see "Toner cartridge manufacturing codes" on page 456)
and replacing cartridges as needed.
Then, check the imaging drum for pitting or contamination and
replace the drum as needed.
Toner bubbles
(See figure 227 on page 446 for an example of this print defect.)
Toner bubbles are characterized by large blotches of color toner on
printed pages caused by color toner leaking from cartridges directly
onto the transfer drum.
Solve the problem of toner bubbles by checking the manufacturing
codes on the toner cartridges (see "Toner cartridge manufacturing
codes" on page 456) and replacing cartridges as needed.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 453
Charge roller set
(See figure 228 on page 447 for an example of this print defect.)
Charge roller set print defect, usually only noticeable in lighter
halftone colors, is characterized by banding lines at intervals of 44
mm (approximately 1.75 inches). The print defect usually appears
immediately after installing a new imaging drum or if the printer has
been in storage without power applied for a prolonged period of time.
The conductive rubber charge roller inside the imaging drum
cartridge can flatten on one side when the drum sits idle. A charge
roller typically returns to a cylindrical shape within 24 hours after
installation or after printing approximately 100 pages, so the image
defect diminishes with use or time.
Note
Do not replace the new imaging drum with another new imaging drum.
Doing so can cause the image defect to appear worse. Instead, wait
24 hours or print 100 sheets of a medium-coverage print job.
Waves
(See figure 229 on page 448 for an example of this print defect.)
Waves are characterized by color printing that appears “choppy” in
transition from high-coverage to low-coverage areas of the printed
page.
Waves can appear late in the life of a color toner cartridge, especially
when the cartridge has seen prolonged use at very low coverage;
there might still be toner in the cartridge, but it might be “worn out.”
Solve the print defect by replacing the color toner cartridge. For
example, if waves appear in magenta or colors that use magenta
(reds and blues), replace the magenta cartridge.
Missing toner
(See figure 230 on page 449 for an example of this print defect.)
The “missing toner” print defect is characterized by small speckles,
caused by missing toner, that appear usually in lighter colors within
two or three centimeters (approximately one inch) of the leading or
trailing edge.
To avoid the print defect, use better quality or heavier media. Also try
using darker colors and avoiding light colors in these areas.
454 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Hot offset
(See figure 231 on page 450 for an example of this print defect.)
The “hot offset” print defect is characterized by blotches of toner on
printed transparencies.
Avoid the print defect by using only thicker transparencies specifically
designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
Fading
(See figure 232 on page 451 for an example of this print defect.)
A broken transfer drum guide (see figure 260 on page 540, reference
#40) causes a distinct fading pattern. Print appears normal near one
edge (the bottom edge of an A4- or letter-sized portrait-oriented
page) and fades to completely missing at the opposite edge.
Remnants of the process marks might appear in the middle of the
page.
This defect is caused by a broken transfer drum guide. Replace the
transfer drum guide.
EN
Image defects troubleshooting 455
Toner cartridge manufacturing codes
Heat-stamped on the toner cartridge, opposite the label-end of the
cartridge, is a manufacturing code. If a portion of the code does not
match the list below, replace the toner cartridge.
Use toner cartridges that contain any of the following manufacturing
codes:
9I
9J
9K
9L
any cartridge that begins with the numbers 0 through 6 in place of
the 9
456 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Color balance adjustment
CAUTION
Adjusting the color balance changes the printer’s calibration. Because
this procedure adjusts parameters within the printer hardware, it will
affect all print jobs.
The printer automatically recalibrates the color settings. However, you
can adjust the color manually from the default settings by changing
the densities of the four toners (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow).
Changing the Detail Half-tone Adjust and Smooth Half-tone Adjust
allow you to independently adjust the color of objects on a page that
use the smooth and detail half-tones (such as text and graphics). Any
settings you change remain in effect until you change them again or
restore the factory defaults.
Do not perform the color balance adjustment procedure until all of the
following troubleshooting methods have been completed:
EN
Experiment with the printer driver and application settings to
adjust the color output. For more information about application
settings, see the online help.
Clean the density sensor (see page 114).
Complete the troubleshooting solutions earlier in this chapter for
the color printing problem you are experiencing.
Color balance adjustment 457
B
A
C
D
Figure 233.
Color adjust page
A
Smooth Half-tone Adjust section
B
Color ramps
C
Detail Half-tone Adjust section
D
Neutral axis
458 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
1
Print the color adjust page.
a Press GO and – VALUE + at the same time. COLOR ADJUST
MENU appears on the printer control panel display.
b Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears on the display.
c Press SELECT to print the color adjust page.
d Press GO to exit the Color Adjust Menu.
The color adjust page allows you to adjust the printer’s two halftone screens for each of the four colors (black, cyan, magenta,
and yellow), for a total of eight adjustments. Make these
adjustments after examining the color adjust page.
The color adjust page consists of two sections: the Detail Halftone Adjust section and the Smooth Half-tone Adjust section.
Each section shows the adjustment ramps for black, cyan,
magenta, and yellow and a neutral axis check ramp, which can be
used to verify the adjustment after the correction values have
been entered for each of the primary colors. Figure 233 is an
example of the color adjust page.
2
Note the numbers beside the red arrows for later reference.
The color adjust page indicates the last set of saved color
settings with a red arrow next to the saved setting. The default for
each color is 0 (other possible settings consist of -6 through 6).
3
Determine the color adjustment numbers for each color in
the color ramps.
a Examine the color adjust page from a distance of 6 ft (approximately 2 m).
b Find the circle of each color that most closely matches the
background color. It might be necessary to squint slightly to
match the colors.
c Record the number in the circle.
EN
Color balance adjustment 459
4
Enter the color adjustment numbers in the printer control
panel.
a Press GO and – VALUE + at the same time. COLOR ADJUST
MENU appears on the display.
b Press ITEM until the option you want appears on the display.
The options are listed below:
BLACK SMOOTH VALUE =
MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE =
BLACK DETAIL VALUE =
MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE =
CYAN SMOOTH VALUE =
YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE =
CYAN DETAIL VALUE =
YELLOW DETAIL VALUE =
c Press – VALUE + until the number recorded in step 3c
appears on the display.
d Press SELECT to enter the number into the printer memory.
An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the selection.
e Repeat steps 4a through 4d to adjust the color screens, as
necessary.
5
Reprint the color adjust page.
6
Examine the new color adjust test page and verify that the
color adjustment is correct.
• Verify that each of the color ramps (black, cyan, magenta, and
yellow) matches the background for each color and has a red
arrow next to the circle. If another circle matches the
background more closely, return to step 4 to reset the values
on the printer control panel to the number shown in that circle.
• Verify that the circles in the neutral axis areas of the color
adjust test page are neutral gray (gray without a color tint), and
then verify that one of the circles in the ramp is a color very
close to the background. If the circles are not neutral gray,
additional corrections to cyan, magenta, or yellow might be
necessary. If there is an overall tint of color in the circles, make
the adjustments suggested by the following table. However,
the most accurate correction is determined by the circles in the
individual black, cyan, magenta, and yellow ramps.
460 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Table 45. Neutral axis adjustments
Overall color of
circles
Correction if all circles are
darker than background
Correction if all circles are
lighter than background
Cyan tint
Reduce cyan
Increase magenta and yellow
Magenta tint
Reduce magenta
Increase cyan and yellow
Yellow tint
Reduce yellow
Increase magenta and cyan
Green tint
Reduce yellow and cyan
Increase magenta
Red tint
Reduce yellow and magenta
Increase cyan
Purple or blue tint
Reduce cyan and magenta
Increase yellow
For example, if the circles in the neutral axes show a green tint and
the circle appears lighter than the background, the magenta ramp
should be examined closely to determine if magenta should be
increased.
Note
EN
If the color settings are less accurate when you finish the color
adjustment than when you started, reset all color values to 0 (zero) in
the printer control panel and try the adjustment again.
Color balance adjustment 461
Repetitive defects troubleshooting
Repetitive defects are defects that occur in the same vertical position
on the page, but not necessarily on every page. Most repetitive
defects are caused by problems with one of the following, and are
indicated by the positioning of the defect on the page:
developer roller (at 38 mm)
cleaning roller (at 56 mm)
fuser (at 150.5 mm)
charging roller (at 44 mm)—see additional information under
“Charge roller set” on page 454.
developer DSD wheels (at 65 mm)
transfer roller (at 66 mm)
transfer drum (occurs once per 11-by-17 inch or A3-sized page,
or every other letter- or A4-sized page)
imaging drum (at 195 mm)
transfer belt (at 222 mm)
462 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Repetitive defects troubleshooting
First occurrence of print defect
Color developer roller, 38 mm
Charging roller, 44 mm
Black developer roller, 52 mm
Cleaning roller, 56 mm
Developer DSD wheels 65 mm
Transfer roller, 66 mm
Transfer drum, once per 11-by-17 inch
or A3-sized page or every other letteror A4-sized page
Fuser, 150.5 mm
Imaging drum, 195 mm
Transfer belt, 222 mm
Figure 234.
EN
Repetitive defect ruler
Repetitive defects troubleshooting 463
Color developer roller
Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 38 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged developer roller.
Actions: Replace the toner cartridge.
Charging roller
Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 44 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged charging roller.
Actions: Replace the imaging drum.
Black developer roller
Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 38 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged developer roller.
Actions: Replace the toner cartridge.
Cleaning roller
Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 56 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged cleaning roller.
Actions: Clean the cleaning roller with a hand wipe. If cleaning does
not resolve the defect, replace the cleaning roller.
Developer DSD wheels
Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 65 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged developer DSD wheels. These wheels are
located on the outer ends of the color toner cartridge and appear as a
black bushing.
Actions: Replace the toner cartridge of the color producing the
repetitive defect.
464 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Transfer roller
Symptoms: Print defect occurring every 66 mm.
Cause: Dirty or damaged transfer roller.
Actions: Clean the transfer roller with isopropyl alcohol and a hand
wipe. If cleaning does not resolve the defect, replace the transfer belt.
Transfer drum
Symptoms: Print defect occurring once per page on 11-by-17-inchor A3-sized media, or on every other letter- or A4- sized page.
Cause: Dirty or damaged transfer drum.
Actions: Clean the transfer drum (see below). If the defect is not
resolved by cleaning, replace the transfer drum.
Cleaning the transfer drum
Many, but not all, repetitive defects can be removed using the
following procedures. Defects that appear as light spots in dark areas
of print are more likely to be corrected by this procedure than dark
spots in unprinted areas.
CAUTION
If the procedures are performed incorrectly or without proper care, the
transfer drum can be permanently damaged.
This procedure requires the following items:
CAUTION
EN
a print sample showing the repetitive defect
a clean, flat surface on which to work
a hand wipe
You can also use a dry, clean, soft, lint-free cloth, such as cheesecloth,
to clean the transfer drum. To prevent scratches on the drum, do not
use any paper products (such as tissue or paper towels) to clean the
drum.
Repetitive defects troubleshooting 465
1
Turn the printer off and open the front door.
2
Press the button and swing the lower lever to the right.
3
Open the right upper door, and remove the transfer drum.
4
Using the print sample as a reference, inspect the transfer drum
for a spot or speck that might be causing the repetitive defects.
Figure 235.
Cleaning the transfer drum
CAUTION
Do not clean the transfer drum using force. Do not use any water-based
cleaners or alcohol. These actions can permanently damage the
transfer drum.
5
Note
Gently rub the spot or speck with a hand wipe.
Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the transfer drum.
6
Reinstall the transfer drum.
7
Swing the lower lever to the left making sure it clicks into place.
8
Close the right upper and front doors, and turn the printer on.
9
Reprint the print job. If cleaning does not eliminate the repetitive
defect, replace the transfer drum.
466 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Fuser
Symptoms: Print defects occurring at about 150.5 mm. The defects
will be most visible on overhead transparencies.
Cause: Defect on the upper fuser roller.
Actions:
1
Power the printer off, allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool, and
remove the fuser.
2
Turn the fuser gears and inspect the surface of the upper fusing
roller. If the roller has surface defects, replace the fuser assembly.
Imaging drum
Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 195 mm.
Causes:
Damage such as scratches or dents on the imaging drum. These
usually appear as dark or light marks on the page.
Paper dust adhering to the imaging drum. These usually appear
as white marks in the dark printed areas of the page.
Exposure of portions of the imaging drum to light. This causes
dark sections in the printed output. The life of the imaging drum is
shortened by exposure to strong light.
Actions:
CAUTION
EN
Print at least four configuration pages to determine if the defect
repeats in the same vertical orientation.
Inspect the imaging drum for scratches, dents, or other damage.
Replace if needed.
If the problem is dust, remove the dust with 70% isopropyl alcohol
applied with a hand wipe. Try this only if the print defect is
unacceptable and the only other alternative is replacing the
imaging drum.
Defects caused by exposure to light might clear up over time. If
severe, replace the imaging drum.
Do not expose the imaging drum to direct sunlight, and be careful not
to scratch or get fingerprints on the drum surface during cleaning.
Repetitive defects troubleshooting 467
Transfer belt
Symptoms: Print defects occurring every 222 mm.
Cause: Defects on the transfer belt surface.
Actions: Remove the transfer belt and inspect the entire belt surface.
Use the transfer belt gears to rotate the belt through its travel.
468 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting
This section provides a systematic approach to identifying the causes
of malfunctions and errors in the 2,000-sheet input unit.
Ways to troubleshoot the unit
In general, there are three possible sources of malfunction:
the 2,000-sheet input unit itself
printer electronics
the C-link cable that connects the unit and the printer
Begin troubleshooting
1
Print or display the error log. Evaluate the error log for any
specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages.
2
Print a configuration page to verify the proper installation of the
paper-handling accessories.
• If any of the installed accessories are not shown on the
configuration page, check the corresponding cable
connections.
• Verify that the C-link cable is correctly connected and
functional.
• Verify that DC power is available to the paper-handling
accessories.
3
If necessary, use one of the following diagnostic tools to isolate
the problem:
• Status LED on the front of the unit—Indicates the status of
the unit (see page 470).
• Service LED inside the back cover—The pattern of flashing
(long and short) isolates the problem (see page 471).
• Standalone running test—Tests whether the unit itself is
functioning properly (see page 473).
• Motor test—Checks the motor to see if it is working properly
(see page 474).
• Sensor tests—Checks the sensors to see if they are working
properly (see page 475).
EN
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 469
Status LED descriptions
The status light on the front of the unit provides status information.
Table 46. Status LED on the 2,000-sheet input unit
State
Description
Resolution
Solid green
The unit is on and ready.
None required.
Solid amber The unit is experiencing a
hardware malfunction.
Flashing
amber
The unit has a media jam or a Clear the jam or remove the
page needs to be removed
page.
from the 2,000-sheet input
unit, even if the page is not
jammed.
The VTU might be open.
Off
Isolate the problem using one
of the other procedures
described in this section.
Close the door.
The printer might be in Power Press GO.
Save mode.
The unit is not receiving
power.
470 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Check the power supply and
the power cables.
EN
Service LED descriptions
1
2
3
Figure 236.
Note
Rear view of 2,000-sheet input unit
1
Service LEDs
2
DIP switches
3
Power supply
Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all DIP switches to the off
position when you finish the test, or the unit will not work.
The DIP switch is ON if it is to the right. The DIP switch is OFF if it is
to the left.
Note
EN
To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings,
turn the power supply on the 2,000-sheet input unit to operational
mode. Reset the DIP switches on the controller PCA, and then switch
the power supply back to diagnostic mode to enable the new diagnostic
test.
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 471
Service LED interpretation
If the 2,000-sheet input unit is working properly, it will pick up paper
from tray 4 and expel it; the bottom service LED will flash regularly
every 0.5 seconds.
Table 47. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern)
Long
(1 sec)
Description
Recommended action
3
1
Lifter malfunction
Verify that the tray lifts freely by lifting it by
hand. Verify that the paper size plates are
installed correctly (in the same corresponding
slots) and are not bent. If neither of these is
the problem, replace tray 4.
2
1
Registration sensor
delay jam
The media does not reach the sensor. Open
the VTU door and remove the media. Replace
the paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper
pick-up assembly.
2
2
Registration sensor
stationary jam/initial
jam
Open the VTU door and remove the media.
Check the sensors and replace the
corresponding field replaceable unit.
2
3
Jam sensor delay
jam
The media did not reach the sensor. Open the
VTU door and remove the media. Replace the
paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly.
2
4
Jam sensor
stationary jam/initial
jam
Open the VTU door and remove the media.
1
1
VTU door is open
Close the door.
1
2
Tray 4 is open
Close the tray.
Wrong paper size
loaded
Load the correct size of paper or check
sensors.
No paper in tray 4
Load paper or check sensors.
1
Note
Short
(0.3 sec)
3
If the LEDs do not turn on, replace the paper deck PCA or the power
supply.
472 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
DIP switch settings
The following table shows the position of the DIP switches to run each
of the 2,000-sheet input unit diagnostic tests.
Table 48. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test procedures
DIP switch
Normal setting
Motor test
Standalone
running test
Sensor test
1
Off
On
On
Off
2
Off
On
Off
Off
3
Off
Off
Off
On
4
Off
On
On
On
Standalone running test
This test verifies that the 2,000-sheet input unit is functioning
properly. For this test, use the service LEDs. (See page 472 for an
interpretation of the service LED patterns.)
CAUTION
To prevent excessive media jams during this test, feed only six to eight
pages.
1
Ensure that paper is in the tray.
2
Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit’s controller
PCA for the standalone running test. (See page 473 for an
explanation of the settings.)
3
Use the switch that is located on the unit’s power supply to switch
to diagnostic mode.
• If the unit does not work, there is no paper movement and the
lower service LED flashes in a pattern that indicates the
problem. (See page 472 for an interpretation of the service
LED patterns.)
4
EN
To stop the test, turn the power supply switch back to operational
mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off
position. Open the VTU and remove any media from the paper
path.
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 473
Motor test
This test verifies that the three motors on the 2,000-sheet input unit
are functioning properly.
1
Remove the back cover from the 2,000-sheet input unit (see
page 300).
2
Open tray 4 and the vertical transfer unit (VTU).
3
Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit’s controller
PCA for the motor test. (See page 473 for an explanation of the
settings.)
4
Use the switch that is located on the unit’s power supply to switch
to diagnostic mode.
• If the motors are working properly, they rotate continuously.
• If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field
replaceable unit: the paper pick-up assembly, the VTU, or the
paper deck drive assembly.
5
To stop the test, turn the switch on the power supply back to
operational mode and reset the DIP switches on the controller
PCA to the off position.
474 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Sensor test
This test verifies that the sensors on the 2,000-sheet input unit are
functioning properly.
1
4
2
5
3
Figure 237.
Location of sensors in the 2,000-sheet input unit
1
Paper exit sensor (PS32)
2
Paper entry sensor (PS31)
3
VTU closed sensor (PS35)
4
Paper tray raised sensor (PS34)
5
Paper tray empty sensor (PS33)
To perform the test
1
EN
Set the DIP switches on the 2,000-sheet input unit’s controller
PCA for the sensor test. (See page 473 for an explanation of the
settings.)
2,000-sheet input unit troubleshooting 475
2
For each paper sensor:
a Open the paper tray and the VTU on the 2,000-sheet input
unit.
b Remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place
(secured by 1 screw) (see figure 161, callout 2, and figure
163, callout 2).
c Pull out the sensor unit.
3
Use the switch that is located on the unit’s power supply to switch
to diagnostic mode.
4
Manually activate the sensor.
• When you activate the sensor, the bottom service LED on the
controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the
LED goes off.
• If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the
sensor. Replace the corresponding field replaceable unit.
5
To stop the test, turn the power supply switch back to operational
mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off
position.
476 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting
The multi-bin mailbox standalone diagnostic tool is a troubleshooting
aid that verifies how the multi-bin mailbox functions alone. The tests
are designed to be used without C-link commands from the EPH
controller on the printer.
Switching the multi-bin mailbox to test mode
Note
1
Turn the printer off and remove the multi-bin mailbox from the
printer.
2
Move the multi-bin mailbox power supply switch to test mode
(callout 1).
Reset the power supply switch to normal mode when you finish running
diagnostic tests; otherwise, the multi-bin mailbox will not work.
1
Figure 238.
EN
Multi-bin mailbox power supply test mode switch
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 477
Power-up sequence test
1
Push in and hold the multi-bin mailbox interlock switch. The multibin mailbox begins a power-up test.
• All the motors in the multi-bin mailbox start working, and the
delivery head assembly moves up and down the multi-bin
mailbox twice, scanning to determine that all the output paper
bins are properly installed.
• At the end of the power-up test, the flipper motor remains
working and waiting for feeding paper.
2
Check the user status LED on the front and the three service
LEDs on the back side of the multi-bin mailbox. If the power-up
test is successful, the user status LED remains green and the
middle service LED shows solid red. The other two service LEDs
remain off.
3
If the service LEDs are blinking in a pattern, indicating an error
code, a problem exists (table 49 on page 479 lists the error codes
indicated by the blinking pattern).
Paper path test
Note
Use only supported media types for the paper path test.
1
Manually feed paper through the input paper guide.
• The paper passes across the flipper assembly and moves
down to the bottom paper bin through the transport belt
system via the delivery head assembly.
2
Feed several pages, one at a time, through the input paper guide.
If the paper path test is successful, reinstall the multi-bin mailbox.
3
If a problem exists, the service LEDs blink in a pattern, indicating
an error code (table 49 on page 479 lists the error codes
indicated by the blinking pattern).
478 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Multi-bin mailbox LED descriptions
The multi-bin mailbox features a user status LED and three service
LEDs.
The user status LED is a single LED that is located on the front
cover of the multi-bin mailbox at the top. The user LED provides
information about the power-on status and about the attachment
to and alignment of the accessory with the printer.
The three service LEDs are near the center of the multi-bin
mailbox back cover. The service LEDs blink independently of
each other, indicating the status of the multi-bin mailbox.
LED status interpretation
Solid green
Solid red
Blinking red
Solid amber
Blinking amber
Blank
Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox
User
LED
Service
LEDs
Message description
Recommended action
Multi-bin mailbox ready
The multi-bin mailbox was
successfully connected and initialized
by the printer.
Power Save mode
The multi-bin mailbox is in Power Save
mode.
Test mode
The multi-bin mailbox is in test mode.
EN
No action required.
No action required.
Run the power-on test.
Run the paper path test.
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 479
Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox (continued)
User
LED
Service
LEDs
Message description
Multi-bin mailbox unlatched from
the printer
The multi-bin mailbox is not properly
attached to the printer.
Flipper error
During the flipper calibration, an
abnormal reference voltage was
encountered.
Face-up bin is too full
The face-up bin is too full.
Jam in flipper area
Time-out condition at the entry area.
Recommended action
Jam in belt
Time-out condition in the transport
belt.
Sliders problem at the head
assembly
The sliders do not activate the slider
photosensor.
480 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Check alignment of the multi-bin
mailbox.
Check the attachment clips.
Check adjustable casters.
Check the interlock switch.
Check for media jam in the flipper
assembly area.
Check cable connections.
Replace flipper assembly.
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Remove media from the face-up
bin.
Check for jammed sensor flag.
Replace the flipper assembly.
Check for proper cable
connection.
Open jam access door and check
for media jam or out-of-place
flipper assembly shaft.
Check for jammed paper sensor.
Replace the flipper assembly.
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Check for media jam in the
transport belt system/delivery
head assembly.
Ensure free movement of the
transport belt (both belts).
Ensure that belts are parallel in
the transport belt system.
Check that the metal tape is in
place and in good condition.
Replace the transport belt motor.
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Replace the delivery head
assembly.
Check for media jam in the
delivery head assembly.
Check that all paper bins are
seated correctly.
Replace the delivery head
assembly.
EN
Table 49. Status LEDs on the multi-bin mailbox (continued)
User
LED
Service
LEDs
Message description
Recommended action
External memory error
Multi-bin mailbox NVRAM damaged.
Jam in delivery head assembly
Time-out condition in the PSExit1
sensor.
Jam in the delivery head position
system
The elevator motor detects an invalid
window when scanning.
Wrong page request
Page request received with invalid
output bin or invalid paper size
information.
EN
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Check for media jam in the
delivery head assembly.
Check for free movement in both
PSExit1 and PSExit2 sensors on
the delivery head assembly.
Check that the fingers are over
the ejector rollers on the delivery
head assembly.
Replace the flat ribbon cable that
connects to the delivery head
assembly.
Replace the delivery head
assembly.
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Check that the blind cover and
scan bar are installed properly.
Check for media jam in the
delivery head assembly.
Check for free movement of the
delivery head assembly.
Check that all paper bins are
seated correctly.
Check that paper bins and blind
cover are not broken.
Replace the delivery head motor.
Replace the delivery head
assembly.
Replace the multi-bin mailbox
controller PCA.
Check the bin destination.
Check the paper size
configuration.
Power up the system.
Multi-bin mailbox troubleshooting 481
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting
Calibrating the staple position
Note
Recalibrate the staple position only if the accumulator assembly, the
carriage assembly, or the controller PCA is replaced. NVRAM located
in the controller PCA keeps in memory the configured compensation
values for the staple position. When the device is in service mode, you
can gain access to the flexible calibration menu.
To calibrate the staple position
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Enter service mode (see “To set the device in service mode” later
in this chapter). As the device powers on, the NVRAM receives
the calibration values.
3
After successful power on, exit service mode (see “To exit service
mode” later in this chapter).
4
Turn the printer on and wait until Ready appears on the control
panel display. The user LED, located at the top of the front cover,
should blink green.
5
Press MENU until Configuration of Stkr appears on the control
panel display.
6
Press ITEM until Default of Staples appears.
7
Press – VALUE + until One Staple appears.
8
Press SELECT.
9
Press MENU until Information Menu appears.
10 Press ITEM until Print Paper Path Test appears.
11 Print a ten-page job to the stapler bin (optional bin 1).
12 Check the staple position of the 10-page print job against the
staple position in figure 239 on page 483.
• If the positions are not comparable, then the device should be
recalibrated; continue with step 13 below.
• If the positions match or are close to a match, the device does
not require recalibration; proceed to step 18.
13 Press MENU until Configuration of Stkr appears.
14 Press ITEM until X Compensation/Y Compensation appears.
482 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
15 Press – VALUE + to set the correct compensation (in millimeters).
16 Press SELECT.
17 Repeat steps 9 through 16 until you are comfortable with the
staple position.
18 Press MENU until Configuration of Stkr appears.
19 Press ITEM until Calibra Values appears.
20 Press – VALUE + until Set appears.
21 Press SELECT.
22 Press GO.
If you set compensation values, the printer should return to Ready
automatically and the user LED should return to the solid green
status.
Because you set calibration values, the printer should not allow
access to the compensation values in service mode.
If you did not set compensation values, repeat steps 1 through 4 and
steps 18 through 22.
–
Y-axis
+
Staple position
–
+
X-axis
Figure 239.
EN
Staple position
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 483
Troubleshooting tools
Paper path test
Using the information from the event log, you can verify a specific
printer paper path with the paper path test. The paper path test menu
allows you to select the paper source and the output destination.
Note
See Chapter 5, Theory of Operation, for graphic representations of the
paper path.
To perform a paper path test
1
Press MENU until Information Menu appears on the control panel
display.
2
Press ITEM until Print Paper Path Test appears and then press
SELECT.
3
Press – VALUE + to choose the correct input tray and then press
SELECT.
4
Press – VALUE + to choose the correct destination and then press
SELECT.
5
Press – VALUE + to choose the correct duplex mode and then
press SELECT.
6
Press – VALUE + to choose the number of copies and then press
SELECT.
To stop the paper path test, press CANCEL JOB on the control panel.
484 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Timing
The figure below shows timeouts related to jam declarations. The
number in parentheses is the jam’s error log code.
Note
Jam codes used in the drawing and in the explanation are in
hexadecimal representation.
The time is the maximum time allowed between two events. The
figure shows the flow of a normal sheet, from entry to the
accumulator/offset module.
Figure 240.
Device timing
The printer sends a delivery notice for each sheet. When the device
detects the signal, a timeout of three seconds begins.
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 485
FLEntry 1 sensor and FLEntry sensor
If the sheet does not arrive to the FLEntry 1 sensor within three
seconds, the device declares a jam 02.
When the sheet arrives at the FLEntry 1 sensor, which means that the
sheet is being pushed by the printer and pulled by the device, the
timer is reset to timeout in one second. If the sheet does not arrive at
FLEntry sensor in one second, the device declares a jam 03.
Next, the FLEntry 1 sensor is deactivated. Because this event
depends on the media length and the printer speed, it is independent
of time. The device counts steps in the receiving stepper motor.
With the proper relation of steps to length, the device knows when the
sheet leaves the printer rollers. At that time, the device switches to
high speed and begins a timeout of one second. If the sheet fails to
leave the FLEntry 1 sensor in one second, the device declares a
jam 04.
Once FLEntry 1 is deactivated, a timeout of .75 seconds begins to the
next event—deactivation of the FLEntry sensor. If the FLEntry sensor
is not deactivated, the device declares a jam 05. If the FLEntry sensor
is deactivated, a timeout of 1.5 seconds begins for activation of the
FLExit sensor.
FLExit sensor
If the FLExit sensor is not activated within the timeout, the device
declares a jam 0A.
FLExit sensor deactivation depends on the internal paper path speed
and the media length. The device declares a jam when internal step
counter exceeds 133% of number of steps that represent the media
length.
If the FLExit sensor is not deactivated, which can occur when sheet
stops in the paper path because of an obstruction or slipping, the
device declares a jam 0B.
When the FLExit sensor is deactivated correctly, a timeout of 1.5
seconds begins for activation of the registration wheel's sensor.
GWSens sensor/Exit sensor
If the GWSens sensor (in the stapler/stacker) or the Exit sensor (on
the stacker) is not activated within the timeout, the device declares a
jam 12.
486 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Standalone diagnostic tool
The standalone diagnostic routines differ between the 3,000-sheet
stapler/stacker and the 3,000-sheet stacker.
The standalone diagnostic tool tests the device's motors and
functionality without the C-link commands from the printer.
The device has a user LED and a set of service LEDs.
Note
User LED—the single LED located at the top of the front cover
provides information about the power-on status and attachment/
alignment to the printer.
Service LEDs (see figure 203 on page 353, callout 3)—three
LEDs (green, yellow, and red) located near the bottom of the
controller PCA, toward the back of the device, provide additional
technical information about the device.
To interpret the LED patterns, see the tables later in this chapter.
When service mode is entered, the stapler/stacker performs a powerup sequence. While in service mode, the stapler test/stacker test,
stacker bin test, face-up bin full sensor test, and stacker bin full test
can be performed.
To set the device in service mode
Note
Make sure the printer is turned off before performing this test. If the
printer is on when service mode is enabled, some C-link signals might
affect the test performance.
1
Unplug the C-link cable that connects the device to the printer.
2
Unplug the power cable that connects the device to the printer
and plug the power cable directly into a grounded power source.
3
Remove the controller PCA cover (see page 342 for removal and
replacement procedures).
4
Slide the service mode switch on the controller PCA to the “ON”
position (toward you).
5
Press and hold in the interlock switch.
To exit service mode
EN
1
Release the interlock switch and slide the service mode switch on
the controller PCA back to the normal position.
2
Reinstall the controller PCA cover and C-link and power cables.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 487
Note
The user LED blinks green when the printer is turned on after setting
and exiting service mode. Perform steps 18 through 22 under
“Calibrating the staple position” earlier in this chapter to return to
normal operation.
Stapler test/stacker test
For the stapler test/stacker test, use letter- or A4-sized paper. Feed
the paper straight, centered, and slowly to avoid skews and jams. If a
jam occurs, release the interlock switch and depress it again to reset
the device.
Note
Any stapler settings or offset settings configured at the printer control
panel are ignored during the stapler test/stacker test.
1
Feed two sheets of paper into the paper input area. The sheets
are sent to the face-up bin.
2
Feed two sheets at a time into the paper input area.
• In the 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, the sheets are stapled as
shown below and sent to the stacker bin:
next two sheets: no staples
next two sheets: 1 staple
next two sheets: 2 staples
next two sheets: 3 staples
next two sheets: 6 staples
next two sheets: 1 staple, angled at 40°
next two sheets restart the cycle: to the face-up bin
• In the 3,000-sheet stacker, the sheets are routed as follows:
next two sheets: to the stacker bin, offset in
one direction
next two sheets: to the face-up bin
next two sheets: to the stacker bin, offset in
the opposite direction
next two sheets restart the cycle: to the face-up bin
488 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Stacker bin test
Block the upper optical sensor and observe the movement of the
stacker bin.
Face-up bin full sensor test
Lift and hold up the bin-full flag until the user LED blinks amber. The
user LED should blink amber within a few seconds.
Stacker Bin Full Sensor Test
Block the upper optical sensor until the stacker bin reaches the
bottom of its motion, triggering the stacker bin full sensor; the user
LED should blink amber.
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 489
Service LED flashing patterns
The blinking of the service LEDs will be 0.5 second on and 0.5
second off during the coding sequence. After a two-second delay the
sequence will be repeated.
Table 50. Service LED flashing patterns
LED
Meaning
Solid green
Device OK
LED blinking
pattern (number
of blinks)
Blinking green Device detached from the printer
Continuous blinking
Blinking yellow Staple jam
1
Blinking red
Jam in flipper
2
Jam in paper path
3
Jam in accumulator
4
Jam in carriage
5
Stapler malfunction
1
Flipper malfunction
2
Malfunction in paper path
3
Accumulator/offset module malfunction 4
Carriage malfunction
5
Controller PCA malfunction
6
User LED status interpretation
The blinking of the user LED is continuous.
Table 51. User LED status interpretation
Color
Solid/blinking Meaning
Off
N/A
Printer in powersave mode or device not
receiving power
Green
Solid
Device is on and ready
Green
Blinking
Device is in service mode
Amber
Solid
Device has a hardware malfunction
Amber
Blinking
Device is not correctly attached to
printer, one or more bins are full, or
device has a paper jam or a staple jam
490 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Printer messages
Control panel messages and errors
Be sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including
the error message number and the text, in order to locate the error
message in the tables.
The printer has enhanced information in the control panel.
Printer messages shown on the control panel display provide five
categories of information. Each message category is assigned a
priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the
highest priority message is shown. When it has been cleared, the
next priority message will be shown, and so on. The messages and
their priorities are:
Printer status
Warning messages
Error messages
Critical error messages
External paper-handling device messages
Control panel and event log message format
The format of control panel messages is:
13.xy—paper jam in input/output device
Input/output device condition—xy.zz
66.xy.zz—input/output device failure
The format of event log messages is:
EN
13.xy zz—input/output device paper jam
65.xy.zz—input/output device condition
66.xy.zz—input/output device hardware malfunction
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 491
For both the control panel and event log messages:
x is the C-link device number in the daisy chain:
0 Paper handling controller
1 First C-link device
2 Second C-link device
3 Third C-link device
4 Fourth C-link device
5 Fifth C-link device
y is the C-link device type:
0 Paper handling controller
1 Input device
2 Output device
3 Finishing device
4 Other supported device (not in use)
5 Other supported device (not in use)
zz is the error code. See the error message tables later in this
chapter for more information.
492 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Shown below are examples of control panel messages with their
corresponding event log messages and meanings. Recommended
actions are not shown; see the error message tables later in this
chapter for recommended actions.
Control panel message
Event log
Meaning
13.11 Paper Jam in Input 13.11.1B
Device
A jam occurred in the first C-link device
configured. It is an input device (2,000-sheet
Input Tray or 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray) with an
error code 1B. This is normally a timeout at an
entry or exit sensor.
66.22.09
A hardware malfunction occurred in the second
C-link device configured. It is an output device
(Mailbox) with an error code 09. This is an
external memory error.
66.22.09 Output Device
Failure
Note
Print a configuration page to properly identify the input or output device
configured. Notice that the error format only identifies the C-link device
number and the device type; it does not identify which input or output
device is used in the system.
Figure 241.
Error format for paper handling
EN
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 493
HP 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker error messages
Operating errors
Table 52. Operating errors in the stapler/stacker
Event
Control panel log error User
messages
message LED
Service
LED
Description
Recommended
action
Output bin N/A
full
Clear
paper from
face up
Blinking
N/A
amber
(print job
or mopy in
progress)
Face up bin is full;
125 sheets have
been collected in
the face-up bin.
Output bin N/A
full
Clear
paper from
optional
bin 1
Blinking
N/A
amber
(print job
or mopy in
progress)
Stapler bin is full;
Remove paper from
3,000 sheets have the stapler bin.
been collected in
the stapler bin.
-OrMore than 1,500
sheets of 11-by-17
inch or A3-sized
paper have been
collected in the
stapler bin.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Only 20 to 50
staples remain.
N/A
Blinking
amber
Blinking
A staple is jammed Clear the jammed
yellow
in the stapler.
staple.
(one blink)
Stapler out
of staples
N/A
N/A
N/A
The cartridge is out Refill the stapler.
of staples.
Too many
pages in job
to staple
N/A
N/A
N/A
The maximum
height of stack to
be stapled has
been exceeded.
Print job is
completed, but not
stapled.
Stapler low
on staples
Check
stapler
device
Clear
jammed
staple
494 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Remove paper from
the face-up bin.
Refill the stapler.
Do not configure
the equipment to
staple stacks that
are thicker than the
maximum height
allowed; follow the
guidelines listed in
the user’s guide.
EN
Open Doors
Table 53. Open doors in the stapler/stacker
Event
Control panel log error User
messages
message LED
Service
LED
Description
Recommended
action
Stkr: Attach
to printer
N/A
Blinking
amber
Blinking
green
The device is
detached from the
printer.
Stkr: Close
stapler door
N/A
Blinking
amber
Blinking
green
The stapler door is Close the stapler
open.
door.
EN
Attach the device to
the printer and
verify that the user
LED is green.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 495
Jams
Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Detach
and Clear Jam
Event
log error User
message LED
13.13 01
or
13.23 01
Blinking
amber
Service
LED
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Description
When powering on
or after clearing a
jam, a jam is
present at the
flipper entry area.
Recommended
action
13.13 02
or
13.23 02
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Media never
reached the flipper
entry sensors.
13.13 03
or
13.23 03
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Media jammed at
flipper entry sensor.
496 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
the printer and
the computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
EN
Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Detach
and Clear Jam
(continued)
Event
log error User
message LED
13.13 04
or
13.23 04
Blinking
amber
Service
LED
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Description
Media jammed in
the flipper area.
Recommended
action
13.13 05
or
13.23 05
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Media jammed in
the flipper area.
13.13 06
or
13.23 06
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(two
blinks)
Self-adjustment
routine incomplete.
13.13 09
or
13.23 09
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(three
blinks)
When powering on
or after clearing a
jam, a jam is
present in the
paper path.
EN
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Check for
mechanical
interferences in
the flipper's
rollers area.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 497
Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Detach
and Clear Jam
(continued)
Event
log error User
message LED
13.13 0A
or
13.23 0A
Blinking
amber
Service
LED
Description
Blinking
yellow
(three
blinks)
Media jammed
when flipping and
not reaching the
exit sensor.
Recommended
action
13.13 0B
or
13.23 0B
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(three
blinks)
Media jammed
when entering the
accumulator.
13.13 11
or
13.23 11
13.13 12
or
13.23 12
Blinking
amber
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(four
blinks)
Blinking
yellow
(four
blinks)
When powering on
or after clearing a
jam, a jam is
present in the
accumulator
assembly.
Media jammed in
the paper path
between the flipper
and the
accumulator.
498 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Make sure you
remove all
shreds of
media from the
path.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
flipper
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
Replace the
accumulator
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
Replace the
accumulator
assembly.
EN
Table 54. Jams in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Detach
and Clear Jam
(continued)
Event
log error User
message LED
13.13 13
or
13.23 13
Blinking
amber
Service
LED
Blinking
yellow
(four
blinks)
Description
A jam occurred
when trying to eject
a print job or mopy.
Recommended
action
Stkr: Detach
and clear
staple jam
13.13 19
or
13.23 19
Blinking
amber
Blinking
yellow
(five
blinks)
Media jammed
between the
carriage and the
stack of paper to be
stapled.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer, if
necessary.
Replace the
accumulator
assembly.
Clear the jam.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
Verify unit
calibration (Y
compensation).
Replace the
stapler
assembly.
Hardware malfunctions
Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 04
66.13.17
or
66.23.17
Output
device
failure
EN
Event
log error User
message LED
66.13.17
or
66.23.17
Solid
amber
Service
LED
Blinking
red
(four
blinks)
Description
The accumulator
assembly
malfunctioned.
-OrThe DC motor
retainer or sensor is
damaged.
Recommended
action
Replace the
accumulator
assembly.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 499
Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 04
66.13.18
or
66.23.18
Output
device
failure
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 05
66.13.25
or
66.23.25
Output
device
failure
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 06
66.13.33
or
66.23.33
Output
device
failure
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 06
66.13.34
or
66.23.34
Output
device
failure
Event
log error User
message LED
66.13.18
or
66.23.18
Solid
amber
Service
LED
Blinking
red
(four
blinks)
Description
The accumulator
assembly
malfunctioned.
Recommended
action
-OrThe bearing
bracket or gear
wheel sensor is
damaged.
The stapler is
damaged.
66.13.25
or
66.23.25
Solid
amber
Blinking
red
(five
blinks)
66.13.33
or
66.23.33
Solid
amber
Blinking
The controller PCA
red
is damaged.
(six blinks)
-Or-
There is a RAM
error.
66.13.34
or
66.23.34
Solid
amber
500 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
Blinking
The controller PCA
red
is damaged.
(six blinks)
-OrThere is an
EEPROM error.
Replace the
accumulator
assembly.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
Replace the
stapler.
Replace the
controller PCA.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
EN
Table 55. Hardware malfunctions in the stapler/stacker
Control panel
messages
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 06
66.13.35
or
66.23.35
Output
device
failure
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 06
66.13.36
or
66.23.36
Output
device
failure
Stkr: Call
Service
Stkr:
Error 06
66.13.37
or
66.23.37
Output
device
failure
EN
Event
log error User
message LED
Service
LED
66.13.35
or
66.23.35
Blinking
The controller PCA
red
is damaged.
(six blinks)
Solid
amber
Description
-Or-
Recommended
action
ROM has been
corrupted.
66.13.36
or
66.23.36
Solid
amber
Blinking
The controller PCA
red
is damaged.
(six blinks)
-Or-
The C-link register
is damaged.
66.13.37
or
66.23.37
Solid
amber
Blinking
The controller PCA
red
is damaged.
(six blinks)
-OrThe DAC (digital-toanalog converter) is
damaged.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
If the problem
persists,
replace the
controller PCA.
Power cycle the
printer and the
computer.
Replace the
controller PCA.
Replace the
flipper
assembly.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker troubleshooting 501
Communications troubleshooting
HP network interface support
Unless you have experience with the particular network under repair,
seek the help of a qualified network professional before changing any
network configuration settings.
If the printer is configured with an HP network interface card (such as
an HP JetDirect product), the Response Center is available to help
with any problems. Additional information is available from the
HP JetDirect Printer Software Installation Guide (see page 514 for
ordering information).
CAUTION
Network interface cards are not directly interchangeable. Do not
exchange interface cards without understanding and performing the
configuration process for each of the exchanged cards and the network.
Third-party network interface support
If a problem is associated with a third-party network interface card,
refer to the documentation that came with the card and the vendor
support organization for help in troubleshooting.
502 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Diagrams
This section contains general circuit (wiring) diagrams.
Figure 242.
EN
Connectors on the controller board
Diagrams 503
Developer/
imaging
drum bias
supply
High-voltage
power supply
Figure 243.
General printer circuit diagram (1 of 4)
504 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 244.
EN
General printer circuit diagram (2 of 4)
Diagrams 505
Figure 245.
General printer circuit diagram (3 of 4)
506 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
Figure 246.
EN
General printer circuit diagram (4 of 4)
Diagrams 507
508 Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting
EN
8
Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Consumables, options, and accessories . . . . . . . . . . 511
Miscellaneous parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Illustrations and parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Major assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Printer covers and doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Internal cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Drum/cartridge drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Delivery drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Tray 3 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Tray 2 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Paper pick-up assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Registration frame assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Registration roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Feeder assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Tray 1 pick-up assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Tray 1 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Delivery cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Transfer belt assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
PCA assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
EN
Chapter contents 509
2,000-sheet input unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Multi-bin mailbox components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components. . . . . . . . . . 570
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
510 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Overview
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major assemblies in the
printer and their component parts. A table (materials list) follows each
exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists a reference number to
the illustration, part number, quantity, and description for each part.
Note
When looking for a part number, pay careful attention to any voltage
listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected
is for the correct printer model.
Ordering parts
All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from
Support Materials Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe
(SME). For information on contacting SMO or SME, see page 62.
Note
Parts that have no reference number or no part number are not field
replaceable and cannot be ordered.
Consumables, options, and accessories
The items listed in table 56 are available through your local authorized
HP dealer. To find a dealer near you (or if your local dealer is
temporarily out of stock), call the HP Customer Information Center at
(1) (800) 752-0900.
Note
EN
Order two sets of DIMMs if upgrading the printer memory; order one
set of DIMMs if replacing memory.
Overview 511
Table 56. Accessories and consumables
Part number Description
EIO accessories
Memory
C2986-60006 Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB
C7842A
8-MB synchronous DIMM
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install DRAM DIMMs in
synchronized pairs—for example, two 4-MB DIMMs.
C7843A
16-MB synchronous DIMM
C7845A
32-MB synchronous DIMM
C7846A
64-MB synchronous DIMM
C2985A
EIO hard disk
J3110A
Ethernet 10Base-T
J3111A
Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk)
J3112A
Token Ring
J3113A
10/100Base-TX
Paper handling accessories
C4782-60501 Duplexer (product number C4782A)
C4782-69501 Exchange duplexer
C4785-60534 Multi-bin mailbox (product number C4785A)
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit in order to install a multibin mailbox.
C4785-69519 Exchange multi-bin mailbox
C4788A
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
C4779A
3,000-sheet stacker
C7837A
Automatic document feeder
C7839A
1,000-sheet input paper deck
R98-1005000CN
500-sheet tray 2
512 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 56. Accessories and consumables (continued)
Cables
Consumables
Part number Description
C4149A
Black toner cartridge
C4150A
Cyan toner cartridge
C4151A
Magenta toner cartridge
C4152A
Yellow toner cartridge
C4153A
Drum kit
Imaging drum
Two air filters
Hand wipe
C4154A
Transfer kit
Transfer drum
Transfer belt
Cleaning roller
Charcoal filter
Hand wipe
C4155A
110-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
C4156A
220-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
92215S
Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable
92215N
HP LocalTalk cable kit
C2946A
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m (approximately 10 ft) with 25pin male/micro 36-pin male “C” size connector
Media
C4781-60504 C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000-sheet input unit)
EN
C2934A
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), 50 sheets
C2936A
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 sheets
C4179A
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), 200 sheets
C4179B
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized), 200 sheets
Ordering parts 513
Table 56. Accessories and consumables (continued)
Reference materials
Part number Description
5021-8956
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide
5021-0337
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
5091-6456
HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide
5966-5171
HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide (English)
C3989-60115 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Service and Support CD-ROM
C3983-67902 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self-Paced Training Kit (NTSC)
C3893-67903 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN Self-Paced Training Kit (PAL)
C3983-90919 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick Reference Guide
(English)
C7096-90904 HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, 8550 MFP Quick
Reference Guide (English)
C3989-90901 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Getting Started Guide
(English)
C7096-90923 HP Color LaserJet 8550, 8550 N, 8550 DN, 8550 GN, 8550 MFP Getting
Started Guide (English)
C3989-90937 HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN User’s Guide (English)
Miscellaneous parts
Table 57. Miscellaneous parts
Part number
Description
C3983-40001
Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models
C3983-40002
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 models
C3983-40003
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models
C3983-40004
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500 models
C3983-40005
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models
C3983-40006
Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models
C3983-40007
Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models
C3983-40008
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models
C3983-40009
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models
C3983-40010
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models
C3983-40011
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models
514 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 57. Miscellaneous parts (continued)
Part number
Description
C3983-40012
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models
C3983-40013
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models
C3983-40014
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models
C3983-40015
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models
C3983-40016
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models
C3983-67905
Formatter assembly
C4781-60500
Power box
C4785-60513
Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit
C4785-60531
Multi-bin mailbox, short C-link cable adapter
C4787-60503
Multi-bin mailbox, shipping lock kit
C7096-40001
Control panel overlay, Turkish, 8550 models
C7096-40002
Control panel overlay, Polish, 8550 models
C7096-40003
Control panel overlay, Hungarian, 8550 models
C7096-40004
Control panel overlay, English, 8550 models
C7096-40005
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 models
C7096-40006
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8550 models
C7096-40007
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8550 models
C7096-40008
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8550 models
C7096-40009
Control panel overlay, French, 8550 models
C7096-40010
Control panel overlay, German, 8550 models
C7096-40011
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8550 models
C7096-40012
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8550 models
C7096-40013
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8550 models
C7096-40014
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8550 models
C7096-40015
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8550 models
C7096-40016
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8550 models
C7096-40017
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8550 models
C7096-40018
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8550 models
C7096-40019
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models
J3113-61003
PCA, 10/100Base-T
RY7-5044-000CN
Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit)
EN
Ordering parts 515
Table 57. Miscellaneous parts (continued)
Part number
Description
XA9-0836-000CN
Screw, TP, M3 x 6, quantity=10
XA9-0926-000CN
Screw, TP, M4 x 8, quantity=10
XA9-0940-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4
XA9-0951-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=10
Illustrations and parts lists
The following illustrations and their assorted parts tables list the field
replaceable units (FRUs) for this printer. At the end of this chapter are
two cross-reference tables of all of the parts listed in this chapter:
table 91 on page 574 lists the parts in numerical order by part
number, and table 92 on page 587 lists the parts in alphabetical order.
Both tables are cross-referenced to the appropriate figure and
reference number in this chapter.
Compatible parts
The table below lists parts that have changed from HP Color LaserJet
8500 printers to HP Color LaserJet 8550 printers. These parts are
forward and backward compatible. Formatters, however, are not
interchangeable between models of printers.
Part
HP CLJ 8500 part #
HP CLJ 8550 part #
PCA, controller board
RG5-3037-000CN
RG5-3037-120CN
Developer/imaging drum RG5-3026-000CN
bias supply
RG5-3026-030CN
High-voltage power
supply
RG5-3943-000CN
RG5-3943-000CN
Density sensor
assembly
RG5-3057-000CN
RG5-3057-000CN
PCA, carousel motor
(M1)
RG5-3084-000CN
RG5-3084-020CN
516 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Major assembly locations
Black cartridge
cam assembly
Delivery assembly
Black cartridge
guide assembly
Delivery drive
assembly
Left cover
feeder assembly
Paper pick-up
assembly
Transfer belt
assembly
Registration roller
assembly
Tray 1 pick-up
assembly
Registration frame
assembly
Figure 247.
EN
Tray 1 assembly
Major assembly locations (1 of 2)
Illustrations and parts lists 517
Solenoid assembly
Drum/cartridge
drive assembly
Delivery frame
assembly
Fuser
assembly
Tray 2
Tray 3
Color toner cartridge
Figure 248.
Black toner cartridge
Imaging drum
Major assembly locations (2 of 2)
518 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Printer covers and doors
Figure 249.
Printer covers and doors (1 of 4)—Filler panel for tray 2
(HP Color LaserJet 8550 base model only)
Table 58. Printer covers and doors (1 of 4)—Filler panel for tray 2
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
Filler panel for tray 2
RB2-0207-000CN
1
2
Filler panel bracket for tray 2
RB2-0208-000CN
1
3
Screw, filler panel bracket, M4X8
XA9-0926-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 519
Figure 250.
Printer covers and doors (2 of 4)
520 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 59. Printer doors and covers (2 of 4)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
3
Cover assembly, front
RG0-0112-000CN
1
3B
Lever, shutter
RA0-0008-000CN
1
3D
Strap, front door support
RB1-4497-000CN
1
3E
Latch, roller action
RB1-5153-000CN
1
4
Cover assembly, left upper
RG0-0113-000CN
1
4B
Lever, left upper door
RB1-6485-000CN
1
4C
Spring, left upper door lever
RB1-6486-000CN
1
8
Cover, hinge
RA0-0068-000CN
1
9
Cover, front right
RA0-0069-000CN
1
10
Cover, left lower
RB1-6480-000CN
1
11
Tray, face-up
RB1-6491-000CN
1
12
Cover, power switch
RB1-6492-000CN
1
Filler panel for tray 2
RB2-0207-000CN
1
Filler panel bracket for tray 2
RB2-0208-000CN
1
Filler panel bracket screw for tray 2
XA9-0926-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 521
Figure 251.
Printer covers and doors (3 of 4)
522 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 60. Printer doors and covers (3 of 4)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
Filter, large air
RB1-9807-000CN
1
2
Cover assembly, top
RG0-0111-000CN
1
2
Cover assembly, top (HP CLJ 8550 MFP only)
1
Note This cover is the molded plastic ONLY; electronics are not attached. The
cover allows for attachment of the copy module frame.
2D
Stop, flip-up media
RA0-0073-000CN
1
5
Cover assembly, rear
RG0-0115-000CN
1
6
Cover, left rear
RA0-0065-000CN
1
6A
Stopper, open/close
RB1-6484-000CN
1
19
Filter, small air
RB1-9808-000CN
1
20
Cover, auxiliary
RA0-0078-000CN
1
39
Cover, fan
RF0-0012-000CN
1
51
Cover, rear fan housing
RG0-0017-000CN
1
51A
Support, cover
RA0-0079-000CN
1
51B
Spring, compression
RS5-2719-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 523
Figure 252.
Printer covers and doors (4 of 4)
524 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 61. Printer covers and doors (4 of 4)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
7
Cover, right rear
RA0-0067-000CN
1
16
Cover assembly, right lower
RG5-3096-000CN
1
16C
Stopper, open/close
RB1-6484-000CN
1
16D
Lever, right lower cover
RB1-6485-000CN
1
16E
Spring, compression
RB1-6486-000CN
1
16G
Roller, paper
RB1-6488-000CN
2
17
Lever, right upper door
RB1-6485-000CN
1
22
Spring, right lower door lever
RB1-6486-000CN
1
26
Spring, torsion
RB1-9798-000CN
1
31
Cover, right subassembly
RF5-1995-000CN
1
32
Cover, density sensor
RB1-9537-000CN
1
35
Density sensor assembly
RG5-3057-000CN
1
35A
Brush, cleaning
RB1-9617-000CN
1
36
Preconditioning exposure LED assembly
RG5-3980-000CN
1
41
Filter, charcoal
RB1-9836-000CN
1
42
Fan 3 (FM3)
RH7-1393-000CN
1
46
Cover, tray 1 side gear
RB1-9547-000CN
1
54
Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly)
RG5-3962-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 525
Internal cover assembly
Figure 253.
Internal cover assembly
526 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 62. Internal cover assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
Cover assembly, inner left
RG0-0104-000CN
1
2
Cover, inner 2
RA0-0026-000CN
1
3
Cover, inner 3
RA0-0027-000CN
1
4
Cover, inner 4
RF0-0013-000CN
1
4A
Label, “CAUTION”
RS5-8380-000CN
1
5
Waste toner tray
RB1-9804-000CN
1
6
Latch, roller action
RF0-0003-000CN
1
7
Media jam knob
RB1-9928-000CN
1
10
Cover, waste toner tray
RA0-0083-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 527
Internal components
Figure 254.
Internal components (1 of 6)
528 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 63. Internal components parts (1 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
2
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3080-000CN
1
3
Plate, duct mount
RF5-2036-000CN
1
4
Duct, rear lower air
RB1-9401-000CN
1
6
Carousel stop assembly
RG5-3053-000CN
1
8
PCA, fusing delivery sensor
RG5-3992-000CN
1
11
Cover, carousel stop
RB1-9789-000CN
1
15
Connector holder assembly
RG5-3031-000CN
1
16
Cable, main
RG5-3097-000CN
1
18
Cable, sensor
RG5-3144-000CN
1
19
Cable, DC power
RG5-3921-000CN
1
20
Cable, power signal
RG5-3922-000CN
1
21
PCA, cartridge release lever
RG5-3961-000CN
1
25
Power supply assembly (110 V)
Power supply assembly (220 V)
RH3-2185-000CN
RH3-2187-000CN
1
30
Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672)
WC4-5150-000CN
1
140
Face-up solenoid assembly
RG5-3022-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 529
40
Figure 255.
Internal components (2 of 6)
530 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 64. Internal components parts (2 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
6
Lever assembly, transfer drum
RG5-3046-000CN
1
7
Lever assembly, pressure
RG5-3045-000CN
1
8
Bushing
RS5-1119-000CN
1
10
Lever assembly, black cartridge
RG5-3087-000CN
1
22
Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644)
WC4-5136-000CN
1
23
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240
WG8-5210-000CN
1
29
Bushing
RS5-1317-000CN
1
30
Bushing
RS5-1317-000CN
1
40
Crossmember
RB1-0010-000CN
1
501
Ring, E
XD2-1100-642CN
2
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 531
Figure 256.
Internal components (3 of 6)
532 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 65. Internal components parts (3 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
Cover, right rear lower corner
RA0-0074-000CN
1
2
Transfer drum contact assembly
RG5-3044-000CN
1
4
Spring, compression
RB1-9675-000CN
3
5
Rod, power switch
RB1-6463-000CN
1
6
Spring, leaf
RB1-6909-000CN
1
7
Gear, 11T
RB1-9424-000CN
1
8
Sensor assembly, color toner
RG5-3034-000CN
1
9
Cover, cable
RB1-9805-000CN
1
15
Mount, clutch
RB1-9828-000CN
1
20
Developer/imaging drum bias supply
RG5-3026-030CN
1
21
High-voltage power supply
RG5-3943-000CN
1
24
Post charger HV module
RH3-0211-000CN
1
25
Cleaning roller HV module
RH3-0228-000CN
1
26
Motor, carousel (M1)
RH7-1325-000CN
1
27
Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4)
RH7-5168-000CN
1
28
Spring, tension
RS5-2465-000CN
1
30
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
PCA
RG5-3966-000CN
1
39
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
RH3-0234-000CN
1
501
Ring, E
XD2-1100-502CN
2
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 533
Figure 257.
Internal components (4 of 6)
534 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 66. Internal components parts (4 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
3
Tray rail assembly
RG5-1851-000CN
1
5
Cable, main motor
RG5-3942-000CN
1
6
Cable, carousel
RG5-3923-000CN
1
7
Cover, gear
RB1-9403-000CN
1
10
Transfer swing assembly
RG5-3010-000CN
1
12
Cable, delivery connector
RG5-3147-000CN
1
13
Lever, registration roller
RB1-9580-000CN
1
18
Main drive assembly
RG5-3066-000CN
1
20
Cable, delivery
RG5-3104-000CN
1
21
Motor, main (M4)
RH7-1323-000CN
1
24
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN
1
26
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
XA9-0849-000CN
10
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 535
Figure 258.
Internal components (5 of 6)
536 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 67. Internal components parts (5 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
3
Cover, cable
RB1-9948-000CN
1
7
Shield case assembly
RG5-3023-000CN
1
7D
Rail, PCA
RB2-0005-000CN
1
14
Gear, 14T
RB1-9955-000CN
1
15
Gear, 14T
RB1-9956-000CN
1
17
Transfer drum
RG5-3039-000CN
1
18
Laser/scanner unit
RG5-3936-000CN
1
24
Sensor assembly, toner waste
RG5-3934-000CN
1
37
Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12
XA9-0940-000CN
4
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 537
Figure 259.
Internal components (6 of 6)
538 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 68. Internal components parts (6 of 6)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
3
Holder, fan
RF5-2025-000CN
1
4
Duct
RB1-9682-000CN
1
7
Fan 2 (FM2)
RH7-1373-000CN
1
8
Fan 1 (FM1)
RH7-1330-000CN
1
14
Static charge eliminator assembly
RG5-3973-000CN
1
15
Cleaning roller assembly
RG5-3975-000CN
1
16
Spring, torsion
RS5-2698-000CN
1
19
Bushing
RS5-1319-000CN
2
20
Spring, torsion
RS5-2697-000CN
1
21
Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly
RG5-3111-000CN
1
30
Cassette crossmember assembly
RG5-3089-000CN
1
32
Rail, tray 3
RF5-1396-000CN
1
36
Transfer mount assembly
RG5-3008-000CN
1
37
Sensor slider assembly
RG5-3131-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 539
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
40
Figure 260.
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
Table 69. Drum/cartridge drive assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
RG5-3065-000CN
1
23
Motor, cartridge (M3)
RH7-1328-000CN
1
36
Developing rotary
RG5-3033-000CN
1
40
ITD Guide
RB2-010-000CN
1
540 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Delivery drive assembly
Figure 261.
Delivery drive assembly
Table 70. Delivery drive assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Delivery drive assembly
RG5-3067-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 541
Tray 3 assembly
Figure 262.
Tray 3 assembly
Table 71. Tray 3 assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Tray 3
—
1
26
Plate, end
RF5-1484-000CN
1
542 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Tray 2 assembly
Figure 263.
Tray 2 assembly
Table 72. Tray 2 assembly
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Tray 2
R98-1005-000CN
1
26
Plate, end
RF5-1484-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 543
Paper pick-up assembly
41
40
Figure 264.
Paper pick-up assembly (1 of 3)
544 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Figure 265.
EN
Paper pick-up assembly (2 of 3)
Illustrations and parts lists 545
Figure 266.
Paper pick-up assembly (3 of 3)
546 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 73. Paper pick-up assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Paper pick-up assembly
RG5-3132-000CN
1
20
Roller, feed
RF5-1834-000CN
1
21
Roller, pick-up
RF5-1835-000CN
2
40
Pin
RB1-0153-000CN
1
41
Torsion spring
RB1-6589-000CN
1
48
Flag, paper sensing
RB1-6557-000CN
1
49
Spring, torsion
RB1-6558-020CN
1
51
Arm, sensor
RG5-1859-000CN
1
52
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1230
WG8-0291-000CN
1
87
Motor, pick-up (M5)
RH7-1350-000CN
1
103
PCA, paper pick-up
RG5-1860-000CN
1
501
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4 x 10
XB4-7401-007CN
6
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 547
Registration frame assembly
Figure 267.
Registration frame assembly
Table 74. Registration frame assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Registration frame assembly
RG5-3007-000CN
1
2
Spring, torsion
RB1-6409-000CN
1
3
Arm, sensor
RB1-6417-000CN
1
4
PCA, photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240
WG8-5210-000CN
1
6
Cover, sensor
RB1-9586-000CN
1
7
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3032-000CN
1
8
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3079-000CN
1
548 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Registration roller assembly
Figure 268.
Registration roller assembly
Table 75. Registration roller assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Registration roller assembly
RG5-3009-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 549
Feeder assembly
Figure 269.
Feeder assembly
Table 76. Feeder assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Feeder assembly
RG5-3059-000CN
1
550 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
Figure 270.
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
Table 77. Tray 1 pick-up assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
RG5-3054-000CN
1
10
Roller, tray 1 pick-up
RB1-9526-000CN
1
40
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240
WG8-5210-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 551
Tray 1 assembly
Figure 271.
Tray 1 assembly
Table 78. Tray 1 assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Tray 1 assembly
RG5-3134-000CN
1
552 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Delivery assembly
Figure 272.
Delivery assembly
Table 79. Delivery assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Delivery assembly
RG0-0110-000CN
1
11
Lever, paper sensing
RB1-6692-000CN
1
12
Lever, paper height
RA0-0112-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 553
Delivery cover assembly
Figure 273.
Delivery cover assembly
Table 80. Delivery cover assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Delivery cover assembly
RG5-3108-000CN
1
12
Holder, flapper
RB1-9751-000CN
1
13
Cover, left upper
RB2-0057-000CN
1
24
Hinge, stopper (delivery)
RF5-2701-000CN
1
554 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Transfer belt assembly
Figure 274.
Transfer belt assembly
Table 81. Transfer belt assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Transfer belt assembly
RG5-3047-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 555
Fuser assembly
Figure 275.
Fuser assembly (1 of 2)
556 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Figure 276.
EN
Fuser assembly (2 of 2)
Illustrations and parts lists 557
Table 82. Fuser assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
—
Fuser assembly (120 V)
Fuser assembly (220 V)
RG5-3060-000CN
RG5-3061-000CN
1
8
Lever, holding, right
RB1-9704-000CN
1
9
Lever, holding, left
RB1-9705-000CN
1
25
Lever, release
RB1-9748-000CN
1
558 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
PCA assemblies
7
Figure 277.
PCA assemblies
Table 83. PCA assembly parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
PCA, cassette-size sensing
RG5-1845-000CN
1
2
PCA, main relay
RG5-3036-000CN
1
3
PCA, controller board
PCA, controller board for HP CLJ 8550 MFP
RG5-3037-000CN
FG2-9470-000CN
1
4
PCA, carousel motor (M1)
RG5-3084-020CN
1
5
PCA, subrelay
RG5-3085-000CN
1
6
PCA, tray 1
RG5-1884-000CN
1
7
PCA, ECO-2 assembly (HP CLJ 8550 MPF)
FG6-3597-000CN
Interface PCB assembly (HP CLJ 8550 MPF) FG2-9545-000CN
EN
Interface cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF)
FG2-9479-000CN
IOT cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF)
FG2-9476-000CN
ECO-2 cable (HP CLJ 8550 MPF)
FG2-9543-000CN
Illustrations and parts lists 559
2,000-sheet input unit components
Figure 278.
2,000-sheet input unit covers and doors
560 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 84. 2,000-sheet input unit cover and door parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
71
Cover, back
RB2-2519-000CN
1
72
Cassette size labels
RS5-8611-000CN
1
73
Cassette size plate
RB1-6894-000CN
1
74
Casters
XZ9-0442-000CN
4
75
Feed and separation rollers
RF5-1834-000CN
2
76
Cover, front (with LED window)
RF5-2568-000CN
1
77
Cover, left
RF5-2646-000CN
1
78
Locating pin, metal (positioning)
RF5-2556-000CN
3
79
Tray 4
RG5-3845-000CN
1
80
Paper deck drive assembly
RG5-3851-000CN
1
81
Paper deck drive bushing
RS5-1399-000CN
1
82
Paper pick-up assembly
RG5-3843-000CN
1
83
Roller, pick-up
RF5-1835-000CN
1
84
Plate paper limit back
RG5-4201-000CN
1
85
Plate paper limit middle
RG5-3849-000CN
1
86
Plate paper reference front
RF5-3850-000CN
1
87
Cover, rIght
RB1-7832-020CN
1
88
Cover, top (label included)
RG5-2644-000CN
1
89
Vertical transfer unit (VTU)
RG5-3854-000CN
1
Kit 1
Screws kit (2,000-sheet input unit)
RY7-5044-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 561
Figure 279.
2,000-sheet input unit internal components
562 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 85. 2,000-sheet input unit internal component parts
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
91
Front LED PCA with holder and cable
RG5-4204-000CN
1
92
Cable, main
RG5-3919-000CN
1
93
Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf)
RB1-7835-000CN
2
94
Metallic retaining tab (plate stop)
RB1-7677-000CN
2
95
Outriggers
RG5-4205-000CN
1
96
Paper deck PCA
RG5-3908-000CN
1
97
Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly
RG5-2166-000CN
1
98
Paper size sensor PCA assembly
RG5-2168-000CN
1
99
Power supply cable
RG5-3909-000CN
1
100
Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.15 A
VD7-1893-151CN
1
101
Spring, tension
RS5-2561-000CN
2
102
Universal power supply assembly
RG5-4021-000CN
1
Kit 1
Screws kit (2,000-sheet input unit)
RY7-5044-000CN
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 563
Multi-bin mailbox components
Figure 280.
Multi-bin mailbox components (1 of 3)
564 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 86. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (1 of 3)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
20
User LED PCA (with cable)
C4785-60515
1
21
Adjustable fixed caster
C4785-60511
2
22
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
C4785-60516
1
23
Blind cover
C4785-60503
1
24
Face-down bin
C4785-60502
1
25
Face-up bin
C3764-60505
1
26
Cover, front
C4785-60504
1
27
Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input
unit in order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
C4785-69519
1
28
Multi-bin mailbox assembly
(product number C4785A)
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input
unit in order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
C4785-60534
1
29
Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box)
C4785-60532
1
30
Caster, fixed
C4785-60510
2
31
Cover, top
C3764-60555
1
Kit 1
Plastic parts
1G Spacer plastic
C4785-60519
1
Kit 3
Hardware
3A Screw, Torx
3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10
3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12
C4785-60521
1
Kit of rollers for jam access door
C4785-60526
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 565
Figure 281.
Multi-bin mailbox components (2 of 3)
566 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 87. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (2 of 3)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
32
Flipper assembly (with cable “request”)
C4785-60529
1
33
Head assembly (with metallic tape)
C4785-60506
1
34
Metallic tape and housing assembly
C4785-60507
1
Kit 1
Plastic parts
1A Anti-curl string
1B Spring for anti-curl string
1C Pulley, small bottom
C4785-60519
1
Kit 3
Hardware
3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10
3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12
3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10
3F Screw, Caster
C4785-60521
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 567
Figure 282.
Multi-bin mailbox components (3 of 3)
568 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 88. Multi-bin mailbox component parts (3 of 3)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
35
Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable)
C4785-60514
1
36
Attachment clip
C4785-60512
2
37
Back cover
C4785-60505
1
38
Delivery head position motor
C3764-60507
1
39
Input paper guide (nosepiece)
C3764-60561
1
40
Power supply
C4785-60501
1
41
Transport belt motor (with fan)
C4785-60518
1
Kit 1
Plastic parts
1D Cable holder round gasket
1E Flat cable holder edge
1F Flat cable holder
C4785-60519
1
Kit 2
Cables
2A Switch, interlock
2B Delivery head motor cable
2C Flipper sensor controller cable
2D Flipper encoder controller
2E Flipper motor controller
2F ESD cable
2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable
C4785-60520
1
Kit 3
Hardware
3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10
C4785-60521
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 569
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components
5
4
3
2
6
7
1
Figure 283.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2)
570 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 89. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (1 of 2)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
1
Front cover
C4788-60505
1
2
Foot cover
C4788-60525
1
3
Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker)
Stacker bin (for stacker)
C4788-60528
C4779-60505
1
1
4
Face-up bin
C4788-60512
1
5
Back cover
C4788-60504
1
6
Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/
stacker)
Stacker door assembly (for stacker)
C4788-60507
1
C4779-60502
1
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/ C4788-60508
stacker)
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker) C4779-60503
1
7
EN
1
Illustrations and parts lists 571
9
8
20
21
10
22
19
11
18
12
13
15
17
16
14
Figure 284.
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2)
572 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 90. 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker components (2 of 2)
Ref.
Description
Part number
Qty.
8
LED PCA
C4788-60510
1
9
Flipper assembly
C4788-60501
1
10
Flipper ribbon cable
C4788-60524
1
11
Stapler (applies only to stapler/stacker)
C4788-60519
1
12
Stapler refill housing
C4788-60522
1
13
Carriage assembly (applies only to stapler/
stacker)
C4788-60503
1
14
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
C4788-60523
1
15
Adjustable caster
C4788-60516
2
16
Stationary caster
C4788-60515
2
17
Power supply
C4788-60511
1
18
Stapler controller PCA (for stapler/stacker)
Stacker controller PCA (for stacker)
C4788-60509
C4779-60507
1
1
19
Offset module (for stacker)
C4779-60508
1
20
Accumulator assembly (for stapler/stacker)
C4788-60502
1
21
Interlock
C4788-60514
1
22
Safety switch assembly
C4788-60517
1
Wings kit (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60521
1
Paper stacker clip
C4788-60527
1
Optical sensors kit
C4779-60509
1
EN
Illustrations and parts lists 573
Numerical parts list
Table 91. Numerical parts list
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
J3113-61003
PCA, 10/100Base-T
—
—
C3983-40016
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40001
Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40006
Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40011
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models
—
—
C3989-90901
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN
Getting Started Guide (English)
—
—
C4785-60526
Kit of rollers—jam access door (multi-bin
mailbox)
280
—
C4785-60507
Metallic tape and housing assembly
281
34
C4785-60501
Power supply
282
40
C4785-60515
User LED PCA (with cable)
280
20
C4788-60504
Back cover
283
5
C4788-60525
Foot cover
283
2
C4788-60510
LED PCA
284
8
C4788-60517
Safety switch assembly
284
22
5021-8956
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification
Guide
—
—
5021-0337
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
—
—
5091-6456
HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide
—
—
5966-5171
HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide
(English)
—
—
C7096-40003
Control panel overlay, Hungarian, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40013
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40008
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8550 models —
—
C7096-40018
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8550 models
—
—
92215N
HP LocalTalk cable kit
—
—
92215S
Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable
—
—
574 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
C2934A
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), —
50 sheets
—
C2936A
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 —
sheets
—
C2946A
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m
(approximately 10 ft) with 25-pin male/micro
36-pin male “C” size connector
—
—
C2985A
EIO hard disk
—
—
C2986-60006
Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB
—
—
C3764-60505
Face-up bin
280
25
C3764-60507
Delivery head position motor
282
38
C3764-60555
Cover, top
280
31
C3764-60561
Input paper guide (nosepiece)
282
39
C3893-67903
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN SelfPaced Training Kit (PAL)
—
—
C3913A
64-MB synchronous DIMM
—
—
C3983-40002
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 —
models
—
C3983-40003
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40004
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500
models
—
—
C3983-40005
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models —
—
C3983-40007
Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40008
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40009
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40010
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40012
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40013
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40014
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-40015
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models
—
—
C3983-67902
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN SelfPaced Training Kit (NTSC)
—
—
C3983-67905
Formatter assembly
—
—
EN
Figure
Ref.
Illustrations and parts lists 575
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
C3983-90919
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick —
Reference Guide (English)
—
C3989-60115
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN
Service and Support CD-ROM
—
—
C3989-90937
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN
User’s Guide (English)
—
—
C4149A
Black toner cartridge
—
—
C4150A
Cyan toner cartridge
—
—
C4151A
Magenta toner cartridge
—
—
C4152A
Yellow toner cartridge
—
—
C4153A
Drum kit
Imaging drum
Two air filters
Hand wipe
—
—
C4154A
Transfer kit
Transfer drum
Transfer belt
Cleaning roller
Charcoal filter
Hand wipe
—
—
C4155A
110-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
—
—
C4156A
220-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
—
—
C4179A
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), —
200 sheets
—
C4179B
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized),
200 sheets
—
—
C4779-60502
Stacker door assembly (for stacker)
283
6
C4779-60503
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker)
283
7
C4779-60505
Stacker bin (for stacker)
283
3
C4779-60507
Stacker controller PCA (stacker)
284
18
C4779-60508
Offset module (stacker)
284
19
C4779-60509
Optical sensors kit
284
—
576 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
Figure
Ref.
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
C4781-60500
Power box
—
—
C4781-60504
C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000sheet input unit)
—
—
C4782-60501
Duplexer (product number C4782A)
—
—
C4782-69501
Exchange duplexer
—
—
C4785-60502
Face-down bin
280
24
C4785-60503
Blind cover
280
23
C4785-60504
Cover, front
280
26
C4785-60505
Cover, back
282
37
C4785-60506
Head assembly (with metallic tape)
281
33
C4785-60510
Fixed casters
280
30
C4785-60511
Adjustable fixed caster
280
21
C4785-60512
Attachment clip
282
36
C4785-60513
Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit
—
—
C4785-60514
Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable)
282
35
C4785-60516
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
280
22
C4785-60518
Transport belt motor (with fan)
282
41
C4785-60519
Plastic parts
1A Anti-curl string
1B Spring for anti-curl string
1C Pulley, small bottom
1D Cable holder round gasket
1E Flat cable holder edge
1F Flat cable holder
1G Spacer plastic
281
Kit 1
C4785-60520
Cables
2A Switch, interlock
2B Delivery head motor cable
2C Flipper sensor controller cable
2D Flipper encoder controller
2E Flipper motor controller
2F ESD cable
2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable
282
Kit 2
EN
Numerical parts list 577
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
C4785-60521
Hardware
3A Screw, Torx
3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10
3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10
3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12
3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10
3F Screw, Caster
281
Kit 3
C4785-60529
Flipper assembly (with cable “request”)
281
32
C4785-60531
Multi-bin mailbox, short C-link cable adapter
(extension)
—
—
C4785-60532
Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box)
280
29
C4785-60534
Multi-bin mailbox assembly
280
(product number C4785A)
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input tray in
order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
28
C4785-69519
Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly
280
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit
in order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
27
C4787-60503
Multi-bin mailbox, shipping lock kit
—
—
C4788-60501
Flipper assembly
284
9
C4788-60502
Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker)
284
20
C4788-60503
Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker)
284
13
C4788-60505
Front cover
283
1
C4788-60507
Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/
stacker)
283
6
C4788-60508
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/
stacker)
283
7
C4788-60509
Stapler controller PCA (stapler/stacker)
284
18
C4788-60511
Power supply
284
17
C4788-60512
Face-up bin
283
4
C4788-60514
Interlock
284
21
C4788-60515
Stationary caster
284
16
C4788-60516
Adjustable caster
284
15
C4788-60519
Stapler (stapler/stacker)
284
11
C4788-60521
Wings kit (stapler/stacker)
284
—
C4788-60522
Stapler refill housing
284
12
578 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
C4788-60523
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
284
14
C4788-60524
Flipper ribbon cable
284
10
C4788-60527
Paper stacker clip
284
—
C4788-60528
Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker)
283
3
C7096-40001
Control panel overlay, Turkish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40002
Control panel overlay, Polish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40004
Control panel overlay, English, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40005
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 —
models
—
C7096-40006
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40007
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8550
models
—
—
C7096-40009
Control panel overlay, French, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40010
Control panel overlay, German, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40011
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40012
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40014
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40015
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40016
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40017
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8550 models
—
—
C7096-40019
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models
—
—
C7842A
—
8-MB synchronous DIMM
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install
DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs—for
example, two 4-MB DIMMs.
—
C7843A
16-MB synchronous DIMM
—
—
C7845A
32-MB synchronous DIMM
—
—
C7846A
64-MB synchronous DIMM
—
—
J3110A
Ethernet 10Base-T
—
—
J3111A
Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk) —
—
J3112A
Token Ring
—
—
J3113A
10/100Base-TX
—
—
RA0-0008-000CN
Lever, shutter
250
3B
EN
Numerical parts list 579
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RA0-0026-000CN
Cover, inner 2
253
2
RA0-0027-000CN
Cover, inner 3
253
3
RA0-0065-000CN
Cover, left rear
251
6
RA0-0067-000CN
Cover, right rear
252
7
RA0-0068-000CN
Cover, hinge
250
8
RA0-0069-000CN
Cover, front right
250
9
RA0-0073-000CN
Stop, flip-up media
251
2D
RA0-0074-000CN
Cover, right rear lower corner
256
1
RA0-0078-000CN
Cover, auxiliary
251
20
RA0-0079-000CN
Support, cover
251
51A
RA0-0083-000CN
Cover, waste toner tray
253
10
RA0-0112-000CN
Lever, paper height
272
12
RB1-0153-000CN
Pin
264
40
RB1-4497-000CN
Strap, front door support
250
3D
RB1-5153-000CN
Latch, roller action
250
3E
RB1-6409-000CN
Spring, torsion
267
2
RB1-6417-000CN
Arm, sensor
267
3
RB1-6463-000CN
Rod, power switch
256
5
RB1-6480-000CN
Cover, left lower
250
10
RB1-6484-000CN
Stopper, open/close
251, 252
6A, 16C
RB1-6485-000CN
Lever, left upper door
250
4B
RB1-6485-000CN
Lever, right lower cover
252
16D
RB1-6485-000CN
Lever, right upper door
252
17
RB1-6486-000CN
Spring, compression
252
16E
RB1-6486-000CN
Spring, left upper door lever
250
4C
RB1-6486-000CN
Spring, right lower door lever
252
22
RB1-6488-000CN
Roller, paper
252
16G
RB1-6491-000CN
Tray, face-up
250
11
RB1-6492-000CN
Cover, power switch
250
12
RB1-6557-000CN
Flag, paper sensing
264
48
RB1-6558-020CN
Spring, torsion
264
49
580 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RB1-6589-000CN
Torsion spring
264
41
RB1-6692-000CN
Lever, paper sensing
272
11
RB1-6894-000CN
Cassette size plate
278
73
RB1-6909-000CN
Spring, leaf
256
6
RB1-7677-000CN
Metallic retaining tab (plate stop)
279
94
RB1-7832-020CN
Cover, right
278
87
RB1-7835-000CN
Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf)
279
93
RB1-9401-000CN
Duct, rear lower air
254
4
RB1-9403-000CN
Cover, gear
257
7
RB1-9424-000CN
Gear, 11T
256
7
RB1-9526-000CN
Roller, tray 1 pick-up
270
10
RB1-9537-000CN
Cover, density sensor
252
32
RB1-9547-000CN
Cover, tray 1 side gear
252
46
RB1-9580-000CN
Lever, registration roller
257
13
RB1-9586-000CN
Cover, sensor
267
6
RB1-9617-000CN
Brush, cleaning
252
35A
RB1-9675-000CN
Spring, compression
256
4
RB1-9682-000CN
Duct
259
4
RB1-9704-000CN
Lever, holding, right
275
8
RB1-9705-000CN
Lever, holding, left
275
9
RB1-9748-000CN
Lever, release
275
25
RB1-9751-000CN
Holder, flapper
273
12
RB1-9789-000CN
Cover, carousel stop
254
11
RB1-9798-000CN
Spring, torsion
252
26
RB1-9800-000CN
Crossmember
255
40
RB1-9804-000CN
Waste toner tray
253
5
RB1-9805-000CN
Cover, cable
256
9
RB1-9807-000CN
Filter, large air
251
1
RB1-9808-000CN
Filter, small air
251
19
RB1-9828-000CN
Mount, clutch
256
15
RB1-9836-000CN
Filter, charcoal
252
41
EN
Numerical parts list 581
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RB1-9928-000CN
Media jam knob
253
7
RB1-9948-000CN
Cover, cable
258
3
RB1-9955-000CN
Gear, 14T
258
14
RB1-9956-000CN
Gear, 14T
258
15
RB2-0005-000CN
Rail, PCA
258
7D
RB2-0010-000CN
ITD guide
260
40
RB2-0057-000CN
Cover, left upper
273
13
RB2-0207-000CN
Filler panel for tray 2
249
1
RB2-0208-000CN
Filler panel bracket for tray 2
249
2
RB2-2519-000CN
Cover, back
278
71
RF0-0003-000CN
Latch, roller action
253
6
RF0-0012-000CN
Cover, fan
251
39
RF0-0013-000CN
Cover, inner 4
253
4
RF5-1396-000CN
Rail, tray 3
259
32
RF5-1484-000CN
Plate, end
262, 263
26
RF5-1834-000CN
Feed and separation rollers
278
75
RF5-1834-000CN
Roller, feed
264
20
RF5-1835-000CN
Roller, pick-up
264, 278
21, 83
RF5-1995-000CN
Cover, right subassembly
252
31
RF5-2025-000CN
Holder, fan
259
3
RF5-2036-000CN
Plate, duct mount
254
3
RF5-2556-000CN
Locating pin, metal (positioning)
278
78
RF5-2568-000CN
Cover, front (with LED window)
278
76
RF5-2646-000CN
Cover, left
278
77
RF5-2701-000CN
Hinge, stopper (delivery)
273
24
RF5-3850-000CN
Plate paper reference front
278
86
RG0-0017-000CN
Cover, rear fan housing
251
51
RG0-0104-000CN
Cover assembly, inner left
253
1
RG0-0110-000CN
Delivery assembly
272
—
RG0-0111-000CN
Cover assembly, top
251
2
RG0-0112-000CN
Cover assembly, front
250
3
582 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RG0-0113-000CN
Cover assembly, left upper
250
4
RG0-0115-000CN
Cover assembly, rear
251
5
RG5-1845-000CN
PCA, cassette-size sensing
277
1
RG5-1851-000CN
Tray rail assembly
257
3
RG5-1859-000CN
Arm, sensor
264
51
RG5-1860-000CN
PCA, paper pick-up
264
103
RG5-1884-000CN
PCA, tray 1
277
6
RG5-2166-000CN
Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly
279
97
RG5-2168-000CN
Paper size sensor PCA assembly
279
98
RG5-2644-000CN
Cover, top (label included)
278
88
RG5-3007-000CN
Registration frame assembly
267
—
RG5-3008-000CN
Transfer mount assembly
259
36
RG5-3009-000CN
Registration roller assembly
268
—
RG5-3010-000CN
Transfer swing assembly
257
10
RG5-3022-000CN
Face-up solenoid assembly
254
140
RG5-3023-000CN
Shield case assembly
258
7
RG5-3026-030CN
Developer/imaging drum bias supply
256
20
RG5-3031-000CN
Connector holder assembly
254
15
RG5-3032-000CN
PCA, photosensor
267
7
RG5-3033-000CN
Developing rotary
260
36
RG5-3034-000CN
Sensor assembly, color toner
256
8
RG5-3036-000CN
PCA, main relay
277
2
RG5-3037-000CN
PCA, controller board, 8500 models
277
3
RG5-3037-0120CN
PCA, controller board, 8550 models
277
3
RG5-3039-000CN
Transfer drum
258
17
RG5-3044-000CN
Transfer drum contact assembly
256
2
RG5-3045-000CN
Lever assembly, pressure
255
7
RG5-3046-000CN
Lever assembly, transfer drum
255
6
RG5-3047-000CN
Transfer belt assembly
274
—
RG5-3053-000CN
Carousel stop assembly
254
6
RG5-3054-000CN
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
270
—
EN
Numerical parts list 583
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RG5-3057-000CN
Density sensor assembly
252
35
RG5-3059-000CN
Feeder assembly
269
—
RG5-3060-000CN
Fuser assembly (120 V)
275
—
RG5-3061-000CN
Fuser assembly (220 V)
275
—
RG5-3065-000CN
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
260
—
RG5-3066-000CN
Main drive assembly
257
18
RG5-3067-000CN
Delivery drive assembly
261
—
RG5-3079-000CN
PCA, photosensor
267
8
RG5-3080-000CN
PCA, photosensor
254
2
RG5-3084-020CN
PCA, carousel motor (M1)
277
4
RG5-3085-000CN
PCA, subrelay
277
5
RG5-3087-000CN
Lever assembly, black cartridge
255
10
RG5-3089-000CN
Cassette crossmember assembly
259
30
RG5-3096-000CN
Cover assembly, right lower
252
16
RG5-3097-000CN
Cable, main
254
16
RG5-3104-000CN
Cable, delivery
257
20
RG5-3108-000CN
Delivery cover assembly
273
—
RG5-3111-000CN
Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly
259
21
RG5-3131-000CN
Sensor slider assembly
259
37
RG5-3132-000CN
Paper pick-up assembly
264
—
RG5-3134-000CN
Tray 1 assembly
271
—
RG5-3144-000CN
Cable, sensor
254
18
RG5-3147-000CN
Cable, delivery connector
257
12
RG5-3843-000CN
Paper pick-up assembly
278
82
RG5-3845-000CN
Tray 4
278
79
RG5-3849-000CN
Plate paper limit middle
278
85
RG5-3851-000CN
Paper deck drive assembly
278
80
RG5-3854-000CN
Vertical transfer unit (VTU)
278
89
RG5-3908-000CN
Paper deck PCA
279
96
RG5-3909-000CN
Power supply cable
279
99
RG5-3919-000CN
Cable, main
279
92
584 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RG5-3921-000CN
Cable, DC power
254
19
RG5-3922-000CN
Cable, power signal
254
20
RG5-3923-000CN
Cable, carousel
257
6
RG5-3934-000CN
Sensor assembly, toner waste
258
24
RG5-3936-000CN
Laser/scanner unit
258
18
RG5-3942-000CN
Cable, main motor
257
5
RG5-3943-000CN
High-voltage power supply
256
21
RG5-3961-000CN
PCA, cartridge release lever
254
21
RG5-3962-000CN
Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly)
252
54
RG5-3966-000CN
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
PCA
256
30
RG5-3973-000CN
Static charge eliminator assembly
259
14
RG5-3975-000CN
Cleaning roller assembly
259
15
RG5-3980-000CN
Preconditioning exposure LED assembly
252
36
RG5-3992-000CN
PCA, fusing delivery sensor
254
8
RG5-4021-000CN
Universal power supply assembly
279
102
RG5-4201-000CN
Plate paper limit back
278
84
RG5-4204-000CN
Front LED PCA with holder and cable
279
91
RG5-4205-000CN
Outriggers
279
95
RH3-0211-000CN
Post charger HV module
256
24
RH3-0228-000CN
Cleaning roller HV module
256
25
RH3-0234-000CN
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
256
39
RH3-2185-000CN
Power supply assembly (110 V)
254
25
RH3-2187-000CN
Power supply assembly (220 V)
254
25
RH7-1323-000CN
Motor, main (M4)
257
21
RH7-1325-000CN
Motor, carousel (M1)
256
26
RH7-1328-000CN
Motor, cartridge (M3)
260
23
RH7-1330-000CN
Fan 1 (FM1)
259
8
RH7-1350-000CN
Motor, pick-up (M5)
264
87
RH7-1373-000CN
Fan 2 (FM2)
259
7
RH7-1393-000CN
Fan 3 (FM3)
252
42
EN
Numerical parts list 585
Table 91. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Figure
Ref.
RH7-5168-000CN
Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4)
256
27
RS5-1119-000CN
Bushing
255
8
RS5-1317-000CN
Bushing
255
29, 30
RS5-1319-000CN
Bushing
259
19
RS5-1399-000CN
Bushing, paper deck drive
278
81
RS5-2465-000CN
Spring, tension
256
28
RS5-2561-000CN
Spring, tension
279
101
RS5-2697-000CN
Spring, torsion
259
20
RS5-2698-000CN
Spring, torsion
259
16
RS5-2719-000CN
Spring, compression
251
51B
RS5-8380-000CN
Label, “CAUTION”
253
4A
RS5-8611-000CN
Cassette size labels
278
72
RY7-5044-000CN
Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit)
278, 279
Kit 1
VD7-1893-151CN
Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.15 A
279
100
WC4-5136-000CN
Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644)
255
22
WC4-5150-000CN
Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672)
254
30
WG8-0291-000CN
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1230
264
52
WG8-5210-000CN
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240
255, 267, 23, 4, 40
270
WG8-5362-000CN
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241
257
24
XA9-0836-000CN
Screw, TP, M3 x 6, quantity=10
—
—
XA9-0849-000CN
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
257
26
XA9-0926-000CN
Screw, TP, M4 x 8, filler panel bracket for tray 2
250
3
XA9-0926-000CN
Screw, TP, M4 x 8, quantity=10
—
—
XA9-0926-000CN
Screw, filler panel bracket, M4 x 8
249
3
XA9-0940-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4
258
37
XA9-0951-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=10
—
—
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4 x 10
264
501
XD2-1100-502CN
Ring, E
256
501
XD2-1100-642CN
Ring, E
255
501
XZ9-0442-000CN
Casters
278
74
586 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Alphabetical parts list
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
10/100Base-TX
J3113A
—
—
110-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
C4155A
—
—
16-MB synchronous DIMM
C7843A
—
—
220-volt fuser kit
Fuser
Six paper rollers
Hand wipe
C4156A
—
—
32-MB synchronous DIMM
C7845A
—
—
64-MB synchronous DIMM
C3913A
—
—
64-MB synchronous DIMM
C7846A
—
—
C7842A
8-MB synchronous DIMM
NOTE: For all DIMM products, you must install
DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs—for
example, two 4-MB DIMMs.
—
—
Accumulator assembly (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60502
284
20
Adjustable caster
C4788-60516
284
15
Adjustable fixed caster
C4785-60511
280
21
Arm, sensor
RB1-6417-000CN
267
3
Arm, sensor
RG5-1859-000CN
264
51
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
C4785-60516
280
22
Attachment assembly (rod, bracket, cables)
C4788-60523
284
14
Attachment clip
C4785-60512
282
36
Back cover
C4788-60504
283
5
Black toner cartridge
C4149A
—
—
Blind cover
C4785-60503
280
23
Brush, cleaning
RB1-9617-000CN
252
35A
Bushing
RS5-1119-000CN
255
8
Bushing
RS5-1317-000CN
255
29, 30
EN
Alphabetical parts list 587
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Bushing
RS5-1319-000CN
259
19
Bushing, paper deck drive
RS5-1399-000CN
278
81
Cable, carousel
RG5-3923-000CN
257
6
Cable, DC power
RG5-3921-000CN
254
19
Cable, delivery
RG5-3104-000CN
257
20
Cable, delivery connector
RG5-3147-000CN
257
12
Cable, main
RG5-3097-000CN
254
16
Cable, main
RG5-3919-000CN
279
92
Cable, main motor
RG5-3942-000CN
257
5
Cable, power signal
RG5-3922-000CN
254
20
Cable, sensor
RG5-3144-000CN
254
18
Cables
2A Switch, interlock
2B Delivery head motor cable
2C Flipper sensor controller cable
2D Flipper encoder controller
2E Flipper motor controller
2F ESD cable
2G Delivery head assembly, flat cable
C4785-60520
282
Kit 2
Carousel stop assembly
RG5-3053-000CN
254
6
Carriage assembly (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60503
284
13
Cassette crossmember assembly
RG5-3089-000CN
259
30
Cassette size labels
RS5-8611-000CN
278
72
Cassette size plate
RB1-6894-000CN
278
73
Casters
XZ9-0442-000CN
278
74
Cleaning roller assembly
RG5-3975-000CN
259
15
Cleaning roller HV module
RH3-0228-000CN
256
25
C-link cable (from formatter board to the 2,000sheet input unit)
C4781-60504
—
—
Clutch, transfer belt press (CL4)
RH7-5168-000CN
256
27
Connector holder assembly
RG5-3031-000CN
254
15
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8500 models
C3983-40016
—
—
Control panel overlay, Czech, 8550 models
C7096-40019
—
—
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8500 models
C3983-40013
—
—
588 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Control panel overlay, Danish, 8550 models
C7096-40016
—
—
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8500 models
C3983-40009
—
—
Control panel overlay, Dutch, 8550 models
C7096-40012
—
—
Control panel overlay, English, 8500 models
C3983-40001
—
—
Control panel overlay, English, 8550 models
C7096-40004
—
—
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8500 models
C3983-40012
—
—
Control panel overlay, Finnish, 8550 models
C7096-40015
—
—
Control panel overlay, French, 8500 models
C3983-40006
—
—
Control panel overlay, French, 8550 models
C7096-40009
—
—
Control panel overlay, German, 8500 models
C3983-40007
—
—
Control panel overlay, German, 8550 models
C7096-40010
—
—
Control panel overlay, Hungarian, 8550 models
C7096-40003
—
—
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8500 models
C3983-40014
—
—
Control panel overlay, Italian, 8550 models
C7096-40017
—
—
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8500 models
C3983-40003
—
—
Control panel overlay, Korean, 8550 models
C7096-40006
—
—
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8500 models
C3983-40010
—
—
Control panel overlay, Norwegian, 8550 models
C7096-40013
—
—
Control panel overlay, Polish, 8550 models
C7096-40002
—
—
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8500 models C3983-40005
—
—
Control panel overlay, Portuguese, 8550 models C7096-40008
—
—
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8500 models
C3983-40015
—
—
Control panel overlay, Russian, 8550 models
C7096-40018
—
—
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8500
models
C3983-40004
—
—
Control panel overlay, Simplified Chinese, 8550
models
C7096-40007
—
—
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8500 models
C3983-40008
—
—
Control panel overlay, Spanish, 8550 models
C7096-40011
—
—
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8500 models
C3983-40011
—
—
Control panel overlay, Swedish, 8550 models
C7096-40014
—
—
EN
Alphabetical parts list 589
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Figure
Ref.
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8500 C3983-40002
models
—
—
Control panel overlay, Traditional Chinese, 8550 C7096-40005
models
—
—
Control panel overlay, Turkish, 8550 models
C7096-40001
—
—
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stacker)
C4779-60503
283
7
Controller PCA cover (with label) (for stapler/
stacker)
C4788-60508
283
7
Cover assembly, front
RG0-0112-000CN
250
3
Cover assembly, inner left
RG0-0104-000CN
253
1
Cover assembly, left upper
RG0-0113-000CN
250
4
Cover assembly, rear
RG0-0115-000CN
251
5
Cover assembly, right lower
RG5-3096-000CN
252
16
Cover assembly, top
RG0-0111-000CN
251
2
Cover, auxiliary
RA0-0078-000CN
251
20
Cover, back
C4785-60505
282
37
Cover, back
RB2-2519-000CN
278
71
Cover, cable
RB1-9805-000CN
256
9
Cover, cable
RB1-9948-000CN
258
3
Cover, carousel stop
RB1-9789-000CN
254
11
Cover, density sensor
RB1-9537-000CN
252
32
Cover, fan
RF0-0012-000CN
251
39
Cover, front
C4785-60504
280
26
Cover, front (with LED window)
RF5-2568-000CN
278
76
Cover, front right
RA0-0069-000CN
250
9
Cover, gear
RB1-9403-000CN
257
7
Cover, hinge
RA0-0068-000CN
250
8
Cover, inner 2
RA0-0026-000CN
253
2
Cover, inner 3
RA0-0027-000CN
253
3
Cover, inner 4
RF0-0013-000CN
253
4
Cover, left
RF5-2646-000CN
278
77
Cover, left lower
RB1-6480-000CN
250
10
590 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
Part number
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Cover, left rear
RA0-0065-000CN
251
6
Cover, left upper
RB2-0057-000CN
273
13
Cover, power switch
RB1-6492-000CN
250
12
Cover, rear fan housing
RG0-0017-000CN
251
51
Cover, right
RB1-7832-020CN
278
87
Cover, right rear
RA0-0067-000CN
252
7
Cover, right rear lower corner
RA0-0074-000CN
256
1
Cover, right subassembly
RF5-1995-000CN
252
31
Cover, sensor
RB1-9586-000CN
267
6
Cover, top
C3764-60555
280
31
Cover, top (label included)
RG5-2644-000CN
278
88
Cover, tray 1 side gear
RB1-9547-000CN
252
46
Cover, waste toner tray
RA0-0083-000CN
253
10
Crossmember
RB1-9800-000CN
255
40
Cyan toner cartridge
C4150A
—
—
Delivery assembly
RG0-0110-000CN
272
—
Delivery cover assembly
RG5-3108-000CN
273
—
Delivery drive assembly
RG5-3067-000CN
261
—
Delivery head position motor
C3764-60507
282
38
Density sensor assembly
RG5-3057-000CN
252
35
Developer/imaging drum bias supply
RG5-3026-030CN
256
20
Developing rotary
RG5-3033-000CN
260
36
Diagnostic LED PCA (with cable)
C4785-60514
282
35
Drum kit
Imaging drum
Two air filters
Hand wipe
C4153A
—
—
Drum/cartridge drive assembly
RG5-3065-000CN
260
—
Duct
RB1-9682-000CN
259
4
Duct, rear lower air
RB1-9401-000CN
254
4
Duplexer (product number C4782A)
C4782-60501
—
—
EIO hard disk
C2985A
—
—
EN
Alphabetical parts list 591
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Ethernet 10Base-T
J3110A
—
—
Ethernet combo (10Base-T, BNC, and LocalTalk) J3111A
—
—
Exchange duplexer
—
—
Exchange multi-bin mailbox assembly
C4785-69519
NOTE: You must have a 2,000-sheet input unit
in order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
280
27
Face-down bin
C4785-60502
280
24
Face-up bin
C3764-60505
280
25
Face-up bin
C4788-60512
283
4
Face-up solenoid assembly
RG5-3022-000CN
254
140
Fan 1 (FM1)
RH7-1330-000CN
259
8
Fan 2 (FM2)
RH7-1373-000CN
259
7
Fan 3 (FM3)
RH7-1393-000CN
252
42
Feed and separation rollers
RF5-1834-000CN
278
75
Feeder assembly
RG5-3059-000CN
269
—
Filler panel bracket for tray 2
RB2-0208-000CN
249
2
Filler panel for tray 2
RB2-0207-000CN
249
1
Filter, charcoal
RB1-9836-000CN
252
41
Filter, large air
RB1-9807-000CN
251
1
Filter, small air
RB1-9808-000CN
251
19
Fixed casters
C4785-60510
280
30
Flag, paper sensing
RB1-6557-000CN
264
48
Flipper assembly
C4788-60501
284
9
Flipper assembly (with cable “request”)
C4785-60529
281
32
Flipper ribbon cable
C4788-60524
284
10
Foot cover
C4788-60525
283
2
Formatter assembly
C3983-67905
—
—
Front cover
C4788-60505
283
1
Front LED PCA with holder and cable
RG5-4204-000CN
279
91
Fuser assembly (120 V)
RG5-3060-000CN
275
—
Fuser assembly (220 V)
RG5-3061-000CN
275
—
Gear, 11T
RB1-9424-000CN
256
7
592 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
C4782-69501
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Gear, 14T
RB1-9955-000CN
258
14
Gear, 14T
RB1-9956-000CN
258
15
Hard disk, internal, 3.2 GB
C2986-60006
—
—
Hardware
3A Screw, Torx
3B Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 10
3C Screw, Torx, Tapping T20, M4 x 10
3D Screw, Torx, T20, M4 x 12
3E Screw, Torx, Tapping T10
3F Screw, Caster
C4785-60521
281
Kit 3
Head assembly (with metallic tape)
C4785-60506
281
33
High-voltage power supply
RG5-3943-000CN
256
21
Hinge, stopper (delivery)
RF5-2701-000CN
273
24
Hinge, stopper (tray 1 delivery assembly)
RG5-3962-000CN
252
54
Holder, fan
RF5-2025-000CN
259
3
Holder, flapper
RB1-9751-000CN
273
12
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN
Getting Started Guide (English)
C3989-90901
—
—
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN Quick C3983-90919
Reference Guide (English)
—
—
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500 N, 8500 DN
User’s Guide (English)
C3989-90937
—
—
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN SelfPaced Training Kit (NTSC)
C3983-67902
—
—
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN SelfPaced Training Kit (PAL)
C3893-67903
—
—
HP Color LaserJet 8500, 8500N, 8500 DN
Service and Support CD-ROM
C3989-60115
—
—
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (A4-sized),
200 sheets
C4179B
—
—
HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper (letter-sized), C4179A
200 sheets
—
—
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (A4-sized), 50 C2936A
sheets
—
—
HP Color LaserJet transparencies (letter-sized), C2934A
50 sheets
—
—
EN
Alphabetical parts list 593
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide
(English)
5966-5171
—
—
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification
Guide
5021-8956
—
—
HP LocalTalk cable kit
92215N
—
—
HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide
5091-6456
—
—
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m
(approximately 10 ft) with 25-pin male/micro
36-pin male “C” size connector
C2946A
—
—
Input paper guide (nosepiece)
C3764-60561
282
39
Interlock
C4788-60514
284
21
ITD guide
RB2-0010-000CN
260
40
Kit of rollers—jam access door (multi-bin
mailbox)
C4785-60526
280
—
Label, “CAUTION”
RS5-8380-000CN
253
4A
Laser/scanner unit
RG5-3936-000CN
258
18
Latch, roller action
RB1-5153-000CN
250
3E
Latch, roller action
RF0-0003-000CN
253
6
LED PCA
C4788-60510
284
8
Lever assembly, black cartridge
RG5-3087-000CN
255
10
Lever assembly, pressure
RG5-3045-000CN
255
7
Lever assembly, transfer drum
RG5-3046-000CN
255
6
Lever, holding, left
RB1-9705-000CN
275
9
Lever, holding, right
RB1-9704-000CN
275
8
Lever, left upper door
RB1-6485-000CN
250
4B
Lever, paper height
RA0-0112-000CN
272
12
Lever, paper sensing
RB1-6692-000CN
272
11
Lever, registration roller
RB1-9580-000CN
257
13
Lever, release
RB1-9748-000CN
275
25
Lever, right lower cover
RB1-6485-000CN
252
16D
Lever, right upper door
RB1-6485-000CN
252
17
Lever, shutter
RA0-0008-000CN
250
3B
Locating pin, metal (positioning)
RF5-2556-000CN
278
78
594 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable
92215S
—
—
Magenta toner cartridge
C4151A
—
—
Main drive assembly
RG5-3066-000CN
257
18
Media jam knob
RB1-9928-000CN
253
7
Metallic retaining spring (spring leaf)
RB1-7835-000CN
279
93
Metallic retaining tab (plate stop)
RB1-7677-000CN
279
94
Metallic tape and housing assembly
C4785-60507
281
34
Motor, carousel (M1)
RH7-1325-000CN
256
26
Motor, cartridge (M3)
RH7-1328-000CN
260
23
Motor, main (M4)
RH7-1323-000CN
257
21
Motor, pick-up (M5)
RH7-1350-000CN
264
87
Mount, clutch
RB1-9828-000CN
256
15
C4785-60534
Multi-bin mailbox assembly
(product number C4785A)
Note: You must have a 2,000-sheet input tray in
order to install a multi-bin mailbox.
280
28
Multi-bin mailbox controller (with metal box)
C4785-60532
280
29
Multi-bin mailbox, repackaging kit
C4785-60513
—
—
Multi-bin mailbox, shipping lock kit
C4787-60503
—
—
Multi-bin mailbox, short C-link cable adapter
(extension)
C4785-60531
—
—
Offset module (stacker)
C4779-60508
284
19
Optical sensors kit
C4779-60509
284
—
Outriggers
RG5-4205-000CN
279
95
Paper deck drive assembly
RG5-3851-000CN
278
80
Paper deck PCA
RG5-3908-000CN
279
96
Paper pick-up assembly
RG5-3132-000CN
264
—
Paper pick-up assembly
RG5-3843-000CN
278
82
Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly
RG5-2166-000CN
279
97
Paper size sensor PCA assembly
RG5-2168-000CN
279
98
Paper stacker clip
C4788-60527
284
—
PCA, 10/100Base-T
J3113-61003
—
—
EN
Alphabetical parts list 595
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
PCA, carousel motor (M1)
RG5-3084-020CN
277
4
PCA, cartridge release lever
RG5-3961-000CN
254
21
PCA, cassette-size sensing
RG5-1845-000CN
277
1
PCA, controller board, 8500 models
RG5-3037-000CN
277
3
PCA, controller board, 8550 models
RG5-3037-0120CN
277
3
PCA, fusing delivery sensor
RG5-3992-000CN
254
8
PCA, main relay
RG5-3036-000CN
277
2
PCA, paper pick-up
RG5-1860-000CN
264
103
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3079-000CN
267
8
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3080-000CN
254
2
PCA, photosensor
RG5-3032-000CN
267
7
PCA, subrelay
RG5-3085-000CN
277
5
PCA, tray 1
RG5-1884-000CN
277
6
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
5021-0337
—
—
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1230
WG8-0291-000CN
264
52
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1240
WG8-5210-000CN
255, 267, 23, 4, 40
270
Photo-interrupter, IC, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN
257
24
Pin
RB1-0153-000CN
264
40
Plastic parts
1A Anti-curl string
1B Spring for anti-curl string
1C Pulley, small bottom
1D Cable holder round gasket
1E Flat cable holder edge
1F Flat cable holder
1G Spacer plastic
C4785-60519
281
Kit 1
Plate paper limit back
RG5-4201-000CN
278
84
Plate paper limit middle
RG5-3849-000CN
278
85
Plate paper reference front
RF5-3850-000CN
278
86
Plate, duct mount
RF5-2036-000CN
254
3
Plate, end
RF5-1484-000CN
262, 263
26
Post charger HV module
RH3-0211-000CN
256
24
Power box
C4781-60500
—
—
596 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Power supply
C4785-60501
282
40
Power supply
C4788-60511
284
17
Power supply assembly (110 V)
RH3-2185-000CN
254
25
Power supply assembly (220 V)
RH3-2187-000CN
254
25
Power supply cable
RG5-3909-000CN
279
99
Power supply fuse 250 V, 3.15 A
VD7-1893-151CN
279
100
Preconditioning exposure LED assembly
RG5-3980-000CN
252
36
Rail, PCA
RB2-0005-000CN
258
7D
Rail, tray 3
RF5-1396-000CN
259
32
Registration frame assembly
RG5-3007-000CN
267
—
Registration roller assembly
RG5-3009-000CN
268
—
Ring, E
XD2-1100-502CN
256
501
Ring, E
XD2-1100-642CN
255
501
Rod, power switch
RB1-6463-000CN
256
5
Roller, feed
RF5-1834-000CN
264
20
Roller, paper
RB1-6488-000CN
252
16G
Roller, pick-up
RF5-1835-000CN
264, 278
21, 83
Roller, tray 1 pick-up
RB1-9526-000CN
270
10
Safety switch assembly
C4788-60517
284
22
Screw kit (2,000-sheet input unit)
RY7-5044-000CN
278, 279
Kit 1
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
XA9-0849-000CN
257
26
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4 x 10
XB4-7401-007CN
264
501
Screw, TP, M3 x 6, quantity=10
XA9-0836-000CN
—
—
Screw, TP, M4 x 8, filler panel bracket for tray 2
XA9-0926-000CN
249
3
Screw, TP, M4 x 8, quantity=10
XA9-0926-000CN
—
—
Screw, w/washer, M3 x 8, quantity=10
XA9-0951-000CN
—
—
Screw, w/washer, M4 x 12, quantity=4
XA9-0940-000CN
258
37
Sensor assembly, color toner
RG5-3034-000CN
256
8
Sensor assembly, toner waste
RG5-3934-000CN
258
24
Sensor slider assembly
RG5-3131-000CN
259
37
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
RH3-0234-000CN
256
39
EN
Alphabetical parts list 597
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Separation discharge high-voltage converter
PCA
RG5-3966-000CN
256
30
Shield case assembly
RG5-3023-000CN
258
7
Spring, compression
RB1-6486-000CN
252
16E
Spring, compression
RB1-9675-000CN
256
4
Spring, compression
RS5-2719-000CN
251
51B
Spring, leaf
RB1-6909-000CN
256
6
Spring, left upper door lever
RB1-6486-000CN
250
4C
Spring, right lower door lever
RB1-6486-000CN
252
22
Spring, tension
RS5-2465-000CN
256
28
Spring, tension
RS5-2561-000CN
279
101
Spring, torsion
RB1-6409-000CN
267
2
Spring, torsion
RB1-6558-020CN
264
49
Spring, torsion
RB1-9798-000CN
252
26
Spring, torsion
RS5-2697-000CN
259
20
Spring, torsion
RS5-2698-000CN
259
16
Stacker bin (for stacker)
C4779-60505
283
3
Stacker controller PCA (stacker)
C4779-60507
284
18
Stacker door assembly (for stacker)
C4779-60502
283
6
Stapler (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60519
284
11
Stapler bin (for stapler/stacker)
C4788-60528
283
3
Stapler controller PCA (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60509
284
18
Stapler door assembly with label (for stapler/
stacker)
C4788-60507
283
6
Stapler refill housing
C4788-60522
284
12
Static charge eliminator assembly
RG5-3973-000CN
259
14
Stationary caster
C4788-60515
284
16
Stop, flip-up media
RA0-0073-000CN
251
2D
Stopper, open/close
RB1-6484-000CN
251, 252
6A, 16C
Strap, front door support
RB1-4497-000CN
250
3D
Support, cover
RA0-0079-000CN
251
51A
Switch, black toner cartridge (SW644)
WC4-5136-000CN
255
22
598 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Table 92. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Figure
Ref.
Switch, toner cartridge cover (SW672)
WC4-5150-000CN
254
30
Token Ring
J3112A
—
—
Torsion spring
RB1-6589-000CN
264
41
Transfer belt assembly
RG5-3047-000CN
274
—
Transfer drum
RG5-3039-000CN
258
17
Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly
RG5-3111-000CN
259
21
Transfer drum contact assembly
RG5-3044-000CN
256
2
Transfer kit
Transfer drum
Transfer belt
Cleaning roller
Charcoal filter
Hand wipe
C4154A
—
—
Transfer mount assembly
RG5-3008-000CN
259
36
Transfer swing assembly
RG5-3010-000CN
257
10
Transport belt motor (with fan)
C4785-60518
282
41
Tray 1 assembly
RG5-3134-000CN
271
—
Tray 1 pick-up assembly
RG5-3054-000CN
270
—
Tray 4
RG5-3845-000CN
278
79
Tray rail assembly
RG5-1851-000CN
257
3
Tray, face-up
RB1-6491-000CN
250
11
Universal power supply assembly
RG5-4021-000CN
279
102
User LED PCA (with cable)
C4785-60515
280
20
Vertical transfer unit (VTU)
RG5-3854-000CN
278
89
Waste toner tray
RB1-9804-000CN
253
5
Wings kit (stapler/stacker)
C4788-60521
284
—
Yellow toner cartridge
C4152A
—
—
EN
Alphabetical parts list 599
600 Chapter 8 - Parts and diagrams
EN
Index
- Value + key 80
Numerics
1,000-sheet paper deck (input)
printer model included with 22
100Base-TX networks 76, 512
10Base2 networks 77
10Base-T networks 76, 512
11-by-17-inch sized media. See media
12-by-18.5-inch sized media. See media
2,000-sheet input unit
back cover 300
cable connections 75
communication error 384
components 298
controller PCA 307
covers and doors 560
description 199
DIP switches 473
error 384, 385
front cover 299
front LED PCA assembly 308
LEDs 470, 472
left cover 301
location 44
main drive assembly 310
motor test 474
paper path 204
paper pick-up assembly 306
paper size sensor assemblies 311
paper size switch assembly 312
pick-up and feed system 201
power supply 199, 309, 471
printer model included with 22
quantity switch assembly 311
rear view 471
right cover 304
sensor test 475
sensors, switches, clutches, and motors 200
standalone diagnostics 474
standalone running test 473
tension springs 313
troubleshooting 469
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet stacker
attachment assembly 358
bins and covers 339
configuration 211
control panel messages 491
controller PCA 353
EN
door assemblies 342
interlock switch 356
internal assemblies 342
jam detection 213
LED PCA 354
paper path 214
paper path sensors 213
power supply 212, 355
printer model included with 22
safety switch 357
service mode 487
troubleshooting 482
500-sheet tray 2
printer model included with 22
A
A3-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
See also media
A4-sized media
overriding with letter 87
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
setting for wide 90
See also media
A5-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
See also media
absorption of color 138
access denied 388
accessories
available 22
information from HP FIRST 64
ordering 61, 66, 511
paper handling 44
parts list 512
accumulator assembly 214
accumulator assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker)
347
acoustic emission specifications 25
additive color process 138
adjusting
color balance 457
colors 458
duplex registration 107
neutral axis 461
Chapter - Index 601
Adobe PostScript. See PostScript (PS)
air filter door 42
air filters. See filters
alphabetical parts list 587
altitude specifications 24
anti-curl strings (multi-bin mailbox) 329
Append CR to LF command 90
application notes
HP Driver Distribution Center 66
HP FIRST 64
ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64
ASIC test 95
assemblies
black cartridge cam 517
black cartridge guide 517
cleaning roller HV module 291
delivery 517
delivery cover 554
delivery drive 285, 517
delivery frame 518
drum/cartridge drive 294, 518, 540
face-down output 249
face-up exit 260
feeder 257, 550
formatter 43
front 251
fuser 518, 556
illustration of major 517
internal (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker) 343
left 253
left cover feeder 517
main gear 287
paper pick-up 267, 517
PCA 559
post charger HV module 288
rear 270
registration frame 517
registration roller 263, 517, 549
right 261
separation discharge converter 295
solenoid 518
top 245
transfer belt 517, 555
tray 1 517, 552
tray 1 pick-up 268, 517, 551
tray 2 543
tray 3 542
assemblies (2,000-sheet input unit)
front LED PCA 308
main drive 310
paper pick-up 306
paper size sensor 311
paper size switch 312
quantity switch 311
602 Index
assemblies (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker)
attachment 358
door 342
assemblies (multi-bin mailbox)
attachment 337
delivery head 210, 331
flipper 210, 319
metallic tape and housing 325
assembly
accumulator (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker) 347
carriage (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker) 345
flipper (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker) 343
offset module 349
assistance. See support
attachment assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
and 3,000-sheet stacker) 358
attachment assembly (multi-bin mailbox) 337
Attention Indicator light 80
Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 64
automatic paper override 87
axis, adjusting neutral 461
B
B4-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
B5-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
See also media
back cover
2,000-sheet input unit 300
multi-bin mailbox 314, 315
belts
jams 480
replace frequency 119
transport 210
See also transfer belt
bidirectional mode (multi-bin mailbox) 206
binding 86
bins (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker) 339
bins. See left (face-up) output bin; output bins; top
(face-down) output bin
black
detail value 92
smooth value 92
black and white print speeds 23
black toner cartridge
cam assembly 517
guide assembly 517
illustration 136
installing 100
EN
location 118
replace frequency 119
switch 187
toner level detection 159
blind cover (multi-bin mailbox) 210
BNC
accessories 512
connection 76
port 76
T connector 77
boards. See PCAs; PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit);
PCAs (multibin mailbox)
bond media. See media
booklet printing 109
buffer
EIO overflow 370
parallel I/O overflow 370
scan error 384
buttons. See keys on control panel
C
C5-sized media. See media
cables
C-link 75, 207
coaxial 77
connection 74
flipper ribbon 359
interface 75
parallel 78
parts list 513
ThinLAN 77
calibrating
staple position in stapler/stacker 482
calibration
color density 160
flipper 480
message 388
Canadian Customer Care Center (CCCC) Assist
Line 67
Canadian DOC regulations 46
Cancel Job key 80
canceling
job 388
proof and print jobs 84, 85
quick copy jobs 84
capacity
circuit 24
input trays 31
media in multi-bin mailbox 33
media in printer 31
card stock. See media
carousel
color toner error 377
control process 162
position sensor 162
stop solenoid 163
EN
carousel button switch 187
carousel motor
description and illustration 172
location 171
PCA 282
removing 283
carousel position sensor 185
carousel stopper solenoid 189
carriage assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and
3,000-sheet stacker) 345
carriage return command 90
cartridge motor
description and illustration 174
location 171
removing 280
cartridges
disengaged toner 377
imaging drum 136
installing black toner 100
installing color toner 101
location 118
replace frequency 119
toner not installed 399
CASSETTE mode 103
casters
adjustable (3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and
3,000-sheet Stacker) 361
stationary (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker) 360
CCC (Customer Care Center) Assist Line 67
CCCC (Canadian Customer Care Center) Assist
Line 67
charcoal filter
installing 120
location 118
replace frequency 119
charge roller set print defect 454
charging roller
illustration 136
repetitive defects 464
charts, timing. See timing charts
checklists
paper path 433
pretroubleshooting 367
circuits
capacity 24
fuser abnormality detection 166
fusing heater safety 166
high-voltage power supply 167
laser/scanner motor lock detection 170
power distribution 164
Power Save 165
cleaning
density sensor 389
images 150
imaging drum 152
Index 603
toner catch tray 116
toner from fabric 100
transfer drum 150, 465
cleaning roller
charging process 150
control process 162
illustration 136
location 118
press cam 150
press solenoid 150, 189
repetitive defects 464
replace frequency 119
cleaning roller HV module
assemblies 291
removing 292
cleared job 405
clearing
duplexer jams 389
event log 94
fuser jams 390
input tray jams 392
multi-bin mailbox jams 392
paper 395
top output bin jams 393
transfer drum jams 394
unexpected paper size jams 394
C-link cable
connection 43, 75
description 207
clutches
feed roller 189
registration roller 189
transfer belt press 189
tray 1 pick-up roller 189
clutches (2,000-sheet input unit)
main drive 200
names and locations 200
VTU 200
CLx. See clutches; clutches (2,000-sheet input unit)
coaxial cables 77
cold reset (CR)
message 395
paper size 94
Color Adjust Menu 92
color adjust page 458
color cartridge sensor 251
color page count 93
color toner carousel 136
color toner cartridges
illustration 136
installing 101
lever sensor 158
location 118
replace frequency 119
sensor 157, 185
toner level detection 157
604 Index
color toner lever sensor 185
colored media
using 36
See also media
color-plane registration print defect 452
colors
adjustment 457, 458
density calibration 160
matching 440
pages printed 93
pigments 36, 138, 139
print speeds 23
process 139
registration values 94
selection process 440
theory 138
values 92
Com 10-sized media. See media
commands
carriage return 90
line feed 90
Commercial #10-sized media. See media
communications link. See C-link cable
configuration
3,000-sheet stacker 211
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker 211
Configuration Menu 88
configuration page
printing 83, 407
printing continuous 83
understanding 415
using to verify installation 105
configurations, printer 39
configuring
Append CR to LF 90
binding 86
clearable warnings 88
color values 92
control panel 82
default orientation 89
default paper size 89
duplex printing 86
form length 89
I/O timeout 91
input trays 85, 103
low and out messages 88
manual feed 87
media sizes 104
media types 103, 104
number of copies 89
paper destination 86
parallel advanced functions 91
PCL font information 89
PCL symbol sets 90
Power Save mode 88
printer personalities 88
wide A4 90
EN
conformity, declarations of 47
connecting
cables 74
printer to network 76
consumables
installing 98
location 118
low and out messages 88
ordering 62, 511
parts list 512
recycling 119
replace frequency 119
storage specifications 26
user-replaceable 224
contents of box 73
continuous configuration pages, printing 83
continuous test message 395
control panel
display language 97
illustration and description 80
LEDs 80
location 41
menu maps 82
messages 368
removing 246
control panel messages
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 491
control panel overlay
changing 79
parts list 514
controller
electronic error 386
RAM error 384
controller boards
2,000-sheet input unit 307
EPH (external paper-handling) 199, 207
multi-bin mailbox 209, 210, 327
printer 277
copies, configuring 89
copy module
printer model included with 22
corona wire. See transfer charger
counts
total color pages printed 93
total pages duplexed 94
total pages printed 93
Courier default settings 90
covers
front 228
front right 229
left lower 237
left rear 234
left upper 236
location 225
parts list 519, 525
EN
rear 243
right lower assembly 242
right rear 241
right upper assembly 238
right upper subassembly 240
top 232
covers (2,000-sheet input unit)
back 300
front 299
left 301
parts list 560
right 304
covers (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker) 339
covers (multi-bin mailbox)
blind 210, 318
front and back 314, 315
top 316
CR (cold reset)
message 395
paper size 94
CRC test 95
curl, reducing on transparencies 433
Customer Care Center (CCC) Assist Line 67
Customer Care Online 62
Customer Information Centers 66
Customer Support Sales Center 66
cyan
detail value 92
smooth value 92
cyan toner cartridge
installing 101
location 118
replace frequency 119
D
damaged
media 395
transfer drum 389
Data Indicator light 80
data, corrupt PJL 405
Dealer Response Line 65
dealer, finding 511
declarations of conformity 47
defaults
Courier setting 90
factory 409
fonts 89
number of copies 89
orientation 89
paper size 89
PCL symbol set 90
resetting factory 92
defects
charge roller set 454
color-plane registration 452
Index 605
developer streak 453
fading 455
hot offset 455
input tray switches 433
missing toner 454
rain 453
repetitive 462
repetitive ruler 463
sensors 434
toner bubbles 453
waves 454
deleted fonts 405, 409
delivery assembly 517, 553
delivery cover
assembly 554
switch 187
delivery drive assembly
location 517
parts list 541
removing 285
delivery frame assembly 518
delivery head (multi-bin mailbox)
assembly 210, 331
assembly jams 481
line 210
motor 209, 210
position motor 321
position system jams 481
roller motor 209
delivery rollers 136
extended sensor (multi-bin mailbox) 209
demonstration page, printing 407
denied access 388
density sensor
cleaning 389
description 160
error 378
removing 266
depth of printer 25
detail color value 92
developer DSD wheels, repetitive defects 464
developer motor test 96
developer roller repetitive defects 464
developer streak print defect 453
developer/imaging drum bias supply
removing 289
diagnostic LED (multi-bin mailbox) 335
diagnostics
2,000-sheet input unit 474
formatter board 94
multi-bin mailbox 477
diagrams, circuit 503
DIMMs (dual inline memory modules)
accessories 22
errors 376
expanding memory 22
606 Index
installing 106
ordering 511
parts list 512
removing 410
slot locations 43
test 95
DIN-8 connection 76
DIP switches (2,000-sheet input unit) 471, 473
directories, printing file 83
disk. See hard disk
dithering 139
diverter for paper out of position 382
DL-sized media. See media
DOC regulations, Canadian 46
documentation
ordering 62
parts list 514
door assemblies (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and
3,000-sheet stacker) 342
doors
location 225
parts lists 519, 525, 560
vertical transfer unit open 399
dots per inch (DPI) printer resolution 23
Double Post Card (JPOSTD) sized media. See
media
double-sided printing. See duplexer; duplex printing
DPI (dots per inch) printer resolution 23
DRAM (dynamic random access memory)
installing 106
test 95
Driver Distribution Center 66
drivers. See printer drivers
drum
imaging error 396
imaging life out 397
imaging not installed 401
imaging problems 467
life 124
new transfer 406
transfer damaged 389
transfer jams 394
transfer not installed 402
transfer problems 465
drum kit
low and out messages 88
parts list 513
replace frequency 119
drum motor 171
description and illustration 173
test 96
Drum MSDS 57
drum/cartridge drive assembly
illustration 518
illustration and parts list 540
removing 294
EN
drums
cleaning transfer 465
illustration 136
installing imaging 124
installing transfer 120
location 118
replace frequency 119
dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). See DIMMs
(dual inline memory modules)
duplex printing
configuring 86
process 199
total page count 94
duplex registration 107, 416
Duplex Registration Menu 91
duplexer
accessories 22, 512
adjusting registration 107
booklet printing 109
deflector 136
error 397
jams 389, 392
location 44
media specifications 35
printer model included with 22
dynamic random access memory (DRAM). See
DRAM (dynamic random access memory)
E
ECCC (European Customer Care Center) Assist
Line 67
ECO board 279
EIO (enhanced input/output)
accessories parts list 512
buffer overflow 370
connection broken 371
features 23
initializing 397
not functional 398
printing page 83
slot locations 43
EIO hard disk
parts list 512
EIO page
using to verify installation 105
eject rollers (multi-bin mailbox) 210
ejector motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209
electrical
schematics 503
specifications 24
systems 164
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 222
electrostatic latent image 143, 144
embossed media 37
emissions
acoustic 25
ozone 58
EN
empty tray 413
engine
settings 94
test 398
enhanced input/output (EIO). See EIO (enhanced
input/output)
envelopes
cautions for printing 35
sealed 434
See also media
environmental
automatic change control 159
operating requirements 27
specifications 24
EP process. See image formation
EPH (external paper-handling) controller board 199,
207
error log 469
errors
2,000-sheet input unit 384, 385
breaks and pauses 95
carousel 377
controller 386
cycle power 382
density sensor 378
DIMM 376
firmware 373
flipper 480
fuser 373
illegal output 379
input feed 379
internal 383
laser 375
laser scanner 371
messages 368
motor 383
multi-bin mailbox 384, 386
NVRAM 387, 481
PostScript printing 88
power-on self-test 387
RAM 383, 384
scan buffer 384
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 222
Ethernet
accessories 512
network connection 76
European Customer Care Center (ECCC) Assist
Line 67
event log 407
clearing 94
description 419
printing 83
exchanging parts 63
Executive-sized media. See media
expanding memory 22
Index 607
expired
fuser and paper rollers 398
imaging drum 397
external paper-handling (EPH) controller board 199,
207
F
face-down bins (multi-bin mailbox) 210
face-down output assembly 249
face-down output bin. See top (face-down) output bin
face-down tray delivery sensor 178
face-up bin (multi-bin mailbox) 210
face-up exit assembly 260
face-up output bin. See left (face-up) output bin
face-up solenoid 258
factory defaults reset 92
factory settings, restoring 409
fading print defects 455
failed hard disk 396
fan 1
motor location 171
operation 177
removing 274
fan 2
motor location 171
operation 177
removing 275
fan 3
motor location 171
operation 177
fans
left output failure 382
rear input failure 381
rear output failure 380
thermistor 177
fault log 95
Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology (HP
FIRST)
Europe 65
U.S. 64
FCC regulations 46
features
control panel 80
EIO 23
fonts 23
model differences 22
personality 23
print speeds 23
resolution 23
user interface 23
feed roller clutch 189
feed rollers
2,000-sheet input unit 204
printer 136
feeder assembly 257, 550
608 Index
feeding
error 379
manual 404
process 179
speeds 179
field replaceable units (FRUs)
2,000-sheet input unit 298
ordering 63
parts list 516
files
operation failed 396
printing directories 83
filler panel for tray 2 231
filters
installing air 124
installing charcoal 120
location 118
ozone 58
replace frequency 119
Finland laser statement 56
firmware
error 373
test 95
FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology)
Europe 65
U.S. 64
FIRST mode 103
fixer. See fuser
fixing. See fusing
flipper
assembly 210, 319
calibration 480
error 480
jam 480
roller motor 209
flipper assembly (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and
3,000-sheet stacker) 342, 343
flipper ribbon cable (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and
3,000-sheet stacker) 359
flip-up media stop 41
FMx. See fan 1; fan 2; fan 3; fans
fonts
configuring PCL number 89
configuring PCL pitch 89
configuring PCL point size 89
configuring PCL source 89
Courier settings 90
deleted 405
deleted downloaded 409
Postscript (PS) 23
printing list 408
standard 23
support 64
TrueType 23
form length, configuring 89
EN
formatter assemblies 43
formatter board 254
diagnostics 94
location 42, 43
parts list 515
serial number 93
video test (VX ASIC) 95
formatter pan 272
frequency for replacing consumables 119
front assemblies 251
front cover
2,000-sheet input unit 299
multi-bin mailbox 314, 315
removing 228
switch 187
front door 41
front LED PCA assembly (2,000-sheet input unit)
308
front right cover 229
FRUs (field replaceable units). See field replaceable
units (FRUs)
full
hard disk 396
left (face-up) output bin 480
fuser
abnormality detection circuit 166
assembly 518, 556
control process 166
error 373
incompatible 399
installing 127
jams 390
life low 398
location 118
new 406
not installed 400
repetitive defects 467
temperatures 166
fuser kit
installing 127
life detection 156
low and out messages 88
parts list 513
percentage life remaining 94
replace frequency 119
resetting life count 92
fusing
and delivery process 191
delivery sensor 178, 185, 190, 191
heater safety circuit 166
process 153
rollers 136, 153
EN
G
gauge, toner 110
glossy
print speeds 23
using 36
See also media
Go key 80
graphics resolution 23
guide, input paper. See input paper guide (multi-bin
mailbox)
H
half-toning 139
handling
media 29
toner 57
hard disk
accessories 22
failure 396
full 396
initializing 88, 407
location 43
new 406
parts list 512
removing 256, 410
test 95
write-protected 396
HCI. See 2,000-sheet input unit
HCO. See multi-bin mailbox
heaters
fusing safety 166
lower and upper fuser 171
names and locations 171
heavy media
using 36
See also media
height of printer 25
Hewlett-Packard Distribution (HPD) ordering
information 61
high capacity output. See multi-bin mailbox
high-voltage converter 3. See separation discharge
high-voltage converter
high-voltage power supply
removing 291
high-voltage power supply circuit 167
hot offset print defect 455
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64
HP Automated Support Access Program (ASAP) 64
HP Customer Care Online 62
HP dealer, finding 511
HP Direct 66
HP Distribution ordering information 61
HP Driver Distribution Center 66
Index 609
HP Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology
(FIRST)
Europe 65
U.S. 64
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support
Technology)
Europe 65
U.S. 64
HP JetDirect internal print server. See print server
HP LaserJet printing demonstration 83
HP Technical Training 62
HP TonerGauge 110
HPD (Hewlett-Packard Distribution) ordering
information 61
humidity
automatic environment change control 159
sensor 159
sensor error 377
specifications 24
I
I/O (input/output)
parallel advanced functions 91
resetting 92
resetting ports 409
switching 23
timeout 91
I/O Menu 91
identification of printer 38
illegal output error 379
image assurance area 34
image formation
cleaning 150
cleaning roller charging 150
fusing 153
imaging drum cleaning 152
laser beam exposure 144
post charging 147
preconditioning exposure 143
primary charging 144
process 141
secondary transfer 148
troubleshooting 438
images
resolution 23
troubleshooting defects 441
imaging drum
cartridge 136
cleaning process 152
detecting expiration 154
error 396
illustration 136
installing 124
kit 124
laser beam exposure 144
life out 397
610 Index
location 118
not installed 401
preconditioning exposure 143
primary charging 144
repetitive defects 467
replace frequency 119
switch 187
Information Menu 83
initializing
EIO accessory 397
hard disk 407
printer hard disk 88
input feed error 379
input paper guide (multi-bin mailbox) 210, 323
input trays. See 2,000-sheet input unit; tray 1; tray 2;
tray 3; tray 4; trays
input/output (I/O). See I/O (input/output)
inside left panel 230
installing
air filters 124
black toner cartridge 100
cables 74, 75
charcoal filter 120
consumables 98, 119
DIMMs 106
fuser kit 127
imaging drum 99
imaging drum kit 124
parts 217
printer on network 76
rollers 127
safety 222
transfer belt 120
transfer charger 120
transfer drum 120
transfer kit 120
verifying printer 105
insufficient memory 370
interface
cable 75
features 23
interlock switch (3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and
3,000-sheet Stacker) 356
interlock switch (multi-bin mailbox) 209, 334
internal assemblies
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 342
internal assemblies, (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker
and 3,000-sheet stacker) 343
internal components 528
internal print server. See print server
ISO B5-sized media. See media
ITD (intermediate transfer drum). See transfer drum
Item key 80
EN
J
jams
delivery head assembly 481
delivery head position system 481
detection process 192
duplexer 389
flipper area 480
fuser 390
general media 394
input tray 392
multi-bin mailbox 392
selecting media to prevent 29
stapler/stacker 485
top output bin 393
transfer belt 480
transfer drum 394
tray 4 394
troubleshooting 434
unexpected paper size 394
Japan VCCI statement 54
JetDirect internal print server. See print server
JetSend 416
JIS B4-sized media. See media
JIS B5-sized media. See media
job separator mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205
jobs
canceling 388
canceling proof and print 84, 85
canceling quick copy 84
cleared because memory out 405
processing 408
JPOSTD (Double Post Card) sized media. See
media
K
keys on control panel
description 80
See also individual keys
kits
drum parts list 513
fuser parts list 513
replace frequency 119
transfer life low 411
transfer life out 411
transfer parts list 513
L
labels. See media
language
control panel overlay 79
not available 407
selecting display 97
laser
error 375
illustration 136
EN
motor lock detection circuit 170
process 169
removing 247
safety statement 55
scanner error 371
statement for Finland 56
laser beam
exposure on imaging drum 144
process 169
LaserJet printing demonstration 83
last page sensor
tray 1 182
tray 2 180
LCD display 80
ledger-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
See also media
LEDs
2,000-sheet input unit 470, 472
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 354, 490
control panel 80
multi-bin mailbox 335, 336, 479
preconditioning exposure 136
left (face-up) output bin
delivery roller 136
full 403, 480
full sensor 209
illustration 136
location 41
paper path test 96
solenoid 189, 191
left assemblies 253
left cover
feeder assembly 517
sensor 185
left cover (2,000-sheet input unit) 301
left lower cover 42, 237
left rear cover 234
left upper cover 42, 236
legal-sized media
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
See also media
length, configuring form 89
letterhead. See media
letter-sized media
overriding with A4 87
paper size detection switches 188
paper size detection switches (2,000-sheet input
unit) 202
See also media
lever, unlocked toner 403
Index 611
life
drum kit low 397
drum kit out 397
fuser and paper roller low 398
fuser and paper rollers out 398
transfer kit low 411
transfer kit out 411
life detection
fuser kit 156
imaging drum 154
transfer kit 156
lifting plate
position sensor 183, 185
solenoid 183, 189
lifting plate (2,000-sheet input unit) 203, 204
lights. See LEDs
line feed command 90
list server 64
lists
font 83
parts 509
LocalTalk
accessories 512
networks 76
parts list 513
port 76
lock detection for laser/scanner motor 170
logs
error 469
event 83, 94, 407, 419
fault 95
low toner 410
lower
fuser heater 171
fusing roller 136, 153
VTU rollers 204
M
M1. See carousel motor
M2. See drum motor
M3. See cartridge motor
M4. See main motor
M5. See pick-up motor
Macintosh cable parts list 513
magenta
detail value 92
smooth value 92
magenta toner cartridge
installing 101
location 118
replace frequency 119
mailbox mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205
mailbox. See multi-bin mailbox
main drive (2,000-sheet input unit)
assembly 310
clutch 200
612 Index
main gear assembly 287
main motor
description and illustration 175
location 171
main motor (2,000-sheet input unit) 200
main relay PCA 293
maintenance
black toner cartridge 100
color toner cartridges 101
consumables 98
imaging drum 99
strategy 222
user-replaceable parts 224
maintenance units. See consumables
manual feed 87, 404
manuals, ordering 62
manufacturing codes for toner cartridges 456
margin 34
matching colors 440
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 57, 64
maximum media sizes 31
MBM. See multi-bin mailbox
media
capacities (multi-bin mailbox) 33
capacities (printer) 31
cautions for printing 37
configuring default size 89
configuring destinations 86
configuring sizes 104
configuring types 103, 104
duplexer specifications 35
error feeding from tray 1 382
handling 29
input tray capacities 31
jams 394
overriding type/size 87
parts list 513
print speeds 23
requirements 29
selecting 29
specifications 29
storing 30
to avoid 37
trays. See tray 1; tray 2; tray 3; tray 4; trays
See also envelopes; glossy; labels; paper;
transparencies
media size sensing PCAs 296
memory
accessories 22
expanding 22
external error (NVRAM) 481
full 409
installing DIMMs 106
insufficient 370
internal error 383
model differences 22
EN
optimized 22
out and job cleared 405
parts list 512
PCL full 405
shortage 404
Menu key 80
menu maps
description 82
printing 83
menus
Color Adjust 92
Configuration 88
control panel 82
duplex registration 91
I/O 91
Information 83
Paper Handling 85
Printing 89
Proof and Print 84, 85
Quick Copy Jobs 84
Resets 92
Service Mode 93
messages
cold reset 395
control panel 368
language used 97
low and out 88
multi-bin mailbox 479
numbered 368
unnumbered 388
metallic tape and housing assembly (multi-bin
mailbox) 325
MFP
configuration 40
selecting display language 97
service topics 21
minimum media sizes 31
misfed paper 395
missing toner print defect 454
model numbers 38
models of printer, different features 22
modes
CASSETTE 103
FIRST 103
OHT 179
Power Save 88, 165, 405
service 93
tray 1 85, 103
modes (multi-bin mailbox)
bidirectional 206
job separator 205
self-test 479
unidirectional 206
virtual stacker 205
Monarch-sized media. See media
EN
motors
carousel 171, 172, 283
cartridge 171, 174, 280
developer 96
drum 96, 171, 173
error 383
fan 171, 177
laser/scanner lock detection 170
main 171, 175
names and locations 171
not turning 375
pick-up 171, 176
motors (2,000-sheet input unit)
main 200
names and locations 200
test 474
motors (multi-bin mailbox)
delivery head 209, 210
delivery head position 321
delivery head roller 209
ejector 209
flipper roller with encoder 209
names and locations 208
transport belt 209, 210, 322
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) 57, 64
multi-bin mailbox
accessories 22, 512
anti-curl strings 329
attachment assembly 337
back cover 315
blind cover 318
capacities 33
clearing jams 392
communication 207
communication error 384
components 314, 564
controller board 209, 210
controller PCA 327
delivery head assembly 331
delivery head position motor 321
description 205
diagnostic LED PCA 335
diagnostic tests 477
error 386
flipper assembly 319
front cover 315
full 403
input paper guide 323
interlock switch 334
location 44
messages 479
metallic tape and housing assembly 325
not attached correctly 403
operating modes 205, 206
output bin full 409
overflow 205
Index 613
paper bins 318
paper supply 317
power-on sequence 206
power-up sequence test 478
printer model included with 22
removable parts 314
removing 253
sensors, switches, motors, and controller board
208
top cover 316
top output bin (face-up) full 398
transport belt motor 322
troubleshooting 477
unlatched 480
user status LED PCA 336
multipart forms 37
multipurpose tray. See tray 1
N
networks
100Base-TX 76
10Base2 77
10Base-T 76
accessories parts list 512
connections 76
printer connection 76
troubleshooting 502
non-masked area 34
non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). See
NVRAM (non-volatile random access memory)
number
formatter board serial 93
printer model 38
printer serial 93
numerical parts lists 574
NVRAM (non-volatile random access memory)
damaged 481
recoverable error 387
settings 93
unrecoverable error 387
O
offset module 214, 349
OHT (overhead transparency). See transparencies
OHT mode 179
online
indicator 81
support 62
online help 81
operating
environment requirements 27
environment specifications 24
specifications 24
operating system color characteristics 440
614 Index
options
ordering 511
parts list 512
ordering
accessories 511
consumables 62, 511
DIMMs 511
documentation and software 62
options 511
parts 511
orientation
configuring default 89
media in input trays 31
output bins
configuring destinations 86
full 403, 409, 411
jams 393
multi-bin mailbox 210
overflow 205
See also left (face-up) output bin; top (face-down)
output bin
overflow bin (multi-bin mailbox) 205
overhead transparencies. See transparencies
overriding
A4 with letter 87
letter with A4 87
media type/size 87
ozone
filter 58
safety 58
P
package contents 73
pages
configuration 407
demonstration 407
printing color test 92
simplified 404
total color printed 93
total count 93
wrinkled 433
wrong request 481
panel, filler for tray 2 231
panel, inside left 230
paper
clearing 395
cold reset size 94
configuring default size 89
configuring destinations 86
diverter out of position 382
feeding speeds 179
handling accessories 512
overriding size 87
print speeds 23
roller life low 398
rollers life out 398
EN
tray 1 pick-up 183
tray 2 and tray 3 pick-up 181
unexpected size or type 372
See also media
paper bin (multi-bin mailbox)
empty sensor 209
full sensor 209
paper delivered to bin sensor (multi-bin mailbox)
209
paper delivered to head sensor (multi-bin mailbox)
209
paper entry sensor
2,000-sheet input unit 200
multi-bin mailbox 209
paper exit sensor (2,000-sheet input unit) 200
paper guide. See input paper guide (multi-bin
mailbox)
paper handling accessories
location 44
model differences 22
Paper Handling Menu 85
paper jams. See jams
paper path
2,000-sheet input unit 204
carousel obstruction 377
checklist 433
door open 399
illustration 178
jams 394
multi-bin mailbox 210
test (stapler/stacker) 484
tests 95, 420
tests (multi-bin mailbox) 478
troubleshooting 433
paper path sensors
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 486
paper photo sensors 265
paper pick-up
assembly 517
illustration 181, 183
process 179, 180
paper pick-up (2,000-sheet input unit) 201
paper pick-up assembly
illustration and parts list 544
location 517
removing 267
paper quantity switches (2,000-sheet input unit)
200, 202
paper size detection switches
2,000-sheet input unit 202
printer 188
paper size sensors (2,000-sheet input unit) 200
paper size switch assembly (2,000-sheet input unit)
312
paper stack (2,000-sheet input unit) 204
EN
paper tray sensors (2,000-sheet input unit)
raised 200
paper trays. See 2,000-sheet input unit; input trays
paper width sensor 182
parallel advanced functions 91
parallel cable
connection 78
parts list 513
parallel I/O (input/output) buffer overflow 370
parallel port 43, 78
part numbers. See parts lists
parts
exchanging 63
HP Direct 66
ordering 61, 511
phone number identification 66
removing and installing 217
user-replaceable 224
website information 62
parts lists
alphabetical 587
by part 516
cables 513
consumables, options, and accessories 512
control panel overlays 514
covers and doors (2,000-sheet input unit) 560
covers and doors (printer) 525
delivery assembly 553
delivery cover assembly 554
delivery drive assembly 541
DIMMs 512
drum kit 513
drum/cartridge drive assembly 540
EIO 512
EIO hard disk 512
feeder assembly 550
fixing assembly 558
formatter board 515
fuser kits 513
internal components 529
internal hard disk 512
lower cassette assembly 542
media 513
memory 512
multi-bin mailbox components 565, 567, 569
multi-purpose tray assembly 552
multi-purpose tray pick-up assembly 551
network 512
numerical 574
paper handling accessories 512
paper pick-up assembly 547
PCA assemblies 559
printer supplies 513
reference materials 514
registration frame assembly 548
registration roller assembly 549
Index 615
toner cartridges 513
transfer assembly 555
transfer kits 513
upper cassette assembly 543
PCAs
assemblies 559
carousel motor 282
developer/imaging drum bias supply 289
high-voltage power supply 291
main relay 293
power supply circuit 167
separation discharge high-voltage converter 295
subrelay 252
tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing 296
PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit)
controller 307
front LED 308
PCAs (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker)
controller 353
LED 354
PCAs (multi-bin mailbox)
controller 327
diagnostic LED 335
user status LED 336
PCBs. See PCAs; PCAs (2,000-sheet input unit);
PCAs (multibin mailbox)
PCL (printer command language)
configuring 88
configuring font information 89
memory full 405
personality support 23
printing font list 83
symbol sets 90
personalities
configuring 88
supported 23
phone numbers, Customer Care Centers 67
photo sensors 265
pick-up motor
description and illustration 176
location 171
pick-up process. See paper pick-up
pick-up rollers
2,000-sheet input unit 204
printer 262
pick-up unit
cover sensor 185
paper sensor 178, 185
pigments 36, 138, 139
pitch, configuring PCL font 89
PJL operation failed 405
plain media. See media
point size for PCL font 89
616 Index
ports
BNC 76
LocalTalk 76
parallel 43, 78
resetting I/O 409
post charger HV module
assemblies 288
removing 290
post charging unit
illustration 136
process 147
POST error 387
PostScript (PS)
configuring 88
errors 88
font list 83
fonts 23
memory full 409
personality support 23
power
button 41
connection 42
consumption 24
cord connection 74, 75
distribution circuit diagram 164
pack 75
requirements 24
switch 187
Power Save mode
circuit 165
configuring 88
electrical specifications 24
fan operation 177
on 405
signal process 165
power supply
3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker and 3,000-sheet
Stacker 212
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 355
circuit 167
removing 276
power supply (2,000-sheet input unit)
description 199
illustration 471
removing 309
power supply (multi-bin mailbox) 317
power-on self-test (POST) error 387
power-up sequence test (multi-bin mailbox) 478
preconditioning exposure 136, 143
preprinted media. See media
prepunched media. See media
primary charging 144
primary colors 138
EN
print
jobs. See jobs
speeds 23
print areas
non-masked, recommended, image assurance 34
print defect
charge roller set 454
color-plane registration 452
developer streak 453
fading 455
hot offset 455
missing toner 454
toner bubbles 453
waves 454
print defects
rain 453
print server
accessories 22
connecting to network 76
network connection 76
printer model included with 22
printable area 34
printer
covers and doors 519
dimensions 25
front view 41
messages 368
model and serial numbers 38
personality could not be run 405
personality does not exist 407
rear view 42
serial number 93
stand 41
supplies 513
verifying installation 105
weight 25
printer command language (PCL). See PCL (printer
command language)
printer control language (PCL). See PCL (printer
command language)
printer control panel. See control panel
printer drivers
color selection 440
handled by HP Driver Distribution Center 66
obtaining 62
request form 64
printer hard disk. See hard disk
printer, configurations 39
printing
booklet 109
color test pages 92
configuration page 83, 407
continuous configuration pages 83
demonstration page 407
EIO pages 83
event log 83, 407
EN
file directories 83
font list 83, 408
LaserJet demonstration 83
menu maps 83
PostScript errors 88
Printing Menu 89
problems. See errors; troubleshooting
process colors 139
processing jobs 408
product data sheets 64
programs, color selection in 440
proof and print jobs, canceling 84, 85
Proof and Print Menu 84, 85
PS. See PostScript (PS)
PSx. See sensors
Q
quantity switch assembly (2,000-sheet input unit)
311
Quick Copy Jobs Menu 84
quick copy jobs, canceling 84
R
radio frequency regulations 46
rain print defect 453
RAM (random access memory)
controller error 384
internal error 383
random access memory (RAM). See RAM (random
access memory)
read only memory (ROM). See ROM (read only
memory)
Ready Indicator light 80
rear assemblies 270
rear cover 243
rear left cover 234
recommended print area 34
recycling
consumables 119
toner cartridges 70
reference materials parts list 514
refilling toner cartridges 69
registration
area jams 392
color values 94
registration frame assembly
illustration and parts list 548
location 517
registration roller
assembly 263, 517, 549
clutch 189
location 136
paper sensor 178, 179, 183, 185
removing 263
registration, duplex 107, 416
Index 617
regulations
Canadian DOC 46
FCC 46
removing
parts 217
safety 222
strategy 222
See also individual parts
repair locations, Customer Support Sales Center 66
repetitive
defect ruler 463
defects 462
replacement frequencies 119
replacing. See installing; removing
requirements
media 29
power 24
site 27
space around printer 28
ventilation 27
reset
cold 94, 395, 431
switch 187
Resets Menu 92
resetting
factory defaults 92
fuser life count 92
I/O 92
I/O ports 409
transfer life count 92
residual toner 148, 150, 152
resolution 23
resource save
area full 405
data full 409
restoring factory settings 409
reverse stepper motor sensor (multi-bin mailbox)
209
right assemblies 261
right cover
subassembly 240
switch 187
right cover (2,000-sheet input unit) 304
right front cover 229
right lower cover 41
right lower cover assembly 242
right rear cover 241
right upper cover 41
right upper cover assembly 238
RJ-45 connection 76
roller, cleaning
charging process 150
control process 162
rollers
illustration 136
installing 127
618 Index
location 118
lower fusing 153
paper and fuser life low 398
paper and fuser life out 398
pick-up 262
registration 263
repetitive defects 464, 465
replace frequency 119
upper fusing 153
waste toner feed 152
rollers (2,000-sheet input unit)
feed 204
lower and upper VTU 204
pick-up 204
separation 204
rollers (multi-bin mailbox)
eject 210
ROM (read only memory)
firmware test 95
installing 106
ruler, repetitive defect 463
S
safety
laser statement 55
ozone 58
removal and replacement 222
toner 57
safety switch (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and
3,000-sheet stacker) 357
scan buffer error 384
scanner
illustration 136
motor lock detection circuit 170
motor not turning 375
process 169
removing 247
sealed envelopes 434
Select key 80
selecting
binding 86
color 440
display language 97
media 29
self-test mode 479
sensors
carousel position 162, 185
cleaning density 389
color cartridge 157, 251
color toner cartridge 185
color toner level 157
color toner lever 158, 185
defective or stuck 434
density 160, 266
density error 378
face-down tray delivery 178
EN
fusing delivery 178, 185, 190, 191
last page (tray 1) 182, 183, 185
last page (tray 2) 180, 185
left cover 185
level sensors (tray 3) 185
lifting plate position 183, 185
names and locations 184
not detecting toner cartridge 399
OHT (overhead transparency) 179, 183, 185
paper (tray 1) 185
paper level (tray 2) 185
paper out (tray 2) 185
paper out (tray 3) 185
photo paper 265
pick-up unit cover 185
pick-up unit paper 178, 185
registration roller paper 178, 179, 183, 185
reverse stepper motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209
separation 185
temperature error 377
temperature/humidity 159
test 96
thermistor 185
thermo switch 185
toner lock 251
top (face-down) output bin delivery 185, 190, 191
top (face-down) output bin paper full 185, 191
tray 1 paper 183
tray 1 paper width 182
tray 2 185
tray 3 185
sensors (2,000-sheet input unit)
names and locations 200
paper entry 200
paper exit 200
paper size 200
paper tray raised 200
test 475
vertical transfer unit (VTU) closed 200
sensors (multi-bin mailbox)
delivery rollers extended 209
left (face-up) output bin full 209
names and locations 208
paper bin empty 209
paper bin full 209
paper delivered to bin 209
paper delivered to head 209
paper entry 209
sensors, paper path
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 486
separation discharge high-voltage converter
assemblies 295
PCA 295
removing 295
separation pad 136
EN
separation rollers
2,000-sheet input unit 204
printer 136
separation sensor 185
serial number
formatter board 93
printer 38, 93
service agreements 66
service LEDs (2,000-sheet input unit) 471
Service Materials Organization (SMO) ordering
information 61
service mode
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 487
Service Mode Menu 93
service notes
HP FIRST 64
ordering 62
service tool requirements 223
setting
color registration values 94
color values 92
settings
factory 409
NVRAM 93
shutter loose 377
simplified page 404
site requirements 27
sizes
cold reset paper 94
configuring default paper 89
configuring media 104
configuring PCL font point 89
configuring tray 1 86
media in duplexer 35
media in input trays 31
overriding media 87
printer 25
sliders problem 480
SLx. See solenoids
SME (Support Materials Europe), ordering from 61
SMO (Service Materials Organization), ordering from
61
smooth color value 92
software
matrix 64
ordering 62
support from HP FIRST 64
solenoids
assembly 518
carousel stop 163
carousel stopper 189
cleaning roller 162
cleaning roller press 189
face-up 258
left (face-up) output bin 189, 191
Index 619
lifting plate 183, 189
tray 1 and tray 2 pick-up 189
tray pick-up 181
space requirements 28
specifications
acoustic emissions 25
altitude 24
consumable storage 26
electrical 24
humidity 24
media 29
media storage 30
operating environment 24
printer dimensions 25
temperature 24
speeds
factors affecting 23
paper feed 179
print 23
springs, tension (2,000-sheet input unit) 313
stacker output bin full 409
stapler 350
calibrating staple position 482
stapler/stacker
standalone test 487
statements
Finland laser 56
laser safety 55
VCCI (Japan) 54
warranty 69
status LEDs. See LEDs
status lights. See LEDs
storage
consumable specifications 26
media 30
printer specifications 24
too many devices 410
subrelay PCA 252
subtractive color process 138
supplies, ordering 61, 66
support
Customer Care Center (CCC) 67
Customer Information Centers 66
Customer Support Sales Center 66
Dealer Response Line 65
font 64
HP ASAP 64
HP Direct 66
HP FIRST 64
HP JetDirect 502
HP Software Distribution Center 66
technical 64
third-party 502
websites 62
Support Materials Europe (SME) ordering
information 61
620 Index
switches
black toner cartridge 187
carousel button 187
defective 433
delivery cover/front cover 187
imaging drum 187
names and locations 187
paper size detection 188
paper size detection (tray 2) 187
paper size detection (tray 3) 187
power 187
reset 187
right cover 187
test print 187
thermo 185
toner cartridge cover 187
switches (2,000-sheet input unit)
DIP 471, 473
names and locations 200
paper quantity 200
paper quantity detection 202
paper size assembly 312
paper size detection 202
switches (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet Stacker)
interlock 356
switches (3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000sheet stacker)
safety switch 357
switches (multi-bin mailbox)
interlock 209, 334
names and locations 208
switching I/O 23
SWx. See switches; switches (2,000-sheet input
unit); switches (multi-bin mailbox)
symbol sets for PCL 90
T
technical assistance. See support
technical training 62
temperature
automatic environment change control 159
fusing 166
sensor 159
sensor error 377
specifications 24
tension springs (2,000-sheet input unit) 313
test print switch 187
tests
continuous 395
CRC 95
developer motor 96
DIMM 95
drum motor 96
engine 398
firmware ROM 95
EN
formatter video 95
hard disk 95
input trays 96
installation 105
output bins 96
paper path 95, 420
printing color pages 92
sensor 96
tests (2,000-sheet input unit)
motor 474
sensor 475
standalone 473
tests (multi-bin mailbox)
paper path 478
power-up sequence 478
standalone 477
tests (stapler/stacker)
paper path 484
standalone 487
text resolution 23
thermistor
fan 177
sensors 185
thermo switches 185
thermographic inks 37
ThinLAN cables, using 77
third-party support 502
timeout for I/O 91
timing charts
description 192
full color 11-by-17-inch sized page 197
full color letter-sized page 195
WAIT period 193
Token Ring 512
toner
black level detection 159
cartridge not installed 399
cartridges parts lists 513
cleaning from catch tray 116
cleaning from fabric 100
color carousel error 377
color level detection 157
fusing process 153
lever unlocked 403
low 410
low and out messages 88
manufacturing codes 456
out 410
product information sheet 57
residual 148, 150, 152
safety 57
waste 152
waste level 155
toner bubbles print defect 453
Toner Cartridge MSDS 57
EN
toner cartridges
cover switch 187
installing black 100
installing color 101
location 118
manufacturing codes 456
recycling 70
refilling 69
replace frequency 119
warranty 69
toner gauge 110
toner lock sensor 251
tools required for service 223
top (face-down) output bin
delivery sensor 185, 190, 191
location 41
paper full sensor 185, 191
paper path test 96
top assemblies 245
top cover (multi-bin mailbox) 316
top cover assembly 232
top output bin
full 411
jams 393
multi-bin mailbox full 398
total
color pages printed 93
duplex page count 94
page count 93
training 62
transfer belt
assembly 517, 555
control process 161
illustration 136
installing 120
jams 480
location 118
press clutch 189
repetitive defects 468
replace frequency 119
transfer charger 136
installing 120
transfer drum
cleaning 465
cleaning process 150
damaged 389
illustration 136
jams 394
location 118
new 406
not installed 402
repetitive defects 465
replace frequency 119
transfer jams 392
Index 621
transfer kit
installing 120
life detection 156
life low 411
life out 411
low and out messages 88
parts list 513
percentage life remaining 94
replace frequency 119
resetting life count 92
transfer roller repetitive defects 465
transparencies
automatic detection 179
for ink jet printers 37
parts list 513
print speeds 23
process 179
reducing curl 433
sensors 179, 183, 185
using 35
See also media
transport belt (multi-bin mailbox) 210
transport belt motor (multi-bin mailbox) 209, 210,
322
tray 1
assembly 517, 552
configuring 85
error feeding media from 382
illustration 136
last page sensor 183, 185
location 41
paper path test 96
paper pick-up 182, 183
paper sensor 183, 185
paper width sensor 182
pick-up assembly 268, 517, 551
pick-up roller 136
pick-up roller clutch 189
pick-up solenoid 189
removing 261
selecting mode 103
size 86, 412
type 85
unknown media 411
See also trays
tray 2
assembly 543
configuring 86
illustration 136
last page sensor 185
location 41
media size sensing PCA 296
paper level sensors 185
paper out sensor 185
paper path test 96
paper pick-up 180, 181
622 Index
paper size detection switches 187
pick-up solenoid 189
sensor 185
See also trays
tray 3
assembly 542
configuring 86
illustration 136
location 41
media size sensing PCA 296
paper level sensors 185
paper out sensor 185
paper path test 96
paper pick-up 180, 181
paper size detection switches 187
sensor 185
See also trays
tray 4
configuring 86
jams 394
removing 305
See also 2,000-sheet input unit; trays
tray pick-up solenoid 181
trays
capacities 31
configuring 85, 86, 103
defective switches 433
empty 413
jams 392
media specifications 31
toner catch 116
See also tray 1; tray 2; tray 3; tray 4
troubleshooting
2,000-sheet input unit 469, 474
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker and 3,000-sheet
stacker 482
checklist 367
cold reset 431
configuration page 415
event log 419
image defects 441
image formation 438
media jams 434
message 368
multi-bin mailbox 477
network 502
paper path 433
repetitive defects 462
See also diagnostics; errors
TrueType fonts 23
typeface support 64
types, configuring media 103, 104
EN
U
unexpected
paper size jams 394
paper size/type 372
unidirectional mode (multi-bin mailbox) 206
unknown media 411
unlatched multi-bin mailbox 480
unlocked toner lever 403
unrecoverable error 387
upper
fuser heater 171
fusing roller 136, 153
VTU rollers 204
user guide parts list 514
user interface features 23
user-replaceable parts 224
width of printer 25
wiring diagrams 503
wrinkled pages 433
write protected hard disk 396
wrong page request 481
Y
yellow
detail value 92
smooth value 92
yellow toner cartridge
installing 101
location 118
replace frequency 119
V
Value key 80
VCCI statement (Japan) 54
ventilation requirements 27
vertical transfer unit (VTU). See VTU (vertical
transfer unit)
virtual stacker mode (multi-bin mailbox) 205
VTU (vertical transfer unit)
closed sensor 200
clutch 200
door open 399
illustration 204
process 201
removing 302
rollers 204
VX ASIC test 95
W
warnings
configuring 88
control panel 368
warranty
printer 69
toner cartridge 69
waste toner
catch tray 116
cleaning 116
collection 152
feed roller 152
level detection 155
watermarks 37
waves print defect 454
websites for support 62
weight
media in duplexer 35
media in input trays 31
printer 25
wheels, developer DSD 464
EN
Index 623
624 Index
EN
Manual Part No.
C7096-90967
*C7096-90967*
*C7096-90967*
Printed on Recycled Paper
C7096-90967
HP Color LaserJet 8500/8550 Printer Family Service Manual
Copyright© 2000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Printed in the USA
8500/8550 Printer Family
Service Manual
English
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement